Home

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual

1. 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Correspondence between the data communication functions and system configurations The following shows system configurations that can use the data communication functions of the Q series C24 The manual names shown in the reference section column in the table below are as follows e Application Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application e Reference Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual a Communication using the MC protocol O Available X Not available F i iy me IEE unctions of the Q series na tin m n ererence section Se ee Ws OE Inteligent function module butter memory readiwrite O O O Sequence programreadwite O O o Reference SS Section 3 11 On demand function Se rN 10 Global function ssid function Section 3 10 3 10 Accessing the PLC of other stations in the MELSECNET H _ Section 2 7 a aee PLC CPU IPLC CPU monitoring function oO o O function xix x Application Chapter 2 b Communication using the non procedure protocol
2. n Cable diameter x 4 10 Giricaan y Pa SARIN H RUN ERR e NEU NEU 4 CH1 SD SD CH2 RD RD CH1 B RS 232 3 R2 3 Sp L 90 3 54 ot 1 45 27 4 1 08 0 18 Unit mm in 1 R1 Bending radius near terminal block Cable diameter lt 4 2 R2 Bending radius near connector Cable diameter X 4 3 r1 Bending radius near crimp contact Connectable as long as not bended extremely App 18 App 18 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 QU71C24N R2 QU71C24 R2 The following diagram shows the QU71C24 R2 and QU71C24N R2 The dimensions of the QU71C24 R2 are the same as QU71C24N R2 except for model name nn fee QU71C24N R2 I aloe RUN ERR Cable diameter x 4 10 NEU NEU e a CH1 RS 232 R2 E 1 CH2 RS 232 Ng QU71C24N R2 Vv eh L 90 3 54 45 27 4 1 08 0 18 j z 98 3 86 Unit mm in 1 R2 Bending radius near connector Cable diameter X 4 3 QU71C24N R4 EO By QJ71C24N R4 RUN ERR NEU NEU om RD SD Jore RD CH1 RS 422 485 SDA SDB RDA RDB SG DL 98 3 86 CH2 RS 422 485 HH ae m
3. Monitor Test BE Flash ROM setting r Module information EAEE T ARNE Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type Serial Communications Module Module model name 0J71C24N Module model name QJ7IC24N Setting item Current value Setting value CH1 ERR occurrence Off CH2 ERR occurrence Off Tuming off ERR LED and initializing the error code by the ERR clear request User frame User frame ae eee NIG ASS Data for user modem initialization Data for modem init CH1 ERR clear request Of Clear request Data for modem connection Data for modem conn CH2 ERR clear request Off Clear request ae X Y monitor test XAY monitor test odem function system setting Modem function Modem function monitor test Modem function manitor test CH1 Transmission control and others system setting CH1 Transmission control CH1 Transmission control and others monitor test CH1 Trans control monitor CH1 MC protocol system setting CH1 MC protocol CH1 MC protocol monitor CHI MC protocol monitor v CH1 Non procedure system setting CH1 Non procedure r Flash ROM setting al r Details Witeto 5 Current value module ciai display Read from module File read Make text file Stop monitor Monitoring Cannot execute test Execute test File save File read Close Close x1 Th
4. SDA imal SDB TT RDA pg RDB TI SG tl co Dl mJ CH2 RS 422 485 Braided shield wire SDA LI SDB pmd rool E i fe Plate terminal Beate included with product QJ71C24N R4 4 Connect the external device according to its specifications 5 See Appendix 5 for the bend radius of the connection cable 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 1 Connecting the RS 232 interface full duplex communications The following shows the connection precautions and connection examples when using the Q series C24 RS 232 interface for full duplex communications 1 Connection precautions a For further information about the following items see the explanation in the applicable section in the User s Manual Application Controlling the communication on the Q series C24 side by the external device side using the CD signal of the RS 232 interface x This is affected by the RS 232 CD terminal check setting in CHn transmission control and others system setting change screen on GX Configurator SC e Performing half duplex communication using specifications on the external device side an example of such a connection is shown in this section e Using modem functions b The connection cable FG signal and shield are connected as follows Connection on the Q series C2
5. g Data communication can be performed with a remotely located external device g Modem initialization and line connection disconnection can be performed O wa Data communication can be performed using the MC non procedure or bidirectional protocol Modem Ho ae 6 Initial settings and communication settings without using a sequence program Various initial settings can be performed using the GX Congifurator SC SWOD5C QSCU E or later hereinafter abbreviated as GX Configurator SC a log a 1 5 1 5 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 7 Connecting the GX Developer and the GOT a Connecting the GX Developer Details are explained in the GX Developer Operating Manual e By connecting a PC installed with a GX Developer to the interface of the Q series C24 at the same time operations such as programming monitoring and testing for the PLC CPU can be performed e By connecting multiple PCs installed with GX Developers to the PLC CPU or Q series C24 at the same time operations such as programming and monitoring can be performed simultaneously by multiple operators Operating the GX Developers using these simultaneous connections can improve program performance e Operations can be performed from a GX Developer by setting the c
6. 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 4 Monitoring the PLC CPU Details are explained in the User s Manual Application a The self station s PLC CPU can be monitored at time intervals set by the user without using a Sequence program 1 The following monitoring information can be sent notified as the result of monitoring the PLC CPU e Transmission of information on devices and the PLC CPU status to be monitored It is also possible to send the monitoring information through combined use of the modem function e Notification of a notification message string data registered as the connection data of the modem function through combined use of the modem function 2 The user can select either one of the following timing choices at which to send the PLC CPU monitoring result to the external device e Send notify every time the PLC CPU is monitored periodic transmission e Send notify when the information read from the PLC CPU matches the conditions set by the user conditional transmission b The PLC CPU monitoring function can be used in communication using the MC or non procedure protocol Data Notification Pager message 9 5 Remote communications using the modem function Details are explained in the User s Manual Application MELSEC rue MiTsusisH
7. Displays communication protocol number setting error status on the CH1 side 10 12 10 12 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 1 6 How to read the current operation status This section explains how to read the current operation status of the Q series C24 When GX Configurator SC is used check the status in the Transmission control and others monitor test screen see Section 8 6 3 e The status of the switch settings by GX Developer can be checked by performing read operations as described in Section 10 1 5 e Refer to Section 4 5 for the switch settings 1 Operation mode status storage area The current operation status of the Q series C24 is stored into the following buffer memory areas 1 Station No storage area address 24FH b15 to bO Buffer memory address 24Fu 0 to 31 Station No 2 Communication protocol status storage area addresses 252H and 2624 b15 to bO Buffer memory address 252H4 1to7 Information on the CH1 side 262H 1to7 Information on the CH2 side Mode number currently operating 3 Transmission status storage area address 253H 263 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Buffer memory address 253m4 0 O O O 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH1 side 2634 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
8. QJ71C24N R4 90 3 54 1 5 27 4 1 08 0 45 Unit mm in 1 R3 Bending radius near the plug in socket block Cable diameter X 4 2 r2 Bending radius near the wire connection Connectable as long as not bended extremely App 19 App 19 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 6 Example of Connection when a Converter is Used The following shows an example of a connection where the RS 232 to RS 422 485 converters are used in order to communicate data using data communication functions with the MC non procedure or bidirectional protocol The converters covered in the Appendix are as follows Model name Manufacturer Recommended Contact Funato cho 7 16 Nakagawa ku Tel 052 361 2290 Nagoya 454 0805 Fax 052 363 1050 KS 1 Shibuya Property West Bldg 12F System Sacom Co Ltd KS 10P Higashi 1 32 12 Shibuya ku KS 485 Tokyo 150 0011 A recommended product is a product that this company has verified and has found to satisfy this company s standards When using this products use it so that it conforms to the recommended product s specifications standards EL Engineering Ltd EL LINE II Tel 03 3797 0211 Fax 03 3797 0231 1 Combination between available converters and connections Q series C24 side System configuration External device Description No of i Available converter connection interface with external devices interface co
9. Q series C24 side RS232 signal RS485 signal co U 4 FG sw swe FG h RD 2 2 RD m H9 1 ON 1 ON DATA 3 3 OUT 25 SD 3 SD 2 ON a jg OIR cS 3 OFF ON h17 se S RS 4 OFF a 14 DSR 6 ER Coni ire 7 7 5 ON RS SG oG 21 cs 8 sM cp EON N g RI 9 9 DR 7 ON SG 7 8 ON x e The CD terminal check setting should be set to No check according to the explanation in Section 3 2 1 1 DC code control or DTR DSR control becomes possible for transmission control FG RDA RDB SDA SDB DSRA psrB R DTRA DTRB RTSA RTSB CTSA Lo CTSB SG App 21 APPENDIX Connection example 3 KS 485 Q series C24 side RS232 signal RS485 signal External device side co H 1 FG swt se U FG RD 2 2 RD ION TRD 2 7_SDA sp 3 37 gp a ON TRD S i SDB 4 5 EANAN FG RDA DTR CS 3 ON RDB se se 6 ER 6 7 4 OFF SG DSR SG 5 OFF Rs Z 20 DR FF cs 24 Tc ee RI 9 25 CNT 7 ON 8 ON x Data communication can be made in half duplex communication e
10. STX in format 3 In ASCII code communication In binary code communication Existence in format 2 eS l T T T Td T T T T T T T BA lnk z alice F E g 8s s E 8 s Dis g Ss Ss pjs 8 N x 5 c oS lt M IN x a LIT 2 5 c oS _es 2 ILIT amp g 2 Zo On E g E Zvajovj amp fo qA ls ox wx Sja 2 e EX 2 o amp loxlsee EX Z2 aH 55 s a 5 2 H s a5 2 ha E E g n a 2 25 9 D 3 gt z S E Q E Q e zZ S S 2 LL LL H L L H L H gt lt 4 Header information 13 15 characters Header information 10 byte 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 3 The Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting The following explains the interrupt pointer setting with GX Developer in order to receive data using an interrupt program For the method to receive data using an interrupt program see User s Manual Applications Chapter 4 Setting purpose The intelligent function module interrupt pointer sets the information to read the receive data with an interrupt program of the PLC CPU during communication using the non procedural bidirectional protocol By performing this setting an interrupt program starts when data is received from an external communicating device and the reading of data received by the PLC CPU becomes possible Startup procedure
11. MELSEC Q 2 Command buttons Initial settings Cannot be selected Auto refresh Starts the auto refresh setting screen Deletes the initial settings and auto refresh settings Closes the parameter setting module selection screen 3 Menu bar a File items Intelligent function madule parameter Online T i Open parameter Chiko The intelligent function module parameters for the project opened by GX ae eae Developer can be processed in file operation Eeee pearen Open parameter Reads the parameter file Sape pe ora Close parameter Closes the parameter file If it has been modified the Exit file save confirmation dialog box appears Save parameter Saves the parameter file Delete parameter Deletes the parameter file Exit Exits from the intelligent function module utility telligent function Module b Online items Online Tools Help Monitor test Starts the monitor test module selection screen M A A Read from PLC Reads the intelligent function module parameters e eiia ben from the CPU module Read from PLC Write to PLC Writes the intelligent function module parameters to Write to PLC the CPU module Teta c Toolitems Tools Help Flash ROM setting Starts the flash ROM setting screen Flash ROM setting atir E aE d Help items Help Code list Displays the ASCII code list Use this list as reference i ere l when setting data a Product information Displays th
12. External device 1 External device 2 External device n C24 1 iin SS i ie i ie 14 14 SDA 14 1 1 SDA 1 l SDA ml 1 1 1 i SDB N i SDB a SDB RDA Af i RDA im RDA E RDB AY I RDB RI RDB SG l SG t l SG FG td l l F ii l Wik twd a We Ret Bee Ro Vaaa er TO RS 422 485 RS 422 485 RS 422 485 cable cable cable CR Terminal resistor 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q d External device and Q series C24 with m n multidrop system configuration 1 Connection example 1 External device 1 External device 2 RS 232 RS 232 SD SD RD RD C24 1 C24 2 RS 422 485 cable LR Terminal resistor 2 Connection example 2 External device 1 C24 1 External device 2 C24n f hey ee ei Vee eee E eens Li SDA SDA I SDA l SDB SDB SDB RDA RDA A RDA R RDB RDB Ar CRI RDB SG SG l SG 11 l FG Ju ph Fe Jv FG V do FG RS 422 485 RS 422 485 RS 422 485 cable cable cable Terminal resistor 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 Settings for GX Developer This chapter explains various settings via GX Developer that allow the Q series C24 to perform data communication with external devices See Section 3 3 3 of the User s Manual Application for how to perform the remote password setting 4 5 1 I O assignment settings Setting purpose The I O assignment
13. ceccecceseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeerees M18 e Communication enable flag cecceceeceeseeeseeeeeseeseeeeeeetees M19 e Completion check flag ccecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeteateas M20 e Receive clear processing execution status acquisition command es ttl hear eli atin Oe Seite a ie es M21 e Receive clear processing execution status judgment COMIMANG iaae eea aa iaa a aaa a aa aaaea a aad ada aaa Taaa TATEA M22 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO MSAC ss 228 835 a aa a eieantsnecesbaar Nes aE M200 M201 e Receive data clear request area information 0 000 DO Clear TEQUGSE c sceects cuecadaeviids ezazesesshbtnene da iadaaa anaa anaiai aaas D1 ee Intelligent function module switch settings Refer to Section 4 5 2 Operation setting Independent Data bit 7 bits Even odd parity Od Sum check code m oae OE ten2 Communication protocol setting Non procedure protocol 00064 switchs Station number setting Statono 00004 c Buffer memory settings used in this example age cess Deomal edeoma me ee Name value 168 A8H Receive data clear request App 41 App 41 APPENDIX 2 Program example lt Receive clear command gt X1025 H PLS M15 SET perea M16 M11 M12 M17 l Mig 1 X1003 X1004 i PLS ERSE lt Receive clear processing exe
14. 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 4 11 Resetting the buffer memory flash ROM setting values to the default values This section explains how to reset the values set in the buffer memory flash ROM to their default values Startup procedure Online gt Monitor test Select monitor Test module Monitor test gt Monitor screen Operating procedure Procedure 1 In the Monitor screen select Default request for System setting default Procedure 2 Click on Execute test The setting values in the buffer memory will return to their default values Procedure 3 Change the setting of Flash ROM write allow prohibit to Allowed Procedure 4 In the Monitor screen select Write request for System setting write Procedure 5 Click on Execute test The setting values in the flash ROM will return to their default values x When confirming the processing results in GX Configurator SC perform Read from module Items subject to this operation in the Monitor screen Setting item Current value Setting value System setting can be made default with the following procedure Execute test System setting default Make Flash ROM write allow prohibit designation Allow Execute test System setting write System setting default Default request Default request X Flash ROM write allow prohibit designation Allow Allow System setting w
15. YES offline operation Start the Flash ROM setting J o Intelligent function module select screen parameter setting module screen See Section 8 3 1 Is the original data saved in a file Read the data from the file Select in the Flash ROM setting screen Display the system setting sub screen See Section 8 4 for changing the setting values eats card obne ae ee PAN e ree Change the setting values in the corresponding a t i nae For 9 h it system setting sub screens JOU W oan ete eae wen See Sections 8 4 1 through 8 4 10 enter or select the new setting value in the Setting value field Have you changed all the applicable setting values In the Flash ROM setting screen click on the button Then in the file designation dialog box J la This operation is allowed only in the Flash ROM designate the file name under which setting screen the data will be saved All of the new See Section 8 3 3 setting values will be saved in the file 1 1 Save the new system setting values in a file for backup Close the Flash ROM setting screen Close C End gt 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 1 Online operation Intelligent Function Module Select Parameter setting module screen See Section 8 3 1 Start the Monitor test screen see eeeeeeeeeeee eens
16. 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH2 side Communication rate setting Operation setting Data bit setting Parity bit setting Even odd parity setting Stop bit setting i Sum check code setting L Write during RUN setting L Setting modification allow prohibit 10 13 10 13 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Example of a program that reads from the current setting status storage area The following shows an example of a program that reads from the switch setting status storage area for current operation of the Q series C24 For details regarding XE and XF of the input output signals used in the program see Section 10 1 2 3 input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 Example of FROM instruction XOE 4 FROWP HO H203 DO KI J Reads error description from address 2031 XOF Reads CH1 side communication protocol o Ko bo FROP HO H252 DI K2 status and transmission status from addresses 2524 to 2531 Reads CH2 side communication protocol status and transmission status from addresses 2624 to 263n LO HO H24F D5 KI J Reads station No from address 24Fn After checking error codes and changed setting values designate the correct setting values and switch mode FRP HO H263 D3 K2 N b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO Communication protocol Error description 2 Communication rate error Set
17. Data for user modem initialization e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen Data for user modem initialization Setting screen Data for user modem initialization _ olxi Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name GJ71C24N Setting item Setting value s To store part please specify as Ex Q2 to store 02 data Data for user initialization 1 H09c4 User control data Initialization command 2 H09c5 User control data Initialization command 3 HO9c6 User control data Initialization command 4 HO3c7 User control data Initialization command 5 HO3c8 User control data Initialization command 6 HO3c9 User control data Initialization command Flash ROM setting Details Write to module Fessler File read module File save Cannot execute test Make text file Execute test Close Setting item RES Setting value storage Reference section containing Setting item buffer memory address detailed explanation Data for user initialization 1 to 30 User control data Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application Data for user initialization 1 to 30 Initialization command Use code to specify a field to register if GX Configurator SC is used for data for modem initialization Example To register the Q2 of data Q2 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q
18. 5 notification execution data No r Flash ROM setting r Details Write to File sav Current value module PERNE display Heed tom File read Make text file Cannot execute test Monitoring Stop monitor Execute test Close Monitor test items buffer memory address detailed explanation Modem tunctoneroroode __ _azty___ X10 Modem initialization completion o o o O X11 Dial in progress X12 Connection in progress X13 Initialization connection abnormal completion X15 Notification normal completion X16 Notification abnormal completion X14 Modem disconnection completion OoOo et Y10 Modem initialization request Section 3 3 of User s Manual Application 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q j Setting value storage Reference section containing Monitor test items buffer memory address detailed explanation Y1 Connection request ooo S O Y12 Modem disconnectionrequest o J o o o o O V14 Notificationissued request o O Modem connection channel designation 2EH GX Developer connection designation 36H Section 3 3 of User s Manual Application Remote password mismatch notification count designation Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count 200D H designation mulated count of unlock process normal completion 22FBH umulated count Ac Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion 22FCH A
19. 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 Data reception when the receive data storage area is larger than the receive data length The following control is performed Example When the receive area for the CH1 side interface is located at addresses 600H to 7FFH default values and data of 511 words or less is received by the CH1 side interface Complete code External device 100 words Q series C24 Reception data read request signal X3 Sequence program Read data count 100 words 2 Data reception when the receive data storage area is smaller than the receive data length Since the following control is performed data link processing is required in the sequence program 1 Reception using the complete code Example When the receive area for the CH1 side interface is located at addresses 600H to 7FFH default values and data of 534 words is received by the CH1 side interface Complete code 511 words 23 words External device Q series C24 Reception data read request X3 Sequence program Read data count Read data count 511 words 23 words 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL External device MELSEC Q 2 Reception by received data count When the received data count is set larger than the receive data storage area the receive buffer memory length default 512 words 1 set in buffer memory addresses A7H 147H is proc
20. YES Is the original data saved gt NO Is the data saved in a file y YES Read the data from the file Read the data from the module s flash ROM File read Read from module Set the flash ROM write allow prohibit Select in the Monitor screen designation to allowed See Section 8 4 12 Select in the Monitor screen Display the system setting sub screens ka 4 E See Section 8 4 for changing the setting values Click each of the setting items corresponding to the setting values to 44 Each system setting sub screen be changed For each item enter or See Section 8 4 select the new setting value in the Setting value field The Monitor screen or each sub screen See Section 8 3 3 Designate the setting value for the item to be changed then click on the Execute test button The setting value will be written to the Q series C24 s flash ROM 1 To write all the new setting values to the flash ROM at once click on the Write to module button after all the applicable setting values have been changed All the setting values will be written to the Q series C24 s flash ROM Have you changed all the applicable setting values NO Do you wish to write the new setting values to the module s Reset the CPU In the
21. 1 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a transmission error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 10 Confirmation using GX Configurator SC e The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 8 6 3 and 8 6 6 e The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 8 6 10 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code GX Configurator SC monitor function See Section 8 6 6 e GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 258H 268n Handling of receive data when a reception error occurs 1 All of the receive data for which an error was detected is ignored and an response message indicating an abnormal completion NAK message is sent to the external device x When an error is detected during message reception the Q series C24 does not issue a reception data read request to the PLC CPU The receive area in the buffer memory will contain the data received normally just prior to the error occurrence Data will not be rewritten Data communications using the bidirectional protocol must be performed after a response message is received in reply to the preceding data transmission If the Q series C24 detects an error while receiving data it sends an NAK message response message to the external device after the data reception completion and ignores the data being received when the error was de
22. 3 2 L gt H order in the order in which a 238M es 32n__ it is received 6064 x1 The OS area of the Q series C24 shown in the above diagram is the memory 8448 bytes that temporarily stores the data to be received while a request for the reading of the receive data is being made to the PLC CPU The user cannot read the receive data in the OS area When the sequence program finishes reading the receive data in the buffer memory in response to the read request the receive data in the OS area and any succeeding receive data is stored successively in the receive area of the buffer memory when the next read request is issued Also when the OS area s free space which stores the receive data is reduced to 64 bytes default value or less a request to discontinue data reception from the external device is issued by the following transmission control the RS signal does not turn OFF e When DTR control is set the DTR signal turns OFF e When DC1 DC3 control is set DC3 is sent When there is no more free space in the OS area to store receive data an SIO error occurs and the SIO information bit in the communication error information storage area address 2011 2024 in the buffer memory turns ON In that case succeeding receive data is discarded until a free space becomes available in the OS area For more details on the transmission control see Chapter 7 of the User s Manual Application
23. 8 4 3 Data for modem connection registration Purpose For data communication and notification using the modem function register the data for connection with external devices Startup procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt Data for modem connection e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt Data for modem connection Setting screen Data for modem connection _ olxi Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 170 No 0000 Module model name GJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Data for modem connection 1 HObb8 No notification Pager receiver designation Gi l Telephone number External line dialing No external line dialing Line types Pulse Wait time for message transmission units sec Message Comment Data for modem connection 2 H0bb9 No notification Pager receiver designation Telephone number Extemal line dialing No external line dialing Line types Pulse eerie Flash ROM setting Details Write to File save module Select input nesi fam File read Setting range No notification Notification Make text file Execute test Close Setting items Su Setting value storage Reference section containing Setting item j buffer memory address detailed explanation Pager receiver designation Telephone number Data for modem External line dialing Chapter 3 of c
24. Address a Applicable Registration a 7 i ae Panes MC Non Bi allowed 8256 8512 Cycle time units designation 2040n 21401 0 100 ms S sony 8613 Cycle time designation 20411 21411 OH No designation i 1H to FFFFH PLC CPU monitoring cycle time a250 pend PLC CPU monitoring function designation 20421 2142n 0 Do not use the function 1 Fixed cycle transmission 2 Condition agreement transmission PLC CPU monitoring transmission measure designation for fixed cycle transmission For designation 0 Data transmission device data and CPU status data Chapter 2 of PLC CPU 1 Notification R E Allowed of User s monitoring Transmission pointer designation For fixed cycle transmission and Manual function data transmission Application 8260 8516 1 to 100 Output head point send from the nth 2044n 21444 Send the user frames designated in the following transmission frame No designation areas from the designated pointer position addresses CH1 side BAH to 11DH CH2 side 15AH to 1BDH Output count designation for fixed cycle transmission and data transmission 1 to 100 Output count designate the number of frame transmissions Data No for connection designation for fixed cycle transmission and notification OBB8H to OBD5 8001H to 801 FH Data No for connection 8262 2046x 8518 2146x 8263 to 8519 to ean ea Use prohibited Syste
25. Monitor item ook Setting value storage Reference section containing Monitor item F buffer memory address detailed explanation BAu to 11DH Chapters 9 through 11 of Output frame No designation 1st to 100th AAA 15A to 1BDH User s Manual Application 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 6 9 Monitor test others Purpose Monitor the result of access to the flash ROM the data communication status of each interface and the result of the intelligent function module switch settings using GX Developer Startup procedure Monitor screen gt Monitor test others Monitor test screen Monitor test others BE Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value a Flash ROM access register read delete result 0000 Station No Switch setting 0 Station No Instruction setting it CH1 SD WAIT status OFF SIO status OFF PRO status OFF P S status OFF C N status OFF NAK status OFF ACK status OFF NEU LED ON status ON X r Flash ROM setting Details 7 ESS to Fiesse Current value Monitoring ESS Fiesse somn display Cannot execute test neadon File read Make text file Start monitor Stop monitor Execute test Close 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor test items Monitor test items
26. PLC parameters gt PLC system setting Interrupt pointer setting For display screen see the GX Developer Operating Manual Setting screen Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting PLC side Intelli module side a Interrupt pointer Interrupt pointer Start No No of module oC O CEEE EEEE EEEE Setting description 1 Interrupt pointer start No on the PLC side Set the start number ranging from 50 to 255 of the interrupt pointer Ixx for use in the sequence program 2 Interrupt pointer No of units on the PLC side Set the number of units 2 of interrupt pointers I for use in the sequence program 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION 3 4 MELSEC Q Start I O No on the intelligent module unit side Set the start I O No for the Q series C24 Start SI No on intelligent module unit side 1 Assign control numbers SI on the Q series C24 side to the interrupt pointers Ixx used in the sequence program 2 Set the start SI No 0 of the interrupt control numbers 3 The interfaces for data reception corresponding to the interrupt control numbers are as follows SI No 0 for interface on the CH1 side SI No 1 for interface on the CH2 side 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 6 Settings with the Utility Package GX Configurator SC The settings defined with GX Configurator SC for operation of the Q series C24 are described in C
27. Use DTR and DC control and perform data communications so that the buffer does not become full Perform RS CS control when the modem function is used If the Read Request signal was turned ON execute read immediately Recheck the CD signal control of the external device Send while the CD signal is ON Set no CD terminal checking and perform communication Transmit data after line connection processing on the interface side that uses the modem function pi System error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error 1 7FADu 10 21 10 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hexa Error Contents decimal 7FC9u to System error 7FECFu 7FE6H The remote password is not registered The remote password processing command was received on the interface side where the modem function is not used The GX Developer connection is selected in the communication protocol setting on the corresponding CH Processing disabled The number of remote password disagreements exceeded the value designated at the address 200D There is an error in the switch setting by the GX Switch setting error 9 Developer Dedicated instructions simultaneous execution error e Setting value is out of range Communication protocol setting error Executed dedicated instructions simultaneously e Instruction cannot be executed with the current communication protocol System error e The OS of the Q series C24 det
28. i User s Manual Application Transmission monitoring time timer 2 designation 9EH 13EH Chapter 5 of Word byte units designation 96H 136H p j Reet User s Manual Application RTS RS designation 92H 132H bO Section 3 2 1 of DTR ER designation 92H 132H b2 User s Manual Basic Transmission control start free area 2012H 2112H Chapter 7 of User s Manual Application 2019 2119 b2 acme User s Manual Application 201BW 211BH Chapters 6 and 7 of User s Manual Basic Transmission transparent code designation 1st 11FH 1BFH 2030H to 2038H Chapter 12 of 2130H to 2138H User s Manual Application Receive transparent code designation 120H 1C0H Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to 10th Chapter 13 of User s Manual Application Chapter 4 of User s Manual Application ASCII BIN conversion designation 121H 1C1H Receive interrupt issued designation 2010H 2110H 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 4 6 MC protocol system setting Purpose For data transmission using the MC protocol register system setting values Startup procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO MC protocol system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO MC protocol system setting Setting screen CH1 MC protocol system setting ofi xi Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 70 No 0000 Module model name GJ71C24N Se
29. signal status 254H 264H 63 User s Manual Basic CS CTS 254H 264H b4 RI Cl 254H 264H b5 Communication protocol status 252H 262H 253H 263H bO 2534 263H b1 Transmission Even odd parity 253H 263H b3 satus 2534 2634 b6 Write during RUM 253H 263H b6 253W 263H b7 Section 4 5 2 of User s Manual Basic 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q f Setting value storage Reference section containing Monitor test items buffer memory address detailed explanation Transmission are Section 4 5 2 of Transmission speed 253H 263H b8 to b11 status User s Manual Basic DTR DSR ER DR DC control designation 93H 133H ener or apter 7 o DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff code designation 941 1344 P f User s Manual Application DC2 DC4 code designation 95H 135H Communication system designation 98H 138H Section 4 5 2 of CD terminal check designation 97H 137H User s Manual Basic Half duplex communications control designation 994 139 H H Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation Chapter 8 of Half duplex communications control designation User s Manual Application Rie 9AH 13AH Retransmission time transmission method designation No reception monitoring time timer 0 designation units byte 9CH 13CH Response monitoring time timer 1 designation units 100 ms 9DH 13DH Chapter 6 of Transmission monitoring time timer 2 designation QEw13E User s Man
30. 2 Example of a program for turning off displayed LEDs The following shows an example of a program that issues an initialization request for all the communication error information of CH1 and CH2 Input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of QC24 Example of TO instruction address 04 and COFF to address 1h Turn off command A Dror HO HO HOCOFFOOFF K1 j Writes 00FFu to 1 Initialization requests are valid only when write operation is performed The initialization requests clear all data in the LED ON and communication error information storage area 201H to 202k at the same time Furthermore when initialization of error information on the CH1 and CH2 sides is requested XE and XF also turn off Data written to the buffer memory address Ok to 1H is cleared after initialization processing If errors persist even after completion of the initialization processing the corresponding communication error information is stored again and the corresponding bit in the LED ON and communications error status storage area 201H to 2024 turns on 1 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q c Examples of programs that initialize displayed LED and communication error information The following shows examples of a program that reads error codes when errors described in 1 above occur in an interface on the CH1 side and initializes the displayed LED and communication error information Incorporate the necessary part of the program Input output si
31. Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution systen Bt The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Set transmission channel Transmission channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 2 Channel 2 CH2 side Result read by an ONDEMAND instruction is stored Transmission result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error code S1 2 Transmission data count Set the transmission data count 2 x1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 10 of the User s Manual Basic x2 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated x3 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the ONDEMAND instructions e System The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the ONDEMAND instructions 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function S2 0 Send 1 aes gt Channel 1 MELSEC Q 1 Data stored in the device designated in S2 and succeeding devices are sent according to the control data of the device designated in S1 and succeeding devices via the on demand function of the MC protocol of the module designated in Un QCPU O OOS O Q series C24 0 Channel to be lt used is set by b15 to bo x the control data gt aes Send C
32. D1 Transmission result 0000x ao 400 Transmission data count designation area D2 Transmission data count 00051 401H D11 42411 to Transmission data i to DiS OEA OAODx For abnormal completion DO D1 D2 Interface number 00011 Transmission result other than 0000n Transmission data count 00051 From buffer memory address 2571 D11 to D15 1 The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 9 2 More than one BIDOUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next BIDOUT instruction only after the execution of the first BIDOUT instruction is completed 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 4 How to detect transmission errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when sending data to the external device The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data transmission Atransmission error occurred because of noise e o User s Manual Data that could not be converted with the ASCII BIN conversion was detected Chapter 13 Designated the transmission data count that exceeded the transmission area size Section 7 2 2 Simultaneous transmissions occurred Section 7 3 A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time timer 2 Application Section 6 3 1 Confirmation using the sequence progra
33. Data No for connection designation for condition agreement transmission and notification OBB8H to OBD5h 8001H to 801 FH Data No for connection CPU abnormal monitoring designation Chapter 2 of User s Manual Application Allowed Data No for callback designation 1 OBBS8H to OBD5h 8001H to 801FH Data number for callback Data No for callback designation 2 Section 8 4 4 o IRW Allowed ee oat Data No for callback designation 6 Me Data No for callback designation 7 Application PLC CPU monitoring function operation status 0 Not executed waiting for registration of PLC CPU monitoring 1 Wait for PLC CPU monitoring time waiting to access PLC CPU 2 Accessing PLC CPU 3 Sending monitoring results PLC CPU monitoring function execution result current 0 Normal completion 1 or more Abnormal completion error code PLC CPU monitoring function 0 Not executed Not allowed number of transmission 1 or more Number of transmissions Monitoring condition arrival block No 0 The monitoring condition is not enabled for any block 1 to 10 Registration order o 4096 CPU abnormal mon The latest block No for wh stored f word bit block nth itoring block ich monitoring condition is enabled is Chapter 2 of User s Manual Application 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Applicable Registration Initial Reference ENEA Hex Application value protocol allowed
34. File save Monitor test screen gt File read File save This operation can be performed from the Monitor Test screen of the utility Monitor test screen Read from module Write to module o aS GX Developer GX Configurator SC Personal computer QCPU 3 Qe5HCPU MODEL RUN O ERR O ER A Indicates an intelligent function module parameter B Indicates flash ROM data USB RS 232 Figure 8 1 Correlation chart for data created by the utility package 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 4 System Registration to Flash ROM Purpose Display the menu screen for flash ROM registration which is used to change the initial values set in the Q series C24 s buffer memory Startup procedure e Online operation Startup from Intelligent function module utility GX Developer Version 4 or later Online gt Monitor test Select monitor test module Monitor test Monitor screen Startup from the system monitor GX Developer Version 6 or later GX Developer gt Diagnostics gt System Monitor Select the Q series C24 by installation status gt gt Monitor screen e Offline operation Tools gt Flash ROM setting gt Flash ROM setting screen Setting screen Screen displayed during online operation 1 Screen displayed during offline operation
35. PLC side Dev name Points Paints Start Transfer SB Transfer SW Random cyclic Random cyclic Transferl SB 512 512 0000 0000 Transfer2 LY Transfer3 Transfert Transfer5 Transfer6 App 32 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Program example for interlocking the remote master station and remote I O station Interlocks should be applied to the programs according to the link status of the remote master station host station and remote I O station other station The following example shows an interlock in the communication program that uses the link status SB47 SB49 of the remote master station and the link status SW70 bit 0 SW74 bit 0 SW78 bit 0 of the remote I O station Station No 1 SB47 H KO E 0 7 JSB47 Baton pass status of host SB49 H KO E n S JSB49 Data link status of host SW70 0 H KO e A s S XSW70 Baton pass status of other station SW74 0 H KO i RK XJ SW74 Data link status of other station SW78 0 H KO 1 I 14 SW78 Parameter communication status of other station B20 TO TI T2 T3 T4 MC No MM SB20 Network module status NO MI ge GR eee ESEN TAG O ee eT eC CO Ge OOP O Pay ght POO eae Thee TE OP LY poat F eg PO RPE Te CM A ENC ee hg EO Te Tete ee pooh i Sample programs Refer to Appendix 9 2 and later i OOO No t fT Ew F Set the following values for the
36. This function allows data communication with an external device at a transmission speed of 50 bps Chapter 4 of User s Manual Basic Clearing reception data by a dedicated instruction This function allows clearing reception data using the CSET instruction during data communication using the non procedure protocol It is possible to clear the data even when data is being transmitted Chapter 6 Section 9 8 of User s Manual Basic Transmission of the PLC CPU monitoring information through combined use of the modem function When the PLC CPU monitoring function is active this function sends the monitoring information of the PLC CPU to the external device through the modem Chapter 2 of User s Manual Application Remote password check This function allows data communication after the external device completes the unlock processing of the remote password set at a QCPU It is executed when the QCPU is accessed from a remote location using the modem function of the Q series C24 in the following forms of data communication e Communication using the MC protocol e Communication using GX Developer Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application Section 3 18 of Reference Manual Automatic initialization for modem Initializes the modem automatically when Q Series C24 starts up Callback After line connection from the GX Developer access to the QCPU from the GX Developer is made possible through line re
37. e Be sure to fix communication cables or power supply cables leading from the module by placing them in the duct or clamping them Cables not placed in the duct or without clamping may hang or shift allowing them to be accidentally pulled which may cause a module malfunction and cable damage e Before connecting the cables check the type o f interface to be connected Connecting or erroneous wiring to the wrong interface may cause failure to the module and external devices e Tighten the terminal screws within the range of specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may result in short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e When removing the communication cable or power supply cable from the module do not pull the cable When removing the cable with a connector hold the connector on the side that is connected to the module When removing the cable connected to the terminal block first loosen the screws on the part that is connected to the terminal block Pulling the cable that is still connected to the module may cause malfunction or damage to the module or cable e Be careful not to let foreign matters such as sawdust or wire chips get inside the module They may cause fires failure or malfunction e The top surface of the module is covered with protective film to prevent foreign objects such
38. 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 3 Precautions when transferring data using RS 422 485 circuit The following precautions must be observed when transferring data with an external device through the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface Take the following into account when the transferring data with the external device 1 Error receive data countermeasures at external device during RS 422 485 connection If the external device may receive erroneous data install a pull up or pull down resistor to the external device as follows Installing a pull up or pull down resistor resistance value criteria approx 4 7 k Q 1 4 W can prevent the reception of erroneous data RDA 4 7KQ 1 4W Terminating resistor 4 7KQ 1 4W RDB Receive data External device When there is a pull up or pull down resistor at the external device erroneous data is not received The following describes the case when a pull up or pull down resistor is not installed to the external device When no station is sending the send line becomes high impedance and noise etc may cause the send line to change and the external device to receive erroneous data In this case there is probably a parity error or framing error Therefore skip the erroneous data Since the first data during data reception is fixed in the following cases also skip the receive data until the fixed head data is received e When using an MC protocol to send data th
39. 30s 4 37 30s 33x 30 4 33n 45s 30n 30 304 30m 3O 30H 34n y 30s 315 30H 30 3O y 31 58u ZAn BOs 30H 30H BOn 34n BOs BOs 30s 30s 35x 33x 36x or or Command massage of the QnA compatible 4C frame format 1 e When using the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system it is necessary to specify the QCPU that controls the Q series C24 hereinafter referred to as the control PLC using GX Developer e It is also possible to mount a Q series C24 of function version A in a multiple CPU system In this case it is only possible to access the control PLC PLC No 1 e It is only possible to access the control PLC if data is communicated by means of frames other than the QnA compatible 4C frame 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 5 1 5 Support for the QCPU remote password function This section explains an overview of the remote password function when a remote password is set for the Q series C24 mounted to a QCPU See Chapter 3 of the User s Manual Application for a detailed explanation 1 Checking remote passwords If the following items are set to the QCPU using GX Developer the Q series C24 performs a remote password check whenever an external device accesses the PLC using the modem function of the Q series C24 a Setting by GX Developer e When the remote password is set on the QCPU with the Q series C24 e When
40. 558 to 561 Of notification Application 22Ex to 231 status Data storage area 2 562 to 565 232H to 235H Data storage area 3 566 to 569 The configuration of each area is the same as the data storage area 1 236H to 239H Data storage area 4 570 to 573 23An to 23DH Data storage area 5 574 to 590 nii 23EH to a System area a er For confirmation 591 of station No 24FH setting status 3 Station No instruction setting Not allowed Communication protocol status switch setting 0 GX Developer connection 5 MC protocol format 5 592 608 1 MC protocol format 1 6 Non procedure protocol 250 260H 2 MC protocol format 2 7 Bidirectional protocol 3 MC protocol format 3 8 For linked operation 4 MC protocol format 4 Transmission setting status switch setting Operation setting b0 0 Independent 1 Link Data bit 0 7 bit 1 8 bit Parity bit 0 No 1 Yes 593 609 Odd even parity 0 Odd 1 Even 2511 2611 Stop bit 0 1 bit 1 2 bit Sum check code 0 No 1 Yes Write during RUN 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed Setting modification b7 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed Eor contirmation Communication rate b8 to b11 50 bps to 230400 bps pe For system b12 to b15 All O of transmission i control status Communication protocol status current Section 0 GX Developer connection 5 MC protocol format 5 j 4 5 2 594 610 1 MC protocol format 1 6 Non procedure protocol Not allowed Section 2524 2621 2
41. Appendix 7 1 Overview of MX Component This section provides the overview of MX Component Different communication paths operating systems programming languages and functions are supported depending on the version of MX Component used 1 Support for a wide range of communication paths to PLCs MX Component supports a wide range of communication paths to PLCs It is possible to construct systems according to the needs of the users lt Example of communication using MX Component gt Ethernet communication 0 Gateway function communication Modem communication 2 Dramatic improvement of application development efficiency MX Component provides wizard style communication setting utilities The user only needs to select settings from menus displayed on the screen in an interactive manner to achieve the communication settings required to access the target PLC CPU Moreover once the communication setting has been performed it is possible to access the PLC CPU simply by specifying the logical station number that is stored via the communication setting utilities App 23 App 23 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 Support for wide choice of basic operating systems MX Component can run on IBM PC AT compatible personal computers running the following basic operating systems Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version
42. Corrective action e Check if the Q series C24 and external RD and SD signal lines are cross connected e Use the external device OPEN statement to check if the opened port and the cable connection port are matched e Connect the wiring so that the DSR CS and External device other transmission control signals are ready transmission control signals are not turned e Since the control signal specifications depend ON on the device connect the wiring by seeing e Signal lines are not connected correctly the instruction manual of the device used If the message passes through an RS 232 gt RS 422 converter e Check the specifications of the converter and modem etc the signal modem and recheck the settings and wiring is interrupted at one of the intervening devices Bidirectional procedure 10 30 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 3 Troubleshooting when the Q series C24 does not return a response message even though an external device transmitted a message and the RD LED blinked ocedure Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional Non oko o lt a Se ee e Check if the communication protocol is set correctly e Check if the mode was switched without using Cominlinicalion procol rie memory mode switching area ote is set incorrectly The communication protocol setting contents and the communication protocol in the current operation can be checked at buffer memory addresses 250n to CH1 and
43. MC protocol format 2 7 Bidirectional protocol 8 6 3 3 MC protocol format 3 8 For linked operation Section 4 MC protocol format 4 10 1 6 Transmission status current Operation setting b0 Independent 1 link Data bit b1 7 bit 1 8 bit Parity bit b2 No 1 Yes 595 611 Odd even parity b3 Odd e Even 253H 263 Stop bit b4 1 bit 1 2 bit Sum check code b5 No 1 Yes Write during RUN b6 Prohibited 1 Allowed Setting modification b7 Prohibited 1 Allowed Communication rate b8 to b11 50 bps to 230400 bps For system b12 to b15 All O RS 232 control signal status Benton 596 612 Control signal Gore 1 ON status Depends 8 6 3 254n 264 status RS b0 DTR b2 CS b4 on signal R Section DSR b1 CD b3 RI b5 status 10 1 3 Not used b6 to b15 All O 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Decimal Hex 597 613 255 2654 1024 2048 4001 8001 1025 to 2049 to 1537 to 2561 to 3072 to 6911 COOH to 1AFFH 6912to 6952 1B00x to 1B28x 6953 to 6993 1B294 to 1B51H 6994 to 7034 B52u to 1B7Ax 7035 to 7075 7076 to 7116 7117 to 7157 BCD to 1BF5H 7158 to 7198 7199 to 7239 1C1FH to 1047H o 7280 io 1C70n o 7321 io 1C99H o 7362 io 1CC2H o 7403 o 7444 o 1D 14H o 7485 o 1D3Dx B7Bu to 1BA3h BA4 to 1BCCx BF6u to 1C1En o 1CEBx MELSEC Q Sa Applicable Registration Application oia dlonednol Reference allowed secon Tra
44. On demand execution Data transmission error transmission error Data transmission result Data transmission result storage area area Modern function error function error Modern function error code Modern function error code storagearea area MC pri G proroco 025A 026A MC protocol transmission error code o error Monitoring device error _ device error 22051 23051 PLC CPU monitoring function execution result See Section 10 2 for a detailed description of the error codes 10 37 10 37 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 11 Troubleshooting when communications is intermittently established and lost Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure With a multidrop link two or Connect the external devices and the Q series C24 ina more devices transmitted 1 1 configuration and perform a communications test data at the same time Since data is transmitted simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal communications among all the devices is possible interlock the external devices so that they do not transmit simultaneously The signal cable wiring connection is faulty Replace the cable or make the connections firm When Check CD terminal e Change the wiring so that the CD signal remains ON all is set the CD signal is the time or change the setting to Do not check CD turned on off repeatedly terminal When half duplex communications is selected the ON OFF timing of each
45. QJ71C24N R2 R4 so so 600 120 2400 4so0 osoo bps e Transmission speed 230400 bps is available for only CH1 Not available for CH2 Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 230400 bps Transmission speed e Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 115200 bps when the communication data monitoring function is used QJU71C24 R2 so so eoo 120 e400 4so 9600 14400 19200 28800 sssoo szeoo 115200 fips e Total transmission speed of two interfaces is available up to 115200 bps 1 7 8 Data format wba 7 7 1 vertical parity or none Processes one request during installed PLC CPU END processing MC protocol communication Number of scans that must be processed number of link scans depends on the contents of the request See Reference Manual Interface Access cycle Non procedure protocol communication Bidirectional protocol communication Parity check All protocols and when ODD EVEN is selected by parameter Error detection MC protocol bidirectional protocol selected by parameter Sum check code Non procedure protocol selected by user frame Continued on next page Sends each time a send request is issued Can receive at any time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Continued from preceding page ten QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 Qu7ice4 Avicenna QU71C24N R4 Raa ee RS 232 RS 422 485 DTR DSR ER DR control Enabled Disabled RS CS control E
46. Receive complete code setting 6 20 Receive data bidirectional 7 6 Receive data non procedure e 6 8 Receive data clear bidirectional 7 14 Receive data clear non procedure 6 14 Received data COUN ceeeeeeseeseeneees 6 20 Receiving methods bidirectional 7 6 Receiving methods non procedure 6 8 ROM RAM switch tests ceeeeeees 4 25 RS 232 interface specification 00 3 3 RS 422 485 interface specification 3 6 RUN LEDA Apirana atoae 10 29 Remote password check 0 0 1 9 5 4 Index 2 S T U 1 Serial communication module 5 1 1 Setting and procedures prior to operation 4 1 Setting for GX Developer 4 12 Simultaneous transmissions 006 7 24 SIOR snk tached wis 10 36 SPBUSY omat eae ee es 9 17 Starting the utility cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 10 Station number Setting ceeeeees 4 17 Sum check COdGC cccecceceseeseeeeseeteees 4 15 Switch setting cecceeeeceeeteeeeseeteeeeeeeeeaees 4 13 System configuration cceeeeeeeeeee 2 3 System registration to flash ROM 8 16 Transmission area bidirectional 7 16 Transmission area non procedure 6 23 Transmission data bidirectional 7 18 Transmission data non procedure 6 25 Transmission methods bidirectional
47. Select input Readfrom Fie read module Setting range No connection 1CH 2CH Make text file Execute test Close Setting items memory address explanation 31 34 37 RS CS control yes no designation SSS O RS CS control yes no designation 2008 200A 200EH 200DH pt b pk Ta ai a pa Pe Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application wo a IJI 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 4 5 Transmission control and others system setting Purpose For data communication with external devices register system setting values for the transmission control method monitoring time and buffer memory assignment Startup procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Transmission control system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO Transmission control system setting Setting screen CH1 Transmission control and others system setting _ oi x Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Setting value DTR DSR ER DR DC control designation IDTR DSR control DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff code designation 1 an bO b DC1 code value HOO Hff b8 bf DC3 code value HO0 Hff DC2 DC4 code designation 1412 bO b DC2 code value HOO Hff b8 bf DC4 code value HOO0 Hff Communication system designation Full duplex CD terminal check designa
48. Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation 9BH 13BH f User s Manual Basic 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 4 9 PLC CPU monitoring system setting Purpose Register system setting values to use the PLC CPU monitoring function Startup procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Monitoring system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO Monitoring system setting Setting screen CH1 PLC CPU monitoring system setting ofi xi Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name GJ71C24N Setting value Setting item Input data No for connection within the following value range HObb8 HObd5 Flash ROM connection data H8001 H801f Buffer memory connection data The range of the input for the transmission pointer designation is 1 100 Cycle time units designation min Cycle time designation PLC CPU monitoring function designation PLC CPU monitoring transmission measure designation Constant cycle transmission Transmission pointer designation Do not use function Data Output count designation Data No for connection designation Number of registered word blocks designation 0j 3 o v m Flash ROM setting Wite to File save module Cannot execute test Fessler File read module Details Make text file Execute te
49. Transmission receiving data monitoring function default buffer Not allowed x Usage is determined by the user x1 Only QU71C24N R2 R4 is usable System area when using QU71C24 2 The following tables show the areas of block monitoring devices No 1 to A an side 8272 to 8361 2050H to 20A9H CH2 side 8528 to 8617 2150H to 21A9h which are assigned for designating the PLC CPU monitoring function 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q CH1 side buffer memory address decimal hexadecimal nth block monitoring device 5 6 8272 8281 8290 8299 8308 8317 8326 8335 8344 8353 2050H 2059H 2062H 206BH 2074H 207DxH 20861 208FH 2098H 20A1H 8273to 8282t0 8291to 8300to s309t0 8318to 8327to 8336to 8345to 8354to 8274 8283 8292 8301 8310 8319 8328 8337 8346 8355 205tuto 205Anto 2063Hto 206CHto 2075Hto 207EHto 2087Hto 2090Hto 2099Hto 20A2H to 2052 205B 20641 206Dx 20761 207Fx 2088 20911 209An 20A3x 8275 8284 8293 8302 8311 8320 8329 8338 8347 8356 2053H 205CH 2065H 206EH 2077H 2080H 2089H 2092H 209BH 20A4H 8376 8385 8294 8303 8312 8321 8330 8339 8348 8357 Monitoring condition designation Judgment 2054H 205Dy 2066H 206FH 2078H 2081H 208A 2093H 209CH 20A5H condition designation 8277 8286 8295 8304 8313 8322 8331 8340 8349 8358 2055H 205EH 2067H 2070H 2079H 2082H
50. ccseeeeeeeteeeeees M11 Receive result acquisition COMMANG ccceceeeeeeteeeeees M12 Completion device for REMFR instruction cceeeeee M100 to 105 Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR instruction M200 to 203 Normal abnormal completion of receive essensen M300 M301 Received data COUN 0 ceeceeccesceeseeteeeteeeieeeaeeeeeeieetieetieeeeee DO Received data when 5 word data are received D1 to D5 Data reception reSUult eee eeceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeieeeieetieeeieeteee D8000 b Intelligent function module switch settings Refer to Section 4 5 2 Bz Setting Switch No F 3 Description Position Designated value value b8 to b15 Operation setting Independent OFF 7 bits OFF No OFF ___ Transmission Even odd parity Odd i Communication rate setting 19200bps Switch 2 Po eet Communication protocol setting Non procedure protocol 0006H Switch 5 Bo se Station number setting Station 0 0000H c Buffer memory settings used in this example Address Decimal Hexadecimal Setting CH1 Name value 150 96H Word byte units designation 164 A4H Received data count designation O1FFH 165 A5H Receive complete code designation ODOAH 600 2584 Receive buffer memory length designation 0200H Data reception result Ye _ App 37 APPENDIX lt Receive lt Read of lt Read of lt Receive 2 Program example read request gt X1003 H PLS received d
51. completion One scan f l i i i Abnormal f f i i 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Error MELSEC Q 1 When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result S1 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in the SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic Program example A program that sends data stored in D10 to D11 using an on demand transmission When input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F X53 A is M50 MOV K MOV KO MOV K2 MOV H1234 MOV H5678 RST RST SET M51 BRR rr ONDEMAND uo DO D10 Mo M SET wt a EA RST M50 D1 D2 D10 D11 M100 M101 M51 M100 M101 M51 On demand transmission command pulse Set the transmission channel to CH1 Set the send data count to 2 words Set the transmission data to D10 to D11 Reset the normal completion flag Reset the abnormal completion flag Set the transmission ready flag On demand transmission execution Normal completion Abnormal completion Reset the transmission ready flag POINT 1 The status of communication vi
52. generates Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure e Data does not match the e Check if the Q series C24 and external device stop bit setting settings are the same Transmission rate is too e Decrease the transmission rate and restart data fast and the next data is communications transmitted before the Q series C24 completes processing of the receive data Data larger than the Use DTR and DC control and interrupt receive buffer size was transmission before the buffer becomes full received Perform RS and CS control when the modem function is used Increase the transmission interval and provide an ample PLC CPU read processing time Communication error The non procedure protocol stores the data signal SIO turned on received up to first the end code received or fixed length data to the non procedure receive buffer memory and turns on the Read Request signal to the PLC CPU If the next data is sent while the Read Request signal is ON the data is temporarily stored to the OS receive buffer When the OS receive buffer becomes full the Q series C24 skips the rest of the data and turns on the SIO LED With a multidrop link e Connect the external devices and the Q series two or more devices C24 in a 1 1 configuration and perform a transmitted data at the communications test Since data is transmitted same time simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal communications
53. signal is not matched e Communications are intermittently established and lost 1 Control the external device so that the ON OFF timing of each signal is matched See Chapter 8 of User s Manual Application Requested processing of the next transmission before the processing of the current transmission is completed Make sure to obtain handshake in the sequence Requested processing of the program next reception before the processing of the current reception is completed x1 The following explains how to take corrective actions when a normal exit response message cannot be received upon sending of a command message 1 When aresponse message of abnormal end is received When an external device sent a command message and received an abnormal end response message take corrective action with the error according to the error code in the response message see Section 10 2 2 When response messages cannot be received Change the setting value for the response monitoring time timer 1 default value is 5 seconds See Section 6 2 of the User s Manual Application If response messages still cannot be received after changing the setting value check the communication protocol setting of the corresponding interface the ON status of the displayed LED and the connection cable 3 When the first part of a response message cannot be received Increase the setting value of the message wait time the default value is 0 ms
54. the remote password check Accessing external device QCPU Q series C24 7 r EE 5 Dialup line Remote r Remoie i Password password SONOS 6 Communication using the MC protocol GX Developer Communication through GX Developer 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 About Added Changed Functions in Function Version B Function Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT MELSEC Q The table below lists the functions that have been added or changed in the Q series C24 of function version B See Section 2 6 for the function version serial NO and software version of products CPU module GX Developer GX Configurator SC related to the Q series C24 which can use added changed functions See Appendix 1 1 concerning a comparison of functions in the different Q series C24 function versions QU71C24N R2 R4 QU71C24 R2 Outline of function This function allows access to the PLC from a PC with GX Developer and a GOT connected to two different interfaces of the Q series C24 at the same time Reference section Section 1 2 of User s Manual Basic Control of RS and DTR signal states This function allows the control of the on or off state of the RS and DTR signals with the PLC program Remark of section 3 2 1 Support for 230 400 bps Data transmission reception at low speed This function allows data communication with an external device at a transmission speed of 230 400 bps
55. wait time 286 446 11Ex 1BE 287 447 11 FH 1BFH For designation of transparent code 8 2 120H 448 1COH 49 3 289 Use prohibited For confirmation of station No setting status For confirmation of LED ON status and communication error status 4 For conversion 1C 1h designation MELSEC Q Registration allowed not allowed Not allowed Allowed Allowed Not allowed Reference section User frame being transmitted 0 Not send 1 to 100 User frame being transmitted nth CR LF output designation 0 Do not send Output head pointer designation 0 No designation 1 to 100 Send from nth Output count designation 0 No designation 1 to 100 Output n Output frame No designation A maximum of 100 can be specified Section 8 4 7 Chapters 9 and 11 of User s Manual Application M it tim ignation X essage wait time designatio Seetion 0 No wait time 1H to FH Wait time unit 10 ms 8 4 6 Transmission transparent code designation 1st 0000H No designation Other than 0000 Designated below Transparent code b0 to b7 00H to FFH Transparent code Additional code b8 to b15 00H to FFH Additional code Receive transparent code designation 0000H No designation Other than 0000 Designated below Transparent code b0 to b7 00H to FFH Transparent code Additional code b8 to b15 00H to FFH Additional code ASCII BIN conversion designation 0 N
56. 208BH 2094H 209DH 20A6H Monitoring device designation Head device No designation Designation of number of points read Monitoring condition value designation Transmission pointer designation for conditional transmission data transmission Designation of number of outputs for conditional transmission data transmission Designation of data No for connection for conditional transmission and notification nth block monitoring device 5 6 8528 8537 8546 8555 8564 8573 8582 8591 8600 8609 2150 2159H 2162H 216BH 2174H 217DH 2186H 218FH 2198H 21A1H 8529 to 8538 to 8547 to 8556 to 8565 to 8574 to 8583 to 8592 to 8601 to 8610 to 8530 8539 8548 8557 8566 8575 8584 8593 8602 8611 2151Hto 215AHto 2163Hto 216CHto 2175Hto 217EHto 2187Hto 2190n to 2199H to 21A2x to 2152h 215Bu 2164n 216Dn 21761 217Fx 2188H 2191H 219Ax 21A3x 8531 8540 8549 8558 8567 8576 8585 8594 8603 8612 2153H 215CH 21651 216EH 2177H 2180H 2189H 2192H 219BH 21A4H Monitoring device designation Head device No designation Designation of number of points read Monitoring condition designation Judgment condition designation Monitoring condition value designation Transmission pointer designation for conditional transmission data transmission Designation of number of ou
57. 20A4H 21A4 Bice a 2055H 2155H Monitoring condition value designation 20A5H 21A5 2056H 2156H Transmission pointer designation 20A6H 21A6H 2057H 2157H t Output count designation 20A7H 21A7H F 2058H 2158H to Data No for connection designation 20A8H 21A8H PLC PCU abnormal monitoring designation Condition agreement transmission 20E6H 21E6H Transmission pointer Number of output designation 20E7H 21E7H Data No for connection designation 20E8H 21E8H User s Manual Application 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 6 8 Transmission user frame No designation monitor Purpose Monitor the setting value of output frame number used when transmitting data with the non procedure protocol using the user frame Startup procedure Monitor screen gt CHO Output frame monitor Monitor screen CH1 Transmission user frame No designation monitor Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value Output frame No designation 0000 1st 2nd 0000 3rd 0000 4th 0000 5th 0000 6th 0000 7th 0000 8th 0000 3th 0000 10th 0000 X r Flash ROM setting r Details Write to File sav Current value Monitoring module A display Cannot execute test Read from 5 Berpe File read Make text file l Start monito Stop monitor Execute te Close
58. 7 15 Transmission methods non procedure 6 22 Transmission Setting 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 14 Transmission specification 3 1 Troubleshooting 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeees 10 1 Uninstalling utility package eee 8 3 Utility PACKAGE Sarnen 8 1 1 1 system configuration 0 0 2 3 Wee ste tie Ao ae 2 4 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis w
59. 8 6 3 RS 232 control signal status 5 254H 264H Section 10 1 Transmission sequence status 1 255H 265H On demand execution result 256H 266H Data transmission result 257H 267H Data reception result 258H 268H Sections 8 6 4 to 8 6 6 Section 10 1 MC protocol transmission error code H 26AH Section 8 6 5 Chapter 11 of User s Manual Application Receive user frame nth 25BH 26BH User frame being transmitted B6H 156H Jal Operation status 2204H 2304H PLC CPU monitoring Section 8 6 7 Execution result 2205H 2305H function ao Chapter 2 of User s Manual Number of transmission 2206H 2306H ane Application Monitoring condition arrival block No 2207H 2307H 1 See Section 10 1 for the contents of the buffer memory 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 Devices a Set the word device of the PLC CPU which stores error and status information in the setting item field when using the auto refresh function between the Q series C24 and the PLC CPU b The devices used must be of the types X Y M L B T C ST D W R or ZR x If bit devices of types X Y M L or B are used a number that can be divided by 16 points e g X30 Y120 M16 etc should be specified The buffer memory data is stored in 16 point units from the specified device number e g if M16 is set data is stored from M16 to M31 c The device can be set to
60. APPENDIX MELSEC Q IL X K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K Read LL X K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K void CVCDlg OnRead long IRet short sData 5 CString szMessage DO D4 are read IRet m_actEasylf ReadDeviceBlock2 D0 5 sData if IRet 0 szMessage Format DO D5 d d d d d sData 0 sData 1 sData 2 sData 3 sData 4 MessageBox szMessage else szMessage Format Read Error x IRet MessageBox szMessage LL 2K AK K K OK OK K K K K KK K ok KK Ok ok K K Disconnection IL 2K K K K K OK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K void CVCDIg OnOpen long IRet CString szMessage Disconnection IRet m_actEasylF Close if IRet 0 MessageBox The disconnection was successful else szMessage Format Disconnection Error x IRet MessageBox szMessage App 29 App 29 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 8 Example of Clear Process Program for Receive Data When performing data communications with non procedure protocol use the receive data clear request shown in 6 1 4 and display the sequence program example if clearing the receive data from external device If the Q series C24 input output signal is X Y000 to X YO1F The following I O signals X and internal relays M are used in the program XIE XIF a G a 200 C24 ready WDT error C24 normal X23 p s Receive data Receive data clear request clear reques
61. C24 5 Receive for sending execution data clear disabled too processing Buffer memory address A8 o o PLC CPU Program TO instruction Write 1 to address A8H X23 PLS MNS J Reception Reception clear clear request request pulse 15 e a mw Reception clear Reception request pulse clear acknowledgement lt Execute reception clear processing gt M16 Mii M12 M7 M18 X4 1H F H H H 40 Ho HOAs Ki KI J Reception Processing Processing Clearing Comuni Reception Reception clear reception transmission reception cation read request abnormal acknowledgement 1 disable detection SET m7 J Clearing reception lt Execute reception clear processing gt M17 FROM HO HOA8 DO Kl J Clearing reception RST M16 Reception clear acknowledgement m7 J Cleaning reception a E M18 Communication isable _ __ EOE m8 Communication disable A T M19 X H Communication i able Reception Clearing Communication clear reception disable acknowledgement 77777777777777 x1 Add the dotted line portion to the sequence program when the function version A Q Series C24 is used Carry out communications when M19 is ON 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 5 How to detect reception errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when receiving data from the ext
62. Compatibility with Multiple CPU Systems 2 11 Compatibility with the QOOCPU Q01CPU Serial Communication Function 3 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE QnA COMPATIBLE 3E 3C 4C FRAMES 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 Message Formats List of Commands and Functions for the QnA Compatible 3E 3C 4C Frames Device Memory Read Write Buffer Memory Read Write Reading from and Writing to the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module PLC CPU Status Control Drive Memory Defragmentation for Other Station QnACPU File Control Registering Deleting and Reading User Frames for Serial Communication Modules 3 10 Global Function for Serial Communication Modules 3 11 Data Transmission to an External device On Demand Function for Serial Communication Modules 3 12 Initializing the Transmission Sequence for Serial Communication Modules 3 13 Mode Switching for Serial Communication Module SH 080008 F 3 14 Turning Off Displayed LEDs and Initializing Communication Error Information and Error Code for Serial Communication Module 3 15 Turning Off the COM ERR LED for Ethernet Modules 3 16 Loopback Test 3 17 Registering or Canceling PLC CPU Monitoring for Serial Communication Modules 3 18 Remote Password Unlock Lock 4 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE QnA COMPATIBLE 2C FRAMES 4 1 Control Procedures and Message Formats 4 2 Contents of the Data Designation Items 4 3 List of Commands and Functions for Q
63. Designated value of modem connection channel is incorrect Ea gt E 10 25 E spi error There is an error in the designation of the number of L initialization retries Corrective action Reference section Set 0 to 1 to the notification execution designation Set the number of connection retries in the range of 1 to 5 Set the connection retry interval in the j Section 3 3 6 range of 90 to 300 s s in the range of 1 to 60 the range of 1 to 5 initialization or 0 Section 3 4 5 Recheck the dialing number of the external line kooo ee y O After the modem has been initialized connect to the network if the external destination is not connected to the network or report it data for connection Section 3 4 6 connection designation Recheck the waiting time for the notification message part of the message Section 3 4 4 transmission e Recheck the telephone number in the data for connection Check if the destination is ready for a connection Recheck the set value of the connection time out Recheck the initialization command Check if there is any problem with the modem TA by seeing the operation manual of the modem TA Connect the modem TA to the Q series C24 Check the connection cable by seeing the operation manual of the modem TA Section 3 3 6 Section 3 4 4 Section 3 4 6 Section 3 4 7 Section 3 3 6 Section 3 4 3 Section 3 4 4 Set 1 to 2 to the modem connection channel designati
64. F buffer memory address detailed explanation 200 SD WAIT status bO SIO status PRO status P S status C N status NAK status DM N oOo oa pe Oo Ze po se O o o N DS Oo are pe oO pe oO loy O gt QO A n a D 2 Oo pe fo NEU LED status ERR LED status 2024 b15 ommunication error clear request for CH1 and to turn LED off D WAIT status IO status P S status Chapter 10 of 202H 1 203H 203H 203H 203H 203H 203H Q UID W ps O o v D O Age x X Z a In S z 8 Ble l5 5 o User s Manual Basic NEU LED status ERR LED status ommunication error clear request for CH2 and to turn LED off H1 Communication protocol setting No error H1 Mode switching error of setting change prohibit time H2 Transmission speed setting error bO b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 bO b1 b3 b4 b5 b7 tation No out of range error 203H b14 Linked operation setting error Number of registered user frame Number of registered default registration frames Flash ROM system parameters write result H 202H b14 H v IO JIO IO IOIO IO IO T a am N N O 4 Sla S S 5 Q 3 5 0 3 S Q Z 5 R I O HA 2 S S S D gt Rel 9 o O oO O 4 3 rs D Q Ss Q n O S 2 18 S e 2 o 5 a 2 Dn Rel 5 2 ga oO O 5 Z ia D 2 k ta f D 3 i gQ fa D 3 D 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurato
65. Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 1 4 Section 2 1 2 4 Section 5 2 Section 6 1 4 Section 9 8 Appendix 7 QJ71C24N QU71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Jan 2003 SH NA 080006 F Addition SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About Manuals About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Section 1 3 Section 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 6 2 7 Section 3 1 3 2 1 3 3 1 3 6 3 8 3 9 Section 4 1 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 1 Section 6 1 1 6 1 2 Section 7 1 7 2 2 Chapter 8 all Section 9 1 9 6 Section 10 1 2 b 10 1 3 1 10 2 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 1 Appendix 3 Appendix 5 Appendix 9 Jun 2004 SH NA 080006 G Correction About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Chapter 2 all Section 3 8 Section 4 2 2 1 Section 5 1 3 POINT Section 5 1 4 Chapter 8 screen change Section 8 6 10 Section 10 1 1 Section 10 2 Addition Appendix 9 Sep 2004 SH NA 080006 H I Correction Section 1 3 Section 2 5 2 6 Section 3 5 3 6 3 9 Section 4 1 Chapter 8 screen change Section 8 6 9 8 6 10 Section 10 1 10 2 Appendix 1 1 Addition Appendix 9 12 Japanese Manual Version SH 080001 L This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any pat
66. J Resets the CH2 mode switching request X100F a LPLS M22 J CH2 mode switching completed M22 i Z REMFR J1 KI KI HO H203 D12 KI M106 J Transfers the mode switching error status App 55 App 55 APPENDIX Ss S 5 a X RST SET RST SET App 56 SET M300 M301 M300 M204 M205 J Resets the changing flag F Sets the change completion flag J Reexamines the modifications REMFR instruction abnormally completed MELSEC Q App 56 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 10 Setting Value Recording Sheet The following sheet is for recording parameter setting values set by GX Developer Use as many copies as needed x In order to review the setting values of the utility package GX Configurator SC print out the content of the file generated by the Make text file function of GX Configurator SC which can be used as the setting value recording sheet Module No Recording sheet 1 Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting GX Developer Set data Data item name f setting screen Setting value Intelligent Interrupt pointer start No o f CPU side 3 Input format Decimal function module Interrupt pointer No of modules 2 fixed interrupt pointer Intelligent Start I O number lt _ a Input format Hexadecimal setting module side Start SI number Input format Decimal Recording sheet 2 R
67. Operation Instructions A CAUTION e When performing the control of the PLC in operation especially changing data program and operation status status control by connecting a personal computer etc to the intelligent function module read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained Failure to perform correct operation s to change data program or the status may result in system malfunction machine damage or an accident Disposal Instructions A CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date_ Manual Number Dec 1999 SH NA 080006 A First Printing Oct 2000 SH NA 080006 B Add the contents of the function version B Correction Contents Entire manual change MELSECNET 10H to MELSECNET H About Manuals About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Section 1 2 1 2 8 1 3 POINT Section 2 2 2 3 2 5 2 6 Section 3 1 3 6 3 9 Section 4 2 4 4 1 2 a Figure 4 6 1 Chapter 5 all Section 6 1 1 6 1 3 6 1 4 Section 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 2 2 Section 8 1 8 2 1 8 2 2 8 3 1 8 3 2 Section 9 2 to 9 7 Section 10 1 1 10 2 1 10 3 8 10 3 18 Appendix 1 1 2 Appendix 2 all appendix 3 2 Appendix 7 appendix 8 Addition Entire manual add the explanation on MELSECNET H remote I O station The Manual s Use and Structur
68. Protocol Reference Manual This manual explains how the external devices read and write PLC CPU data through communication SH 080008 with the MC protocol using the serial communication module Ethernet module 13JF89 sold separately GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Protocol FB support function This manual explains the function and usage of the protocol FB support function that supports the SH 080393E creation of the data communication program of the module and set up of each parameter 13JU46 sold separately Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction For details on making Mitsubishi PLC conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction when installing it in your product please see Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction of the User s Manual Hardware of the CPU module to use The CE logo is printed on the rating plate on the main body of the PLC that conforms to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction By making this product conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction it is not necessary to make those steps individually The Manual s Use and Structure Howto use this manual 2 In this manual details of the serial communication modules QU71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QJ71C24 and QU71C24 R2 are organized as shown below according to their applications Please use this manual using the contents below as a reference To learn about
69. Q vee series C24 A 3 Check and correct the external e The PLC No is not FF or a station No set in the A 10H PLC No error device transmit message and network parameters ok nat restart data communications Send again e An error was detected upon access to the PLC a fe A 11H Mode error CPU Conduct individual station recovery test and check the Q series C24 Special function A Check and correct the external K ___ A special function module does not exist at the k module designation p e device transmit message and specified position oe error restart data communications Check the error and take Special function e An error was detected upon access to a special corrective action according to the module bus error function module at the specified position manual of the corresponding module RE ine e f an error occurs during A compatible 1C frame communications the Q series C24 adds a 2 character error code 00H to 10H 42H to the NAK code and returns the NAK code to the external device and stores the error code equivalent to QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frame error code to buffer memory address 25AH CH1 or 26AH CH2 The exact error contents can be checked by reading the value stored to the buffer memory See Section 10 2 1 for a detailed description of the error codes 10 24 10 24 10 TROUBLESHOOTING 10 2 3 Error code list while modem function is used MELSEC Q The following describes the
70. R2 R4 A1SJ71QC24 R2 UC24 C24 S8 AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 R2 R4 PRF AJ71C24 S8 Appendix 2 1 Functional Comparison with the Q series C24 and the QnA A Series Modules The following shows a functional comparison between the Q series C24 and the QnA A series modules The symbol in the model name columns indicates that the corresponding functions are compatible between the applicable models for more information see the manual for each module Indicates functions that have been added to or modified from the QnA A series modules Communication using MC protocol Communication in QnA Compatible 4C frame Communication with ASCII code Communication Communication in QnA compatible 4C frame with binary code Read write of QCPU device memory Batch read write of device memory 5 oak x Excluding multiple block batch read write utile eo ban wade 48 fein a aa data a T oe e Transmission from the PLC CPU on demand cee x a o Communication with m n connection between the PLC CPU and o external devices Communication using non procedure protocol ee OOO Transmitted received with arbitrary format Q Q Transmitted received with user trame o d OO o Jeca x Transmitted received with ASCII BIN conversion Se o x x Transmitted received with transparent code designation E e a a a Communication using bidirectional protocol Transmitted received with arbitrary format C c Transmitted received with ASCI
71. R4 RUN ERR RUN RUN ERR om so 80 fore D on so ce om so so fore RD RD RD RD RD RD CH1 RS 422 485 LON SDA CH1 2 rs 232 SDB w CH1 4 gt RDA ime 2 gt RS 232 RDB yma sl EY D E RS 422 485 V ON SDA pm soo EL 4 gt RDA yma cH2 2 gt rs 232 RDB ima sol Eq co Ql TT L J KOZ QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 1 The external diagrams of the QU71C24 are the same as QU71C24N except for the model name x2 The external diagrams of the QJ71C24 R2 are the same as QU71C24N R2 except for the model name PN Name dE O Cones Cid 1 Display LED Display LED For details see 1 2 RS 232 interface RS232 interface for serial communication with external devices D Sub 9 pin RS422 485 interface for serial communicati ith ext RS 422 485 interface ATE Sema devices 2 piece terminal block RS 422 485 interface a RS422 485 interface for serial communication with external devices 2 piece plug in socket block 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 1 LED display list QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 RUNO CERR RUNO DOERR RUNO COERR NEUO ONEU NEUO NEU NEU O NEU CH1 sp O OSD CH2 CH1 SD OSD CH2 CH1 sD O OSD CH2 RDO ORD RDO RD RD ORD Display contents On flashing Compatible protocol Non procedural Bidirectiona
72. S1 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in the SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic Program example The following example shows a program that sends any data stored in D11 to D15 using the non procedure protocol When input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X YOO to X Y1F X20 M50 Riv ABCDEFG nov nov toy ig ________________________ ourrur uo Do vo m f PLS HOAOD K ko K5 SET MI IL es MOV X21 cc RST SET M50 The transmission command is converted into pulse Transmission data is stored Designate the number of the interface CH D that will send the data Clear the transmission result storage device to 0 Designate the transmission data count in word units Designate K10 when the unit is bytes The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent After the OUTPUT instruction is executed the user designated transmission complete signal MO turns ON for one scan Storing the transmission data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory and issuing a transmission request to the Q series C24 are all ex
73. Section 8 6 4 When a transmission problem occurs read operation is executed to check the status of the data communication using the MC protocol 1 Transmission sequence status storage area address 255H and 2654H The status of data communication using the MC protocol is stored as a numerical value in buffer memory addresses 255H and 265n b15 to bO Buffer memory address 2554 0to9 Information on the CH1 side 265 0to9 Information on the CH2 side The following shows the correspondence between the numerical values in the transmission sequence status storage area and the data communication status Request from an external device Message wait External device Station number HL Q series C24 Response from CPU 6 1 6 is repeated afterward Stored 0 1 i 3 4 i 5 i 6 value 2 Values 7 to 9 are stored when mode switching or initialization of transmission sequence is performed REMARK When the target interface is not set to use the MC protocol 0 is stored in the transmission sequence status storage area 2 Example of a program that reads from transmission sequence status storage area The following shows an example of a program that reads from the transmission sequence status storage area input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 Example of FROM instruction Read command nf iH on the CH1 side from address 255n FROM
74. Sending Data to the External Device This section explains data transmission from the PLC CPU to the external device 6 2 1 Transmission methods The following shows how to send data in any format using the non procedure protocol PLC CPU Transmission data STX A B C D E F G H ETX 02H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H 47H 48H 03H Q series C24 ij ee Transmission area Transmission buffer memory data count P ee K 00n OAx CA SIX Transmission 411 02x data C i B designation 43x 42 1 2 area E D OUTPUT instruction 45x 1 44n gt i G i F 471 4614 ETX H 03x 48x External device Contents CH1 CH2 Control timing Transmission instruction OUTPUT instruction completion device OUTPUT instruction Transmission data is stored in the device designated with the OUTPUT instruction Control data is stored in the device designated with the OUTPUT instruction When the OUTPUT instruction is executed the Q series C24 sends the amount of data designated by the transmission data count from the transmission data area to the external device in ascending order of the transmission data area addresses 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data This section explains t
75. Set the allowable number of words for received S 3 1 or more User receive data data that can be stored in D1 1 The command of G P BIDIN cannot be converted into pulse 2 G P BIDIN should be executed while the read request of the input output signal is turned on 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function x1 x2 MELSEC Q When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated as the unit types The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the BIDIN instructions e System The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the BIDIN instructions The function stores in the device designated in D1 and succeeding devices the data received via the bidirectional protocol of the module designated in Un according to the control data of the device designated in S and succeeding devices When a BIDIN instruction is executed on a channel other BIDIN instructions cannot be executed on the channel at the same time If an attempt is made during execution of a BIDIN instruction to execute another BIDIN instruction the second instruction will not be executed until the execution of the first instruction is completed It cannot be used along with BUFRCVS instruction for interrupt programs Whether a BIDIN instruction was completed normally can be checked by the
76. When checking time out up to reception of the response message at the external device during data transmission from external device to the Q series C24 make the time out time the time shown below or longer PLC CPU maximum scan time x 2 100 ms External device framing error When nothing is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external device though the RS 422 or RS 422 485 interface a framing error may be generated in the external device Make the external device skip the data up to transmission of the head data ENQ NAK etc of the message from the Q series C24 Before communicating data through the RS 422 485 interface check Q series C24 specifications given in Section 3 3 Data bit settings When adding a sum check code to a message set the data bits to 8 bits using the transmission setting of the GX Developer For more details on the data bit settings see Section 4 5 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC The GX Configurator SC is a tool that supports the production of necessary PLC programs with initial setting monitoring and testing and data communication processing of the Q series C24 The GX Configurator SC is composed of an intelligent function utility and protocol FB support function 1 Intelligent function utility utility package see this chapter The utility package facilitates the initial settings and monitoring of the Q series C24 by usin
77. When the Q series C24 error LED lights up because a reception error has occurred turn off the light if necessary in accordance with Section 10 1 Also if a reception error has occurred on the external device side handle the error by seeing to the operating manual for the external device x Handle the occurrence of a reception error on the Q series C24 side using the following corrective actions e When communicating with the MC protocol The Q series C24 will disregard the received data or returns a response message indicating an abnormal termination if it detects a reception error after receiving the head data of the command message in the set format If the reception error is detected before the head data of the command message in the set format is received the received data will be disregarded When communicating using non procedure protocol If the Q series C24 detects a reception error the reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB turns ON Perform procedures such as detection of reception error or clearing received data as required by following the explanations found in Sections 6 1 4 and 6 1 5 When communicating using bidirectional protocol When the Q series C24 detects a reception error after the head data of a communication message for bidirectional protocol is received it returns a response message indicating an abnormal termination If the reception error is detected before the head data of the communication message for
78. X101E HO HI Ho H3F2 H3F3 H8001 H8000 H41B Z RENTO J1 K8 lt Transmission request gt M102 M103 SET M103 J_ ce lt Processing for normal completion gt X1000 SET RST lt Processing for abnormal completion gt lt Abnorm X1001 4 Poo PLs App 4 al completion Read of data transmission result gt M12 X101E t K 4 HH REWFR UI KI KI HO H257 D20 KI M104 M105 SET M105 HK SHY FtT RST 5 M10 DO DI D2 M100 M11 M200 D10 Dil D12 M102 Y1000 M201 M300 Y1000 M301 M12 M104 M202 M203 Y1000 Changes the transmission command into pulses Sets the transmission data count J Sets the transmission data J Transfers the setting value to the communication area of the buffer memory bed bed Transmission user frame designation command Lo Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Lo Sets the CR LF output Lo Sets the output head pointer Lo Sets the output count Lo First output frame No designation Lo Second output frame No designation Third output frame No designation Lo Fourth output frame No designation Fifth output frame No designation Transfers the setting values to the transmission user frame designation area of the buffer memory Lo Turns ON the transmission request signal Lo Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction L
79. X14 6 Modem disconnection complete ON Disconnection completed 5 x6 Notification normal completion ON Normal completion X X Section 8 6 4 Section 8 6 5 Section 8 6 6 Section 6 1 Section 7 1 Section 8 6 4 Section 8 6 5 Section 8 6 6 Section 6 1 Section 7 1 Section 8 6 2 Application Chapter 3 15 16 6 Notification abnormal completion l ON Abnormal completion X17 1 Flash ROM read completion ON Completed Flash ROM write completion _ON Completed 8 x19 Flash ROM system setting write completion ON Completed Device number section ON Requesting transmission ON Data read completed ON Requesting switch Chapter 15 Y3 Y4 Use prohibited Y5 Y6 ON Requesting transmission ON Data read completed Chapter 15 Y9 CH2 Mode switching request ON Requesting switch ON Requesting error clear Section 8 6 10 ON Requesting error clear Modem initialization request standby request ON Requesting initialization ion ri Y11 6 Connectio equest l ON Requesting connection V12 6 Modem disconnecnon r gdest ON Requesting disconnection Y13 Use prohibited Y14 6 Notification issued request l OFF Requesting notification issuance Use prohibited YA YB Use prohibited YC YD YE YF Section 8 6 2 Application Chapter 3 Flash ROM read request ON Requesting Flash ROM write request ON Requesting Flash ROM system setting write request ON Requesting 3 SPECIFICAT
80. YOE XOE 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 1 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a transmission error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 10 Confirmation using GX Configurator SC e The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 8 6 3 and 8 6 5 e The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 8 6 10 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code GX Configurator SC monitor function See Section 8 6 5 GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 258H 268H Receive data when a reception error occurs a Storing receive data The receive data for which an error was detected is discarded and only the normally received data is stored in the Q series C24 Thus there may be missing data among the data that has been read to the PLC CPU when a reception error occurs Reading receive data When receive data is read to the PLC CPU by turning the reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB ON the data that was normally received prior to the error detection is read Read and discard receive data as needed 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Q series C24 PLGCPU Receive area Q25HCPU R Reception error causing data IEN eception buffer memory RUN D ab
81. a converter that is compatible with the external device and PLC CPU system configuration 1 1 1 n m n 3 Device connected to the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface must be standardized as RS 422 or RS 485 including 1 n and m n connections 2 Connection examples a External device and Q series C24 with 1 1 system configuration Q series C24 Signal name External device Signal name Terminal resistor a z gt RDA ep aE SDA Xo RSA Terminal resistor RSB CSA CSB SG FG 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q b External device and Q series C24 with 1 n multidrop system configuration 1 Connection example External device C24 1 C24 2 C24n SDA CE soe RDA a RDB D 1 ot SD Sadia S SG 14 an RD RD FG Wala yy FQ Jy RS 422 485 RS 422 485 cable cable Linked Terminal operation LE resistor 2 Connection example 2 External device C24 1 C24 2 C24n Ae EA ee ae AS ew t4 1 SDA 1 1 I SDA Eo l SDB SDB H she ERA RDA 1 RDA CR I CR RDB RDB 4 t RDB SG l SG i I raataa vee M PAS FG VO A FG RS 422 485 RS 422 485 RS 422 485 cable cable cable Terminal resistor c External device and Q series C24 with n 1 multidrop system configuration
82. access other stations on other MELSECNET 10 data communication must be performed in a QnA compatible 3C 4C frame Create a new program for the external device side according to Chapter 3 of the Reference Manual 4 Itis not possible to access other stations via the MELSECNET II B d Transmitting data to the external device by the on demand function 1 The program for data transmission on the PLC CPU side is different from when UC24 C24 S8 is used Create a new program on the PLC CPU side according to Section 3 11 in the Reference Manual 2 Data to be sent to the external device is identical to when the UC24 C24 S8 is used 3 Data communication using the non procedure protocol a Data transmission reception 1 The same data transmission reception as used by UC24 C24 S8 can be performed 2 Create a new program for data communication upon checking functions and instructions used on the PLC CPU side in Chapter 6 of this manual and Chapter 11 of the User s Manual Application Data transmission reception is performed using dedicated instructions App 11 App 11 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 3 When data is received by a reception end code the external device side must send the end code data the default is CR LF code ODH and OA at the end of the data sent to the PLC CPU side Once any end code is registered data can be transmitted in the same way as for the UC24 C24 S8 4 The external device side can receive data fro
83. accordance with the data length in the message See item b above and the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The transmission data portion is the number of the transmission data designated by the sequence program using the BIDOUT instruction The Q series C24 sends the transmission data using the existing codes until the transmission data count is reached in accordance with the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC to the transmission data designation area 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q d Sum check code The sum check code expresses the numeric value for the lower two bytes 16 bits of the results sum from the addition of the data length and the data portion in the message as binary code data When Sum check is specified with the transmission setting in GX Developer it is necessary to add a sum check code at the end of the message 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 The Q series C24 checks and processes the sum check code received It cannot be read from the sequence program When No sum check is specified once a data portion of message corresponding to the data length is received the succeeding data received will be ignored up to the control code that follows See a The following example shows the contents of a sum check code in the message 2 For data comm
84. action by referring to the CC Link Master Local Module User s Manual e Take corrective action by referring to the Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual e Take corrective action by referring to MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network system reference manual 10 22 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q x1 Take corrective action in the following procedure 1 Check whether the Q series C24 power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit 2 Check whether the operating environment of the Q series C24 is within the general specifications range of the CPU module 3 Check whether the power supply capacity is sufficient or not 4 Check whether the hardware of the Q series C24 CPU module and base unit are normal according to the manuals of the corresponding modules If any module is faulty please contact your local Mitsubishi service center or representative for repair 5 If the problem cannot be solved through the above steps please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 10 23 10 23 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 2 2 A compatible 1C frame communications error code table The following table lists the error code error contents and corrective action for errors generated during A compatible 1C frame communications Error code Hexa Error Contents Corrective action decimal e Change the setting to Enable write d
85. among all the devices is possible interlock the devices so that cannot transmit simultaneously 10 36 10 36 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 10 Troubleshooting when communication error CH1 ERR CH2 ERR generate Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure There is an error in the Read the error code from the buffer memory communication protocol and check the error contents and change the or transmission setting switch setting to the correct setting There is an error in the Read the error code from the buffer memory on line mode switching and check the error contents and correct the designation designation contents On demand execution Read the error code from the buffer memory generated an error and check the error contents and correct the designation contents The Q series C24 Read the error code from the buffer memory detected an error while and take the corrective action corresponding to transmitting data the error contents The Q series C24 e Read the error code from the buffer memory detected an error while and take the corrective action correspondingto O O receiving data the error contents ERR LED turned on e When the ERR LED is turned on the error code is stored to the following buffer memory Error code storage buffer memory Error cause Name Switch eae error 2034 Switch setting error mode switching error storage area Mode Mode switching error error
86. and assign the logical station number set in step 1 to the ae property of the pasted control EE Forms Formi Formt Modules Read Device Do JActEasyIFi Act asyir Alphabetic Categorized ActEasyIF1 ber pi ActLogicalStationNumber Property ActLogicalStationNumber foma OOO O foma E a A ste zl 3 Use the functions provided by the software to write a z program that reads the device data ret ActEasyIF1 GetDevice DO lpData 0 Labelil caption lpData 0 End Sub l w Formi iof xi Do 128 Completed App 26 App 26 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Sample program The following sample program reads DO to D4 five points of the target PLC using the logical station number a When Visual Basic is used 1 Screen example Form1 Texti Enter the logical station number LOL Connection 4 Command Connect to the communication line a enter tetas Read fei Command2 SEAE Read the device data vsssss Disconnection ft Command3 Se eee Cut the communication line ACT control for utility setting type 2 Program example Private Sub Commandt1_ Click t KK K K K K KKK K K K K K K K K K K K Connection t KKK K K K K K K K K K ok ok K K K K K K Dim rtn As Long Get LogicalstationNumber ActEasylF1 ActLogicalStationNumber Val Text1 Text Connection rtn ActEasylF1 Open If
87. and programs for the PLC CPUs via the Q series C24 or Q series Ethernet interface module Any external devices on which application programs can be installed and which can transmit and receive data in accordance with the MELSEC PLC protocol can communicate with the PLC CPUs using the MC protocol 5 1 1 Accessing the PLC CPUs using the MC protocol This section describes the main functions for accessing the PLC CPUs using the 5 MC protocol An overview of the data communication functions using the MC protocol is provided in Section 3 4 With the exception of the on demand function described below the Q series C24 sends and receives data based on commands from the external devices Thus the PLC CPU side does not require sequence programs for data communication 1 Data read write This function reads and writes data from to the PLC CPU device memory of the local station or other station on the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 as well as the intelligent function module buffer memory By reading and writing data the PLC CPU operation monitoring data analysis and production management can be performed on the external device side Also production directions can be executed on the external device side 2 File read write This function reads and writes files stored in the PLC CPU such as sequence programs and parameter files By reading and writing files file management for the GX Configurator SC and the QnACPUs of other stations can be per
88. between the Q series C24 and the external device See Section 4 5 2 in this manual Set an operation mode with GX Developer Y A setting that automatically refreshes the status of the Q series C24 Perform auto refresh setting and error data to the GX Configurator SC device with GX Configurator SC See Sections 4 6 and 8 3 in this manual e Itis possible to change setting values for Change setting values to use various various functions including special functions functions with GX Configurator SC e See the explanation for each function in the applicable sections and manuals e See Chapter 8 Y e Transmission and reception for the data communication system Transmission and receive data See the explanation for each function in the applicable sections and manuals Y l Communication using non Communication using Communication using MC protocol Communication using procedure protocol bidirectional protocol see the Reference Manual special functions see Chapter 6 see Chapter 7 see the User s Manual Application 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 3 Part Names and Functions Part names of Q series C24 are shown below QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 x1 QJ71C24 R2 2 QJ71C24N QJ71C24N na QJ71C24N
89. data arrangement The following example shows an arrangement of the transmission data to be sent to the external device when storing it in the transmission area Example When transmitting ABCDEFG123 The transmit area is the default value CH1 side agdress Buffer memory 1 4001 5 or 10 Transmission data count storage area In accordance with the word byte units designation 4014 B A Word units 5 424 41u Bytes units 10 4024 D C 444 43H EE A be Eee OT 2 F E aes 45 Transmission data designation area Loids 46H She we eee Sequentially store the transmission data to low address L H next 4044 1 G address L H in the order of transmission 31H 47u 4054 3 2 33H 32H 4064 5 4 gt 35H 34H N 6 2 3 Sequence program for transmission data Transmission A sequence program for transmission data is explained below For details on the OUTPUT instruction used for data transmission see Chapter 9 In case of the CH1 side Create transmission data from D11 Create control data from DO ae G OUTPUT Un DO D11 MO instruction MO M1 HH M1 Processing for normal completion I Processing for abnormal completion retransmission etc 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL Q series C24 ready signal X1E 1 Transmission instruction OUTPUT instruction OUTPUT OUTPUT ins
90. data reception is in progress the data received up to that point will be cleared 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Dedicated instructions are used to simplify programming when using intelligent function module functions This chapter describes the dedicated instructions for the Q series C24 which is part of the functions of the QCPU in Q mode explained in this manual 9 1 Dedicated Instruction List The following table lists the dedicated instructions explained in this chapter ei Dedicated a Explanation Application Description of function instruction page 0 Sends data using the on demand function of the MC On demand function transmission ONDEMAND tocol Section 9 2 protocol Non procedure protocol OUTPUT Sends data for the specified data count Section 9 3 communication INPUT Reads received data Section 9 4 Bidirectional protocol BIDOUT Sends data for the designated data count Section 9 5 communication BDN Reads received data Section 9 6 vane Reads the status of data transmission reception via a Communication status confirmation SPBUSY i Section 9 7 dedicated instruction Perform the receive data clear without stopping the Receive data clear CSET transmission processing during the non procedure Section 9 8 protocol 1 The user should not change data values control data request data etc designated by a dedicated instruction until the execution of the de
91. designation 149 309 95 135 Ci SoH DC4 code b8 to b15 00H to FFH DC4 code Chapters 6 150 310 Word byte units designation Chapter 7 961 1 W i 1 B i i 96H 136H For designation 0 Word units yte units a Allowed Section 3 2 1 1 DC code control 1 Controlled Chapter 7 of User s Manual Application Allowed 00H to FFH DC2 code CD terminal check designation for RS 232 0 Check 1 No check DC2 code b0 to b7 of communica i 151 311 tion contro 97H 137H Section 3 2 1 Section 8 4 5 3 SPECIFICATIONS Decimal Hex Application CH2 152 312 98H 138H 153 313 99H 139H 154 a munca dons 9Ax 13AH control designation RS 315 232 13BH 156 316 9CH 13CH For designation 157 317 jofdata 9DH 13DH communica tion time monitoring 158 318 9EH 13EH OF 3 For designation of communica tion control 155 9BH 160 320 For designati AO 1401 or designation of on demand 161 321 function A1H 1414 A2 163 A 164 A4 165 A5H 166 A6 A7H 168 A8H 169 A9H For data reception H H 162 322 Fordesianatk H 142 or esignation of transmission H H For designation of reception area For designation of on demand user frame Communication system designation for RS 232 0 Full duplex communication Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designa
92. device connected to two interfaces that are not interacting using functions set in the communication protocol settings MC protocol non procedure protocol 5 When communicating data using the modem function DN When two interfaces are in linked operation the transmission time for one character becomes equal to the hardware gate off time of the Q series C24 c The data flow in linked operation is as follows 1 Two interfaces operate linked together using functions defined with the communication protocol setting on the CH2 side MC protocol in the same format or a non procedure protocol within the transmission specifications set in the respective transmission settings specifications for CH1 and CH2 must be the same Q series C24 data flow in linked operation Transmits only to a designated CH side 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q In linked operation all data received from one of the two interfaces is transmitted from the other interface In this case exclusive control of the received data is necessary when data is communicated using the non procedure protocol since all the connected stations receive the data When data communication is performed using the MC protocol only the Q series C24 having the station number designated in the message performs the process designated by the command Furthermore when data communication is performed using QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frames
93. error Ignored data reception 2 1 and to the PLC CPU through the buffer discards the receive data Transmission data Invalid 0101n memory after data transmission 1 1 Does not transmit a response Receive data Invalid Does not wait to a response massage message 2 2 1 2 in reply to data transmission 1 1 Does not inform the PLC CPU that data was received m is the number showing the correspondence with the messages in the illustration shown in Section 7 3 2 7 24 7 24 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 3 2 Communication data processing when simultaneous transmissions occur Examples of the Q series C24 communication data processing for various settings of Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation by GX Configurator SC are explained 1 Transmission valid reception valid 2 1 1 2 Sum check code Arbitrary data External device Q series C24 Time check Arbitrary data Sum check timer 1 code When the entire message of 2 1 was received while transmitting the message of 1 1 in the illustration The Q series C24 outputs the receive data read request signal of 2 1 to the PLC CPU after transmitting all 1 1 Turns on the X3 XA 2 Transmission invalid reception valid 2 1 Sum check code Arbitrary data A External device Ignores the receive data of 1 1 Generates a sim
94. error codes contents and corrective actions for errors including errors at the abnormal completion that may occur while the Q series C24 modem function is used The error codes for the modem function are stored in the modem function error code storage area address 221H 545 of the buffer memory The reference pages listed in the table below are found in the User s Manual Application Error code Hexa Error Contents decimal There is an error in the designation of the notification 7FDOu z execution JEDI There is an error in the designation of the number of connection retries There is an error in the designation of the connection 7FD2u retry interval Modern There is an error in the initialization connection time 7FD3u j function out designation 7FD5 There is an error in the designation of the data number for initialization 7FD6 There is an error in the data for connection designated 7FD7u by the data number for connection 7FD8x The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error External destination is connected to network or modem has not been initialized for connection Developer connection There is an error in the data for connection designated by the data number for connection 7FD9x Modern function A connection time out error occurred error Connection to the modem TA was unsuccessful or the modem TA is not connected Modem connection channel number is not designated
95. external device side Set the external device so that it ignores the following reception messages that are unrelated to the local station The command message and the corresponding response message that are sent from other stations when accessing the PLC CPU using the MC protocol Messages when accessing between external devices 2 Data communication using 1 n connection When the UC24 C24 S8 is connected on the line it is not possible to access the PLC in the QnA compatible 4C frame format 5 for binary code communication Since performances and response speeds are different between the Q series C24 and the UC24 C24 S8 communication may not be performed normally when a PLC module in the A series is replaced by a Q series PLC When a module is changed to a Q series PLC module make sure to check operation App 13 App 13 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 3 Processing Time 1 Time required to process communication using the non procedure protocol guideline The processing time for the Output and Input instructions can be estimated by the following formula Note however that the processing time may become longer depending on other communication functions e g communication using the MC protocol and special functions e g ASCll binary conversion transmission control that are used at the same time The value obtained from the following formula should be used as a guideline for the processing time when reception or trans
96. frame No was designated frame error 10 17 MELSEC Q Protocol Corrective action e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e Write the monitor data and use the A compatible 1C frame to a CPU other than a Q QnACPU e Change the buffer memory addresses so that they are outside the special applications area Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Make the timer 1 monitoring time longer When accessing another station s CPU check if the routing parameters match requests from the external device e Set the timer 1 monitoring time to the external device time out e Make arrangements between the target device and PLC CPU so that mode switching is not executed during data transmission device transmit message and restart data communications Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Recheck the frame No Write the frame beforehand Change the frame No and restart data communications Recheck the frame N
97. interfaces of the Q series C24 simultaneously in an individual station test Alternatively either one of the interfaces can be tested in an individual station loopback test In that case ignore the test results on the interface side for which the test is not performed Cable removal and reconnection before and after the individual station loopback test should be performed with the power to the Q series C24 mounting station turned off To restart data communication with an external device after an individual station test check the specifications of the devices used before defining various settings and reconnecting cables For the interface that is not used for communication no cable connection define the switch settings in GX Developer as follows for the setting method see Section 4 5 2 e Communication protocol setting OH to 7H e Transmission control settings and communication rate settings all set to OFF If an error occurs even though the correct settings have been made for the Q series C24 through an individual station test please consult your nearest dealer or branch office with a description of the error 4 7 1 ROM RAM switch tests A ROM RAM switch test checks the contents of the memory of the Q series C24 and the switch settings set with GX Developer Perform a ROM RAM switch test with the procedure described below Procedure 1 Communication protocol setting and transmission setting See Section 4 5 2 1 Set the
98. into existing systems This section shows the notes when installing the Q series C24 into an existing system that uses UC24 C24 S8 1 Data communication using m n connection When the Q series C24 is installed into an existing system that has an m n system structure between the PLC CPU and external devices and data communication is performed using the MC protocol the following notes should be considered a Accessing the PLC using a frame for form 5 When the UC24 C24 S8 is connected on the line it is not possible to access the PLC in the QnA compatible 4C frame form 5 for binary code communication b Data communication between external devices 1 When data communication is performed in order to link with an external devices to perform a 1 1 communication with the PLC CPU it is necessary to change the station number 80H to AOH OOH to 1FH designated in the Station number and Local station number items in the messages on the external device side It is not necessary to specify this when an A compatible 1C frame is used Alternatively it is necessary to change the message frame so that it has a data order different from that of the MC protocol e Station number Designate the number of device to which data is sent e Local station number Designate the number of the device that sends data 2 Perform the data communication according to Chapter 14 of the User s Manual Application c Processing reception data on the
99. lensed App 8 Appendix 2 2 1 Using programs designed for the QC24 N cccccccsseceeseeceeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeesaees App 8 Appendix 2 2 2 Installing on existing SYSTEMS eee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeee App 9 Appendix 2 3 Using Programs Designed for the Computer Link Module and Installing the Q Series C24 into Existing SySteMS cccesceeceeceeeeeeeeceeceeeeaesaesaeseeeeaeeaseeeeaeeaes APP 10 Appendix 2 3 1 Using programs designed for the computer link MOdUIe eeeeeeeeeeee App 10 Appendix 2 3 2 Installing the Q series C24 into existing SyStEMS cccecceeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeeeees App 13 Appendix 3 Processing Time ceeccescessceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeesaeesaeesaeesaeesaeeeeeseesieesieeeaeees App 14 Appendix 4 ASCIl Code Table ccccccesssccesessceseeeceeeeeseneneeseaecaensassaeeaeeaassassaeeaesaaesassaeeasaseaeeaaeneneateateas App 17 Appendix 5 External DIM MSIONS ccccccscsissteasesseceseccessneesassssesstadeneieasaveedecsseaasunseveedatsuuesiesessseveedatesen App 18 Appendix 6 Example of Connection when a Converter iS US ceccecceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeaeeaeeeeteneeateas App 20 Appendix 7 Communication Support Tool MX Component c cceceeceeceeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeeaesaeeneseneeateas App 23 Appendix 7 1 Overview of MX Component ceccecceseeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeaecaecaeseeesaesaeseeseaeeaesaeseeseaeea
100. lists the utility package function for the Q series C24 Protocol for which setting is valid Nork Bidirectional Explanation Function MC procedure p Remarks protocol page protocol Refresh the Q series C24 s error codes and set devices on the PLC Auto refresh setting CPU side Section 4 6 Register the user frame in the flash ROM lol o Sections 41 Section 8 4 1 Data for modem initialization Register the data for modem initialization in the flash ROM lol o o Section 8 4 2 Data for modem connection Register the data for model connection in the flash ROM lol o o Section 8 4 3 Modem function system ea the system setting values for model function in the flash lo o o secionaaa setting A CHn Transmission Set the transmission specifications with the other device control and others DTR DSR control DC code control communication method data O Q Section 8 4 5 system setting communication monitoring timer value etc Can be used Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication CHn Non procedure A Ra the non procedure protocol and change the setting values system setting System sina CHn Bidirectional a the buffer memory needed to perform data communication ction 8 4 8 system setting using the bidirectional protocol and change the setting values etc i CHn Transmission r frame No ae i 9 Set the user frame number to be transmitted etc Section 8 4 10 designation system
101. monitor GX Developer Version 6 or later GX Developer gt Diagnostics gt System Monitor Select the Q series C24 by installation status gt gt Monitor screen Monitor test screen Monitor Test ox Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value CH1 ERR occurrence Off CH2 ERR occurrence Off Turning off ERR LED and initializing the error code by the ERR clear request Designate Clear request for the test CH1 ERR clear request Off Clear request v CH2 ERR clear request Off Clear request d XZY monitor test XZY monitor test Modem function monitor test Modem function monitor test CH1 Transmission control and others monitor test CH1 Trans control monitor CH1 MC protocol monitor CH1 MC protocol monitor v Flash ROM setting Details Write to Fil Current value Monitoring module save display Cannot execute test Heston File read Make text file L Start monitor Stop monitor Execute test Close Monitor test items The following selection menus for monitor test operation will be displayed Reference section containing explanation eree L eo ERR clear request Section 8 6 10 Modem function monitor test Transmission control and others monitor test Section 8 6 3 Section 8 6 4 Section 8 6 5 Bidirectional monitor Section 8 6 6 PLC CPU
102. of 20244 to 2027H User s Manual Application 2124H to 2127H Transmission CR LF output designation B7H 157H user frame Output head pointer designation B8H 158H designation Output count designation B9H 159H Chapters 6 of Timeout at No protocol 2014H 2114H ee User s Manual Application Exclusive format 1 received data count 1st to 4th 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 4 8 Bidirectional system setting Purpose For data transmission using the bidirectional protocol register system setting values Startup procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHU Bidirectional system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO Bidirectional system setting Setting screen CH1 Bidirectional system setting _ olxi Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 170 No 0000 Module model name GJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation Send teceive valid he X Flash ROM setting Details pme lo File save module Select input Read fi module Fieread Setting range J Send receive valid Send valid receive invalid Send invalid receive valid Send receive invalid Make text file Execute test Close Setting item ae Setting value storage Reference section containing Setting item j buffer memory address detailed explanation pas ee Section 7 3 of
103. of the MC protocol the header information for linked operation is added to messages directed to other stations linked by multidrop connection Processing performed by the Q series C24 connected to an external device The header information is added to the command messages received from the external device that are directed to other stations and sends them to the stations through the other interface The header information is deleted from the response messages received from other stations and sends them to the external device using the other interface The header information is also sent during m n connection Operation of the accessed station The accessed station processes the request contained in the command message adds the header information to a response message and sends it using the interface that received the command message The following describes the header information that is added by the Q series C24 to a message in linked operation 1 When communicating with ASCII code formats 1 to 4 The following 13 15 character header information is added immediately before the control code ENQ STX ACK NAKk at the start of each message 13 characters for formats 1 3 and 4 15 characters for format 2 2 When communicating in binary mode format 5 The following 10 byte header information is added immediately before the control code DLE STX at the start of each message
104. programming using the non procedure protocol e Chapter 7 explains details of the communication functions and programming using the bidirectional protocol 5 To learn how to check for error occurrences and take corrective actions Chapter 10 describes troubleshooting how to check for errors and detailed explanations of error codes 6 To learn about functions that have been added or changed in function version B e Section 1 3 lists the functions that have been added or changed as well as manuals that provide detailed explanations hereof e Appendix 1 1 provides a breakdown of the functions of Q series C24 GX Configurator SC by function version software version The structure of this manual The module s buffer memory stores default values that are used as initial settings to execute the data send receive functions in order to communicate with the external devices Data can be sent to or received from the external devices using these default values However it may be necessary to change the default values depending on system specifications This manual explains how to perform the initial settings in order to use each function of the utility package available for this module GX Configurator SC When changing a default value for sending and receiving data to from an opposite device first see the section describing the applicable function to verify the initial setting item and setting value you wish to change then change the default
105. sequence program 2 For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The control code to be transmitted is added by the Q series C24 7 6 7 6 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q b Data length This indicates the number of bytes or words for the data portion of the message The unit of data length words bytes is in accordance with the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 The Q series C24 checks the length of the data received When the reception is normal the Q series C24 stores the receive data in the receive data storage area of the Q series C24 buffer memory assigning the first byte as the lower byte L For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The length of the transmission data is the number of the transmission data designated by the sequence program using the BIDOUT instruction The Q series C24 sends this value as is from the lower byte L Data portion This consists of an array of original one byte data to be transmitted to the external device side which can handle OOH to FFH code data 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 If the receive data portion is normal the Q series C24 takes the codes as is and stores them in the receive data storage area in sequence beginning with the youngest address The storage size is in
106. setting Reset the setting values in the buffer memory to their default Syst sino golau ee ae cee System setting write Write the setting values in the buffer memory to the flash ROM Section 8 4 11 Flash ROM ash ROM Write Set whether to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM aee Section 8 4 12 allow prohibit designation X Y monitor test Perform the monitoring testing of I O signals to from the PLC CPU lol o Sections 6 1 Section 8 6 1 Modem function monitor test Monitor the execution status of the modem function lol o o Section 8 6 2 CHn Transmission Monitor the status of interface control signals values set from the control and others Section 8 6 3 GX Developer etc monitor test CHn MC protocol 5 monitor CHn Non procedure Monitor the data communication result I O signal status and Section 8 6 5 monitor test setting values in the buffer memory an Monitor CHn Bi monitor CHn PLC CPU Monitor the setting values and operating status of the PLC CPU ition secion 867 67 monitoring monitor monitoring function CHn User frame No designation i 9 Monitor the setting value for user frame to be transmitted Section8 6 8 monitor for transmission Monitor test others Monitor the data reception result error occurrence status etc lol o o Section 8 6 9 ERR LED off Turn off the ERR LEDs on the front face of the module lol o Sections 6 10 Non procedure protocol A P p Clea
107. shows an example of a program that reads the setting of various switches of the Q series C24 from the setting status storage area For details on XE and XF of the input output signals used in the program see Section 10 1 2 3 input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 Example of FROM instruction XOE FROMP HO H203 DO KI Reads error description from address 203n XOF sean n ra Reads station number setting and switch KO D0 FRONPS zH setting description from address 200n Reads communication protocol setting and FROMP HO H250 D2 K2 transmission setting description on the CH1 side from addresses 250 to 2514 FROMP HO H260 D4 K2 Reads communication protocol setting and transmission setting description on CH2 from addresses 260h to 261n Restarts the Q series C24 after checking the error code and resetting switches b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 DO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Error description 1 Communication protocol number setting error D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setting station number of the Q series C24 0 D2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 CH1 side Communication protocol setting number 9 D3 l0lolololol1lol1ilolololol1ilolilo transmission setting description D4 0ojojolojojoiojoj ololojololojola CH2 side Communication protocol setting number 1 D5lololololol1lol1lo 11110 1l0l1l0 transmission setting description
108. signals as an output signal to an intelligent function module from the PLC CPU Writing data into the system area or outputting a signal for prohibited to use may cause a PLC system malfunction Design Instructions A CAUTION e Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100mm 3 9inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that may cause malfunction e When using the module while values such as buffer memory set values are registered in the Flash ROM do not turn off the power supply for the module loading station nor reset the PLC CPU If the power supply for the module loading station is turned off or the PLC CPU is reset while any values are registered the data contents in the Flash ROM become inconsistent and as a result the values must be set again in the buffer memory etc and reregistered to the Flash ROM Also this may cause failure and malfunction of the module Installation Instructions A CAUTION e Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in the user s manual of the CPU module to use Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications may cause electric shock fire malfunction and damage to or deterioration of the product e While pressing the installation lever located at the bottom of module insert th
109. stored in the device the sequence program executes the BIDIN instruction and reads the receive data 4 When the reading of receive data is completed a response message ACK message when the operation was completed normally is sent and the device that has completed the BIDIN instruction turns ON 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL Program example When Q series C24 I O signals are from X Y00 to X Y1F wove KI MOVP KO MOVP K10 G BIDIN UO bo D10 DO D1 D2 D3 D10 to Dm For normal completion Interface number Reception result 0 Receive data count 1 Allowable receive data count 10 Receive data Receive data Wov D2 ae D10 D110 MELSEC Q DO Designate the receive channel D2 Clear the receive data count storage device to 0 D3 Designate the allowable receive data count wo With the normal completion the receive data within the allowable receive data count user designated is read from the receive data storage area in the buffer memory After the BIDIN instruction is executed the user designated read completion signal MO comes on for 1 scan The reading of received data is performed by the PLC CPU Q series C24 Address Buffer memory 258H 6004 6014 7FFH Data reception result storage area Receive data count storage area x When the received data count is larger than the allowable received data count o
110. switching error Transmission error 10 ICH1 ERR Error occurrence status Reception error on Chit side On demand error x1 C N turns on in the following cases e An external device issued a data read request to the PLC CPU when write during RUN is set to prohibit in the switch settings by GX Developer see Section 4 5 2 x For functions that cannot be used when write during RUN is set to prohibit see the explanation section in each command list of the Reference Manual e When an error has occurred during access between the Q series C24 and the PLC CPU x2 NEU is valid when a target interface is set to use the MC protocol When the target interface is set to other than the MC protocol the status of NEU is off 10 4 10 4 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q When a communication error occurs take corrective action according to Section 10 3 The initial status of the LED ON and communications error indicates the status when the Q series C24 starts up by turning on the power or resetting the PLC CPU Each of the communications error status C N to SIO CH1 ERR and CH2 ERR turns on when an error occurs and keeps its on status even after the communication returns to normal The PLC CPU can check the aforementioned LED ON status and communications error status and initialize any error information using read write to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 and input output signals Initialize the error information according to S
111. that conform to the specifications of external devices measuring devices PCs etc b Fixed or variable length messages can be received in accordance with the external device specifications e How to receive the variable length data The external device sends data by adding at the end of the message the end code data CR LF or any one byte data that is set for the Q series C24 e How to receive the fixed length data The external device sends the amount of data equivalent to the size of the end data that is set for the Q series C24 h J End mi 6 Reception data code M z When receiving variable length data F a c ASCII code data can be used for communication using the ASCII BIN conversion function QJ71024 ASCII data ASCII BIN A oe a Binary data nae data 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q d It is necessary to create a sequence program for communication control that conforms to the external device e Communication can be performed using an user frame by registering the fixed format portion of the head and tail sections of a message as an user frame e When sending data the Q series C24 adds an user frame to any data specified by the user e When receiving data the Q series C24 transfers any data excluding the user frame to the PLC CPU When r
112. the CHn side XE XF and the ERR LED turn on if remote password disagreements occur more than the number of times designated by this value the line is not disconnected x The user can clear the cumulative value counted by the Q series C24 at an occurrence of remote password disagreement using either one of the methods below e Set the cumulative number of abnormal completions of unlock processing to 0 in the modem function monitor test screen of GX Configurator SC e Write 0 to the storage area in the buffer memory corresponding to the Accumulated count of abnormal completions of unlock processing address 8956 22FCu 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q b Modem function monitor test by GX Configurator SC It is possible to monitor the setting values for the remote password and the number of occurrences up to the present such as the designation of the number of times before notifying an unmatched remote password and the current number of occurrences x It is possible to set each monitor value to 0 Monitored items in the modem function monitor test screen Buffer memory address Remote password mismatch notification count designation 8204 200C Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation 8205 200DH Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 8955 22FBH 22FCH Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection 8959 22F
113. the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions The following program reads data from or writes data to the QU71C24N buffer memory CH1 side word byte units designation area when the read write command X1020 X1021 turns ON a Devices used Read write COMMANGC cccccccesssessnceeeeeecessesseeeeeeeeeesseeas X1020 X1021 e Read write command pulse Signal cceceeeeeeeeeeeeteees M10 M11 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO INISUHUCTION 353 5 cist ioe ete niet hadi O M200 to 203 e Read from word byte units designation area eee DO e Write to word byte units designation area D1 2 Program examples a Read from buffer memory lt Read command gt x1020 j PLS mo J Changes the read command into pulses M10 X101E Reads the word byte units k eH REWFR JI KI KI Ho H96 DO KI M00 designation area data of the buffer memory to DO M100 M101 7 F SET M200 J Normal completion of REMFR instruction M101 H SET M201 Abnormal completion of REMEPR instruction b Write to buffer memory lt Write command gt x1021 PLS m1 1 Changes the write command into pulses w KINE MOV H D1 y Sets the word byte units designation to byte A Transfers the setting value to eves Ki N W we Di K Nigg Tine word byte units designation M102 M103 area of the buffer memory SET
114. the Q series C24 is set to be subject to the remote password check b Access in which the remote password is checked The remote password is checked when the following access is attempted Access attempts to all PLCs of the local station the local station with the Q series C24 and other stations accessed via the local station are subject to the remote password checking Access function to the PLC in which the remote password is checked e Data communication using the MC protocol e Access to the PLC using GX Developer x The remote password is not checked in data communication using the non procedure bidirectional protocols c Remote password to be checked The check is performed against the remote password set to the local station QCPU with the Q series C24 x Access to the specified station is allowed if the remote password specified by the user and the remote password set to the QCPU match when accessing Data communication procedure 1 Initialize the modem 2 Connect the line from the external device 3 Unlock cancel the remote password of the QCPU belonging to the station with the Q series C24 mounted from the external device via the dedicated command for communication using the MC protocol 4 Initiate the data communication between the external device and PLC using the MC protocol 5 Disconnect the modem line from the external device side when completing the data communication using the MC protocol The remote password
115. the cables and the module itself Step 5 Replace the module and start up the module according to 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation Step 6 Read the data saved in Step 2 back into the system and register the system setting data to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the Write to module function of GX Configurator SC lt Operation procedure when replacing the QCPU gt Step 1 Read the PLC parameters with GX Developer from the QCPU and save them Step 2 Replace the QCPU See the user s manual for QCPU Step 3 Register the PLC parameter saved by GX Developer back into the QCPU again x1 It is recommended to record and save the system setting parameters not only when replacing the module but also when changing the system setting parameters using GX Configurator SC 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL This chapter explains an overview of the MELSEC communication protocol hereinafter abbreviated as the MC protocol See the following manual for a detailed explanation of the data communication functions that are available when using the MC protocol Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual SH 080008 5 1 Data Communication Functions The MELSEC protocol MC protocol is a communication system for the Q series PLCs Using this protocol the external devices can read or write device data
116. the maximum extension possible under the law 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q The version indication for the GX Configurator SC has been changed as shown below from the SWOD5C QSCU E 40E upgrade product Previous product Upgrade and subsequent versions SWOD5C QSCU E 40E GX Configurator SC Version 1 10L 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 SPECIFICATIONS The following shows the Q series C24 performance specifications See the User s Manual of the QCPU Q mode for general specifications 3 1 Performance Specifications The following shows the Q series C24 performance specifications For the transmission specifications when communicating via the modem function see this section and Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application 1 Transmission specification I 2 tem QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 5 x li RS 232 compliance RS 232 compliance RS oe Nl cei CH1 2 piece plug in connector socket D sub 9 pin D sub 9 pin block RS 422 485 compliance RS 422 485 compliance RS 232 compliance l l ps i f 2 piece plug in connector socket 2 piece terminal block D sub 9 pin block Full duplex half duplex communications MC protocols eee TAECUpIEX gommunicatons ee communication Conca Non procedure protocol u PO communication Bidirectional protocol DEER A P Full duplex full duplex communications communication Synchronization method Start stop synchronization method
117. the modem function x2 The DTR signal is controlled by the Q series C24 in the following cases Ignore setting contents When the DTR and DSR signals are controlled e When data is communicated by the modem function x3 After writing in the buffer memory a lag of 0 to 20 ms occurs until it is reflected in the signal POINT Be sure to control the RS and DTR signals with the Q series C24 Control of the RS and DTR signals by the user is a prime factor for data communication errors 3 2 2 RS 232 cable specification e Use a 15 m 49 21 ft or shorter cable conforming to the RS 232 standard as the RS 232 cable Recommended cable 7 0 127 OP HRV SV 0 Designates the number of pairs For 13 pairs 7 0 127 13P HRV SV Oki Electric Cable Co Ltd 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specifications The following shows the RS 422 485 interface specification 3 3 1 RS 422 485 terminal block specifications SDA SDB RDA RDB SG raD QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 The following shows the specifications of the RS 422 connector and RS 422 485 terminal block that connect to an external device pm SDA Signal Signal direction abbreviation ignalname C24 gt External Pee device O ETI fron sos ser o leos eoa receve saat J Ros esse saat ai o agod J DEA aroan e Frame guns e 1 The following describes the control signals md FA coi FG L 1 bc
118. the precautions on using the utility package 1 Important safety information Since the utility package is add in software for GX Developer read Safety Precautions and the basic operating procedures contained in GX Developer s Operating Manual 2 About installation The GX Configurator SC utility package is an add in package for GX Developer Version 4 or later products Therefore install GX Configurator SC in a personal computer in which GX Developer Version 4 or a later product has been installed 3 About display screen errors while using the intelligent function module utility There may be cases in which the screen will not properly display while the intelligent function module utility is being used due to a lack of system resources If this occurs close the intelligent function module utility first and then GX Developer program comments etc and other applications Then restart GX Developer and the intelligent function module utility 4 To start the intelligent function module utility a In GX Developer select QCPU Q mode for the PLC series and specify the project If anything other than QCPU Q mode is selected for the PLC series or if the project is not specified the intelligent function module utility will not start b Multiple intelligent function module utilities can be started However the Open file Save file intelligent function module s parameter operations can only be performed by a single int
119. timer 0 Setting 6 2 Response Monitoring Time timer 1 Setting 6 3 Transmission Monitoring Time timer 2 Setting 6 4 Message Wait Time Setting 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING DC CODE TRANSMISSION CONTROL 7 1 Control Contents of DTR DSR ER DR Signal Control 7 2 Control Contents of DC Code Control 7 3 Precautions when Using the Transmission Control Functions SH 080007 G 8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING HALF DUPLEX COMMUNICATIONS 8 1 Half duplex Communications 8 2 Data Transmission and Reception Timing 8 3 Changing the Communication System 8 4 Connector Connections for Half duplex Communications 8 5 Half duplex Communications Precautions 9 CONTENTS AND REGISTRATION OF THE USER FRAMES FOR DATA COMMUNICATION 9 1 User Frame Types and Contents During Communication 9 2 Transmission Reception Processing Using User Frame Register Data 9 3 Precautions when Registering Reading Deleting and Using User Frames 9 4 Register Read Delete User Frames 10 ON DEMAND DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES 10 1 User Frame Data Communications Function 10 2 User Frame Types and Registration 10 3 User Frame On Demand Data Transmission and Buffer Memory Used 10 4 On Demand Function Control Procedure During User Frame Use 10 5 Example of an On Demand Data Transmission Program Using User Frames 11 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING USER FRAMES 11 1 Overview of Data Communication Procedure 11 2 Data Reception 11 3 Receive Program 11 4 Data Transm
120. to a base unit using the hooks in the upper part of the module However it is recommended that the module be fixed using the module mounting screws when it is used in a place subject to vibration or impact 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation The outline of the procedure before operation is shown below C Check which functions and specifications are to be used Connection of the Q series C24 and an external device See Section 4 4 in this manual Connect the module with an external device using a cable Yy Connect GX Developer and QCPU with a cable J 4 Perform various settings with I O assignment Setting of the Q series C24 rR GX Developer Setting of operation mode and transmission specifications for the Q series C24 and the external device See Section 4 5 in this manual ROM RAM switch tests of the Q series C24 Self loopback test of the Q series C24 See Section 4 7 in this manual Perform individual station tests with GX Developer When communication using the MC protocol is possible between Perform a loopback test from the the Q series C24 and the external device set the operation mode for external device MC protocol communication and perform a loopback test See Section 4 8 in this manual Set an operation mode for the data communication system
121. unit s For flash ROM access 6 to 45 6H to 2DH Section 8 4 1 Section Not allowed 9 42 Section 8 4 11 Section 8 4 12 3 180 Section 8 4 2 Section 8 4 3 Section Allowed 8 4 4 Chapter 3 of User s Manual Application Eg Initialization connection timeout designation 32H 1 to 60 Timeout unit s a 33H 1 to 5 Number of retries For designation Data No for initialization designation of modem OH Send initialization data designated by the 34H fiers designated area of the user frame for transmission 7DOH to 801F Data No for initialization ees Data No for connection designation 35H BB8u to 801FH Data No for connection lean GX Developer connection designation 36H 0 Do not connect 1 Connect No communication interval time designation Ee 0 Wait infinitely 30 37H 1 to 120 No communication interval Waiting time for line disconnection unit min EA RS CS control yes no designation 1 38H 0 No control 1 Controlled 6 7 8 9 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address a Applicable Registration x oes Initial Decimal Hex Application Name tale protocol allowed not Mc Non Bi allowed Switching mode no designation 0001H to 0007H OOFFH 0001H MC protocol format 1 0005x MC protocol format 5 0002H MC protocol format 2 00061 Non procedure protocol 0003H MC protocol format 3 0007H Bidirectional proto
122. user frame eeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateeatens App 50 Appendix 9 11 When deleting user frame 00 eeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeeeas App 52 Appendix 9 12 When changing the communication protocol and transmission setting 05 App 54 Appendix 10 Setting Value Recording Sheet cccccccccesseseeceeeeseeeeeeceeseeesaesaeseseaeaeseeseaeeaesaeseeseaeeeneas App 57 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 A 11 A 11 Related Manual 1 Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Overview 1 2 Functions Added Changed by Function Version B 2 USING THE PLC CPU MONITORING FUNCTION 2 1 Overview 2 2 About the PLC CPU Monitoring Function 2 3 Settings for Using the PLC CPU Monitoring Function 2 4 Precautionary Notes for Using the PLC CPU Monitoring Function 3 COMMUNICATIONS BY THE MODEM FUNCTION 3 1 Overview 3 2 System Configuration 3 3 Specifications 3 4 Start up of the Modem Function 3 5 Sample Programs 4 RECEIVING DATA WITH AN INTERRUPT PROGRAM 4 1 Settings for Receiving Data Using an Interrupt Program 4 2 Interrupt Program Startup Timing 4 3 Reception Control Method Using an Interrupt Program 4 4 Programming 5 CHANGING SEND AND RECEIVE DATA LENGTH UNITS TO BYTE UNITS WORD BYTES UNITS SETTING 6 CHANGING THE DATA COMMUNICATIONS MONITORING TIMES 6 1 No Reception Monitoring Time
123. using the REMFR REMTO instructions and I O signals However the station No cannot be changed Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction Appendix 9 12 4 Available for the MELSECNET H remote I O station of function version D or later GX Developer Version 8 18U or later is required to use the function 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Setting from GX Developer The following parameters should be set through GX Developer in order to use the Q series C24 mounted to a MELECNET H remote I O station Each of setting is the same way as when setting the parameters for the Q series C24 mounted to a QCPU station see Section 4 5 and after See the operating manual for GX Developer for how to display each setting screen Parameter setting items for the Q series C24 mounted to a MELECNET H remote I O station Parameter setting item Setting Remarks I O Assignment Set the module mounting information See Section 4 5 1 Set the transmission specification and the communication protocol for communication See Section 4 5 2 with the external device Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module User s Manual Application Remote password setting Perform settings for the remote password Section 3 3 3 POINT 1 Connect GX Developer to a MELECNET H remote I O station and set the parameters 2 Reset the MELECNET H remote I O station after changing the setting 4 Whe
124. value of PLC CPU monitoring function is out e Correct the setting value o of range PLC CPU monitoring function iror is out of range PLC CPU abnormal monitoring Monitorin ROE ee 3 a 9 Setting value of transmission condition is out of e Correct the setting value o 7E664 condition error of ee he range transmission condition monitoring device P normal rri h in fi ePUrapnormal Setting value fixed value of CPU abnormal e Correct Testing vaie xed 7E67x monitoring setting Fer ico value of the CPU abnormal monitoring is out of range value error monitoring Transmission e Correct the setting value of the 7E68 condition range Setting value of transmission condition condition transmission condition Terror of monitoring agreement transmission is out of range condition agreement device transmission CPU abnormal A e Correct the setting value fixed Setting value fixed value of CPU abnormal 7E69 monitoring setting mg sate ised value value of the CPU abnormal monitoring is out of range ade value error monitoring 10 18 10 18 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error code Hexa Error Contents decimal Monitoring device read point range e Setting value fixed value of CPU abnormal monitorin in tty ta onitoring seting monitoring is out of range value error 7E6Ex e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Modem connection 7E6Fu e Modem is connected to an incorrect c
125. within the time set in the no reception monitoring time timer 0 after CR is received the Q series C24 stores the receive data up to CR LF to the buffer memory receive data storage area and turns on the read request signal to the PLC CPU Timer 0 C set time L R External device Q series C24 Reception data read reqest signal X3 XA 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Ifthe next data LF etc is not received within the time set in the non reception monitoring time timer 0 after CR is received the Q series C24 stores the received data up to CR to the buffer memory receive data storage area and turns on the following signals to the PLC CPU When non procedure and non reception monitoring time format is 0 Reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB When non procedure and non reception monitoring time format is 1 Reception data read request signal X3 XA 1 Timer 0 External device set time Q series C24 2 Reception abnormal detection signal Format is 0 X4 XB Reception data read reqest signal Format is 1 X3 XA x1 In non procedure protocol a message is received by the increase in non reception monitoring time timer 0 if the received complete code and the received data count are not decided For the non procedure protocol at the non reception monitoring time format see Chapter 6 of the User s Manual Application 2 CR i
126. word units Designate K10 when the unit is bytes DO D11 MO The transmission data stored in the designated device i d is sent ana SE M101 After the OUTPUT instruction is executed the user designated transmission complete signal MO turns ON M f r one scan net a MoV D1 D101 Storing the transmission data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory and issuing a transmission request to the Q series C24 are SE M102 all executed by the PLC CPU X21 1H RS M01 The completion flag is reset by an external command RS M102 Q series C24 Address Buffer memory m 2574 Data transmission result storage area For normal completion DO Interface number 00011 D1 Transmission result 0000x lt e Transmission data count designation area Transmission data count For abnormal completion DO Interface number D1 Transmission result other than 0000x From buffer memory address 2571 D2 Transmission data count 0005n D11 to Transmission data to Di5 OD 1 The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 9 2 More than one OUTPUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next OUTPUT instruction only after the execution of the first OUTPUT instruction is completed 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 2 4 How to det
127. 1 lt Change processing of CH1 gt M10 it j vov KI bo Sets the switching mode No designation Fyov H8580 D1 4 Sets the transmission specifications after 7 switching designation z REWTO v1 Ki ie is Hao bo a uiia 7 Transfers the set values to the mode switching designation area M100 M101 E o SET M11 J Sets the CH1 change command M101 A 4 SET M200 J REMTO instruction abnormally completed M11 M13 M14 X1003 X1004 n i E 4 E r g 4 SET Y1002 J Sets the CH1 mode switching request RST MI J X1006 o 7 RST Y1002 Resets the CH1 mode switching request X100E F H PLS M2 J CH1 mode switching completed M12 Z REMFR J1 KI KI HO H203 D2 KI M102 Transfers the mode switching error status M102 M103 H f D2 KO PLS M20 Y Starts the change processing of CH2 02 KO RST M300 SET M201 J Reexamines the modifications M103 D 7 1H SET M202 REMFR instruction abnormally completed lt Change processing of CH2 gt M20 1 MOV K D10 J Sets the switching mode No designation roy H85B0 Di1 4 Sets the transmission specifications after 7 switching designation Le pewra yin KI HO H30 D10 K2 wiog y Transfers the set values to the mode switching designation area M104 M105 7 SET M21 J Sets the CH2 change command M105 T i SET M203 J REMTO instruction abnormally completed M21 M23 M24 X100A X100B S L t 4 t A SET Y1009 sf Sets the CH2 mode switching request RST M21 X1000 3 RST Y1009
128. 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic Program example The following example shows a program that stores data received via the non procedure protocol in D10 and later When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X YO0 to X Y1F MOVP KI Ko D1 MOVP Kio G INPUT UO Do D10 Mo M1 Mov D2 BMOV D10 D110 M 1 SET X100 a frst DO K2 D3 MO ZO KOZO M100 M100 Designate the receive channel Clear the reception result and receive data count storage device to 0 Designate the allowable receive data count With normal completion the receive data within the allowable receive data count user designated is read from the receive data storage area in the buffer memory e Once the INPUT instruction is executed the user designated read completion signal MO turns ON for 1 scan e The reading of receive data and switching of the ON OFF status are performed by the PLC CPU The abnormal completion flag is reset by an external command 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 9 5 BIDOUT Instruction This instruction transmission data using the bidirectional protocol Applicable device MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10_ Special module Direct JO O UO GO Internal device System user File register Index register Zn Constant Others Instruction Executing code condition Command BIDOUT ie G BIDOUT Un S1 S2 D Command BIDOUT A GP BIDOUT Un St 82 D Descriptio
129. 103 D2 KO mee is M103 SET RST 1 a a 4 lt Read of the number of data bytes registered gt M13 X101E H ZZ REMFR U1 K1 K1 HO H5 D3 K1 w104 M105 H WF D3 K2 D50 D51 M105 az I on ari a a m p A 4 4 n lt Read of user frame gt M4 XIOIE l Z REMFR JI KI KI HO H6 D4 D100 M06 M107 j SET M107 s er RST App 51 M10 DO D1 M100 M11 M200 M201 Y1017 M11 M104 D50 D100 M14 M202 Y1017 M11 M106 M203 M204 M11 MELSEC Q Changes the read command into pulses Sets the read instruction Sets the frame No Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory Sets the read flag Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Turns ON the flash ROM read request signal Registration result acquisition command Reads the read result from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2 No of data byte registered acquisition command Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the flash ROM read request signal Sets the read flag Reads the number of registered data bytes from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D3 Converts the number of registered data bytes into the word units Adds 1 word when the number of registered data bytes is odd User frame acquisition command Abnormal completion of REMTO instr
130. 24 is mounted in slot 0 of the basic base unit Device numbers starting with X indicate input signals from the Q series C24 to the PLC CPU and device numbers starting with Y indicate output signals from the PLC CPU to the Q series C24 The following table lists the input output signals for the PLC CPU Reference section Device ignal ription Signal descriptio CH1 Transmission normal completion XO 1 z ON Normal completion X1 1 CH1 Transmission abnormal completion ON Abnormal completion Xo x1 CH1 Transmission processing ON Transmission in progress X32 CH1 Recepuon data read request ON Requesting read XA x2 CH1 Reception abnormal detection Section 8 6 5 i ON Abnormal detection Section 8 6 6 ON Switching Chapter 15 ON Normal Completion ON Abnormal completion X9 x1 ee h ON Transmission in progress XA 2 CH2 Reception data read request ON Requesting read Section 8 6 5 XB 2 CH2 Reception abnormal detection ON Abnormal detection Section 8 6 6 XC For system XD 3 CH2 Mode switching Application ON Switching Chapter 15 XE CH1 ERR occurrence ON Error occurring Section 8 6 10 CH2 ERR occurrence Section 10 1 2 XF ON Error occurring X10 6 Modern initjalizaon completion ON Initialization completed X11 6 Dialing l ON Dial in progress X12 6 Connection ie ON Connection in progress Initialization connection abnormal completion X13 6 ni a 3 ON Initialization connection abnormally completed
131. 260H CH2 lt When Check CD e Since the message is initialized skipped reading when the CD terminal is turned OFF when Check CD terminal is set change the wiring so that the CD terminal remains on all the time e Check if the external device sent a message lt The header byte of the are to the protocol and format ote The Q series C24 skips all the messages transmitted until the header byte set for each protocol and format protocol and format for example ENQ 05x for format 1 is received Laan es e Check the Q series C24 station No setting and and RD blinked but The Q series C24 message station No designation the Q series C24 did station No switch terminal was set the CD terminal was turned OFF message is not data needed by the set An external device transmitted a message not return a response setting and message e When the station No designation is local message NEU station No designation station after the header byte set for each remains on and SD do not match protocol and format is received the Q series C24 performs receive processing e Set or shorten the monitoring time and retransmit the message from the external device and determine the trouble from the does not blink contents of the time out error The Q series C24 data communications Error detection by watchdog timers timer 0 to timer 2 is possible in the following cases When part of a message is skipped e Wh
132. 3 5 Dedicated Instruction List The following table lists dedicated instructions that can be used in the Q series C24 Available x Not available MC Non section JONDEMAND _ Sends data with the on demand function x x output Sends designated number otdata X O x INPUT Receives data reads receiveddata x O x pinout sensata CX CCX Reads the status of data sent received with each For data dedicated instruction communication Allows clearing data received up to the present without interrupting the data transmission x x processing x x x Chapter 9 Receives data with an interrupt program reads received data x Sends data with user frames using transmission schedule table x x PUTE Stores user frames in flash ROM of the Q series C24 writing registration GETE Reads user frames stored in flash ROM of the Q series C24 Chapter 17 of Performs PLC CPU monitoring For PLC User s Manual ree registration CPU Application monitoring monigi x i i Cancels PLC CPU monitoring CSET function Sets the unit for the number of communication data words bytes and the data communication area oe Cee ete instruction and host station No of the Q series C24 x Abbreviations used in the Protocol column MC MC protocol Non Non procedure protocol Bi Bidirectional protocol 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 6 Utility Package GX Configurator SC Function List The following table
133. 4 0 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System 4 Support for a wide variety of programming languages MX Component supports the following programming languages It allows the user to develop a wide range of customized applications Programming Development software language Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 Microsoft Visual C 6 0 VBScript Text editors and commercially available HTML tools Microsoft Excel 2000 Microsoft Excel 2002 Microsoft Access 2000 or Microsoft Access 2002 5 Support for functions dedicated for data communication with PLCs MX Component provides the functions necessary for data communication with PLCs including functions for opening closing communication lines and reading writing devices Multi function communication programs can thus easily be developed with MX Component Connect Connects a telephone line Open Opens a communication line Disconnect etErrorMessage ReadDeviceBlock WriteDeviceBlock Batch writes data to devices LONG type ReadDeviceBlock2 iteDevi ReadDeviceRandom WriteDeviceRandom ReadDeviceRandom2 WriteDeviceRandom2 SetDevice etDevice etDevice2 etDevice2 App 24 App 24 APPENDIX MELSEC Q ReadBuffer Reads from buffer memory WriteBuffer Writes to buffer mem
134. 4 side l i Connect to the Q series C24 connector Do not short the communication cable FG Connection cable FG signal Rousing signal and the SG signal When the FG signal and the SG signal are Ganhecion gable shia Connect to the external device FG terminal connected inside the external device do not or the Q series C24 connector housing connect the FG signal to the Q series C24 c When normal data communication is not obtained due to external noise perform the wiring as follows 1 Connect the FG terminals on the external device and the Q series C24 using the shield of the connection cable 2 Signals other than SG should be connected with SG signals in the twisted pair Q series C24 Shield External device an die To Connector 14 housing ae gei gt sD ee oi RD DSR DTR SG When using an RS 232 to RS 422 converter to connect the external device and the Q series C24 use a converter that is compatible with the external device and PLC CPU system configuration 1 1 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Connection examples a Connection example with an external device capable of turning on and off the CD signal No 1 pin Q series C24 External device Signal name Pin No Signal name cD 1 cD RD RXD 2 RD RXD SD TXD 3 SD TXD DTR ER 4 DTR ER SG 5 it gt SG DSR DR 6 DSR DR
135. A 3 message and restart data 7E58x specification designated contents when changing error the mode communications e Recheck the switch setting on the Q series C24 e Review the program Flash ROM write e Rewrite the flash ROM area 7E59x count over limit e Flash ROM written 1 000 times address 24011 of the buffer error memory to 0 and restart data communications VO number error ee e Correct the I O number of the 7E5Fx jon requested e O number of requested module is incorrect i mod le module to which data is sent Device monitoring da oes ORTS e Cancel the PLC CPU monitoring PLC CP rf 7E60 duplicate e PLC CPU monitoring registration was performed and perform the PLC CPU H twice D a registration error monitoring registration again Cycle time units PAR e Correct the setting value o 7E61 H y e Setting value of cycle time units is out of range A 9 range error cycle time units PLC CPU monitoring function error Transmission ae A K e Setting of transmission measure of the PLC CPU e Correct the setting value o 7E63 measure setting Para ae Sfor monitoring is incorrect transmission measure Registration point s Da e Correct the setting value o 7E64 R ration poin r f range range error Registration point HOES cub of range registration point word byte PLC CP ee am abnorma e Setting value of the PLC CPU abnormal monitoring e Correct the setting value o 7E65x4 monitoring number e Setting
136. C Q c Terminal resistor must be set or connected for the station of both ends on the circuit Match the Q series C24 to the specifications of the external device and connect a terminal resistor packed with the Q series C24 according to this section Connect or set a terminal resistor at the external device according to the instruction manual of the external device The terminal resistor to connect to the Q series C24 When communications performed using RS 422 330 Q 1 4 W resistor is connected e When communications performed using RS 485 110 Q 1 2 W resistor is connected x How to discriminate between the terminating resistors 330 Q 110 Q Orange Orange Brown Brown Brown Brown Sis ii d If data cannot be communicated with the external device at all the polarity of the external device could be wrong and should be checked again If the polarities of the Q series C24 and the external device do not match reverse the polarity of each signal on either device side and connect the devices with the cable this may enable the data to be communicated POINT 1 For terminal resistor setting connection described in this section when the RS 232 to RS 422 converters or similar device is used at the external device at both ends of the circuit a terminal resistor must be set or connected at the converter 2 When using the RS 232C to RS 422 converters to connect the external devices and the Q series C24 use
137. Communication rate setting Enter check marks in the CH1 and CH2 fields cm CH2 Setting value Communication speed unit bps sd _____i i __ ___ Odd even parity pO t52 00 Pa 280400 3 Communication protocol setting Enter check marks in the CH1 and CH2 fields CH1 CH2 Setting data OH GX Developer connection Oooo es w f Format 1 Ooo T T a O Format 2 E a Se MC protocol Format 3 E pe e o Format 4 ae Fe e Format 5 pO Non procedure protocol pO iirectional protocol O po For inked operation setting Pp to Setting prohibited O pO ROM RAMSWitch test pO incivicuial station recovery test App 58 App 58 INDEX A B C D E Applicable modules ceeeeeeeeeeeetees 2 1 ASCll code table ccceeereeees App 17 Auto refresh o cccecceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 4 22 BIDIN a aa a aeaa ro ooon naa e aiana a 9 14 Bidirectional protocol s 7 1 BIDOU T Psst ieee ee ete 9 11 GING western nies ahaa heed aes 10 33 CH1 ERR CH2 ERR cceeceeceeeeee 10 37 Checking the function version 006 2 12 Checking the LED ON status communications error status eee 10 1 Checking the software version GX Configurator SC ecceeeeeeeseeeees 2 13 Communication protocol setting 4 16 Communication rate ccccseeseeseeneees 4 16 Communication support tool App 23 Communication System 3 1 Computer link
138. DC1 DC3 external control Check if the next message is transmitted without DG Codes Are mot adding DC2 12h after the external device transmits transmitted DC4 14x during DC2 DC4 external control The end code was not Check if the end code set at the Q series C24 and the e An external device end code transmitted from the external device are the transmitted a message received or fixed length same data was not received Check if the external device transmitted the fixed and RD blinked but length designated at the Q series C24 the read request signal Check if the trailer frame was transmitted during communications by user frame ON e When the send data from the external device is correct take the corrective action described in Sections 10 3 10 and 10 3 11 The Q series C24 e The data count basics message format etc depend on the following settings setting and message ASCII BIN conversion enable disable format do not match Transparent code setting User frame setting See the relevant section for a description of operation according to the set contents and setting of each item Set or shorten the monitoring time and retransmit the message from the external device and determine the The Q series C24 data trouble from the contents of the time out error communications Error detection by the watchdog timer timer 0 to timer 2 is possible in the following cases infinite or the When part of a me
139. E 30D or later 1 See section 2 6 for the versions of the GX Developer and GX Configurator SC that support the functions added through improvements in the Q series C24 b Communication support tools for external devices ActiveX control library MX Component SWnDSC ACT E The n in the model name is 0 or greater 1 1 Depending on the version of MX Component used different versions of Q series C24 are supported See the manual of MX Component for the details 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 2 Combinations of PLC CPU and External Device and Available Functions The following describes the system configurations and available functions when using the Q series C24 1 System configurations System configurations combinations of PLC CPU and external device for data communication are shown below a External device and Q series C24 with 1 1 system configuration b 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c External device and Q series C24 with 1 n system configuration
140. E HO hees D K Reads the status of data communication FROMP HO H255 DO KI Reads the status of data communication on the CH2 side from address 265un C b15 to bo The CH1 side is waiting to receive a command message DO 0 and is using non procedure or bidirectional protocol D1 4 CH2 is accessing the PLC CPU upon reception of a command message 10 10 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 1 5 Reading the switch setting status This section explains how to read the switch setting status of the Q series C24 When GX Configurator SC is used check the status in the Monitor test others screen see Section 8 6 9 1 The switch settings can be changed when the mode is switched or when the UINI instruction is executed The station No setting can be changed only when the UINI instruction is executed For the mode switching refer to Chapter 15 of the User s Manual Application For the UINI instruction refer to Chapter 17 of the User s Manual Application 2 For the switch settings refer to Section 4 5 1 Setting status storage area The switch settings by GX Developer and setting error information are stored in different areas of the buffer memory shown below 1 Station number storage area address 200n b15 to bO Buffer memory address 2004 0 to 31 Station number 2 Switch setting error mode switching error storage area address 2031 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8
141. ERATION 4 1 to 33 AA Handling Precautions ce enaa tects bisdetg sda teed bt aag da teat a a a 4 1 4 2 Settings and Procedures Prior to Operation cccccecceceeceeseeeeceeceeeseeeaeceeeeeeeaesaeseesaesaeeeseaesaesaeseeeeaeeaes 4 2 4 3 Patt Naimes ang FUNGHONS o ano napana EAA AEA A iaaa APAA EARS a ENAA ATEA e AEA AAEE ENAA ARERR EA 4 3 4A External WIN cs ete sees cobs cess cad cdasececdetvcdecediceutedeteceulddse Sources eels dessdesieevedelscednel eevedeisveestevinnidvaes 4 5 4 4 1 Connecting the RS 232 interface full duplex COMMUNICATIONS eeceeeeeeteeteeeeeeeteeeeteeteaeeaes 4 6 4 4 2 Connecting the RS 422 485 interface cceccesceseeeeeeeeeseeeeceeceeeeaecaecaeseeesaesaeseeseaeeaesaeeeeeeaeeaesaneateaes 4 8 4 5 Settings for GX Develo pet rsss haniste noaie atia aeee eani aaa aaae aaiae atv teat hdtv 4 12 45 1 O dssignment Settings 8 astia een iad in Aine Ava aster evn land ane 4 12 4 5 2 Switch settings for I O and intelligent functional module ccecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeaeeaes 4 13 4 5 3 The Intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting 2 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeenes 4 20 4 6 Settings with the Utility Package GX Configurator SC cceccecceseeseeeeceeeeeeeaeeaeceeeeaesaesaeeeeesaesaeeeseaeaes 4 22 4 7 Individual Station TeSt ccccecceccesesseeeeceeceeeeeecaeceeeeeesaecaeceeeeaesaesaeseeeeaecaeseeseaeeaesaeseeseaesaeeeseaesaesae
142. FH Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion 8956 5 2 Utilizing the MX Component If the external device is a PC running one of the basic operation systems below it is possible to create a communication program for the external device without considering the detailed MC protocol transmission reception procedures using one of the following separately sold communication support tools See Appendix 7 for the overview of MX Component Supported basic operation systems Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System Depending on the version of MX Component used different operating systems are supported See the manual of MX Component for details Communication support tools e MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL Data communication using the non procedure protocol is a function for sending and receiving data between a PLC CPU and an external device using the message format and transmission control procedure specified by the user Data can be transfer
143. Flash ROM setting screen click on the File save button Then in the file designation dialog box designate the file name under which the data will be saved All of the new setting values will be saved in the file 2 E E EEEE OE The Monitor screen or each sub screen See Section 8 3 3 2 Save the new system setting values in a file for backup Set the flash ROM write allow prohibit designation to prohibited Close the Monitor test screen Select in the Monitor screen See Section 8 4 12 Close C End 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 3 2 Starting the intelligent function module utility displaying the select parameter setting module screen Purpose Start the intelligent function module utility from the GX Developer and display the module selection screen for the intelligent function module utility parameter setting The screens that perform system setting auto refresh setting and monitoring testing for the Q series C24 can be started from this module selection screen POINT To start the Intelligent function module utility a project created with the GX Developer whose PLC series is set as QCPU Q mode is required Startup procedure Tools gt Intelligent function module utility gt Start Setting screen Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW sample _ Of x anger en module parame
144. I BIN conversion oe o Jx x Transmitted received with transparent code designation a o o x x App 6 App 6 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Ovaa lt x z ee z data reception Bidirectional Bidirectional protocol Auto refresh directed to the PLC CPU eceeae St Transmission control DTP DSR signal control O Half duplexcommunicationcontrol o o o O O e Independent operation of two Setting the same protocol a eee a Jo a ee interfaces Setting different protocols a ey eee ee Linked operation of two interfaces Registering initial setting values of the buffer memory a Flash ROM EEPROM Registering user frame Pasemon O O IO as O 6 Or oe Gomecion oi GXDevelper PO E E Cormuricaton camem a o jaa se and monitoring of setting values by the utility package QCPU QnACPU AnACPU AnACPU MELSECNET 1 PLC that can be mounted MELSECNET H SEC 10 AnUCPU AnUCPU R remote I O station emote I O station QnACPU QnACPU Data transmission rate bps 230400 maximum 115200 19200 19200 19200 p 6 maximum maximum maximum maximum Q Function exists possible A Function exists possible specification is different depends on the function version see Appendix 1 X No function impossible x1 Access is possible only within the range of an AnACPU device x2 A multiple block batch read write function can be used for the local station QCPU to which the Q series C24 is mounted and
145. IONS MELSEC Q Device Reference Device P Reference Signal description 3 Signal description 3 ETA section number section xa CH1 Global signal ON Output instructed Section 3 10 ae Use prohibited CH2 Global signal ON Output instructed Reference faul XIC System setting default completion Section 8 4 11 System setting default request Section 8 4 11 ON Completed ON Requesting Watchdog timer error WDT error Use prohibited XIF 5 ON Module error occurred OFF Module being normally operated 1 The device does not turn on off by execution of a dedicated instruction when a function that corresponds to the input signal is used x2 The device does turn on off by execution of a dedicated instruction when a function that corresponds to the input signal is used from ON to OFF Data read completed x3 The mode switching signal X6 XD turns ON at mode switching receive clear user frame receive designation or transmission sequence initialization While the mode switching signal X6 XD is ON do not issue a communication request to the target interface The communication processing of the Q series C24 is stopped while the mode switching signal X6 XD is ON 4 The Q series C24 ready signal indicates whether or not it is possible to access the Q series C24 from the PLC CPU Use it as a interlock signal for a sequence program It turns on about one second after turning the power ON and reset operation x5 Restart th
146. If an attempt is made during execution of an OUTPUT instruction to execute one of the instructions above the second instruction will not be executed until the execution of the OUTPUT instruction is completed 3 Whether an OUTPUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the OUTPUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the OUTPUT instruction e Normal completion Off with no change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the OUTPUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation during execution of an OUTPUT instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program i j l Completion of transmission by y Execution of OUTPUT i the OUTPUT instruction instruction f OUTPUT instruction 1 ON Completion device OFF Abnormal Status display device OFF at completion Normal I completion One scan 9 6 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Error MELSEC Q 1 When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result
147. M202 Normal completion of REMTO instruction M103 a SET M203 J Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction App 34 App 34 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 3 When sending on demand data The following program example sends on demand data using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals For the on demand function refer to Section 3 11 of the Reference Manual and Chapter 10 of the User s Manual Application 1 Program conditions The following program sends on demand data from the CH1 side when the transmission command X1022 turns ON a Devices used e Transmission command cceecceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaes X1022 e Transmission command pulse signal M10 e On demand function designation COMMANG cceeeeee M11 On demand data transmission flag escceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees M12 e On demand execution result acquisition command 0 M13 e LED ON status acquisition command ceceeseteteeeeteees M14 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 107 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO NSYON anian aana there Sol geet ees ata aaaea aana a tans M200 to 204 e Normal abnormal completion of on demand data TFANSMISSION AA aad wt eS Ain ees ieee een ee M300 M301 TFANSMISSION data noa a a Aaa a E DO D1 e Buffer memory head address designation for on demand TU CT OM PeT E EE E stdPen shake svaghebereecadenercchertes D2 e Data l
148. NI instruction 5 digits of the serial x O O O No are 06062 Function version A i or later whose first i SW0D5C QSCU E Remote password check O Function version B 5 digits of the serial Version 6 or later 20C or later No are 02092 Usable no restrictions depending on the version x Not usable 2 Checking the version and serial No of Q series PLC functions Using the rated plate on the side of the module to check The serial No and function version of the corresponding module is shown in a the SERIAL column SERIAL oS S5 S of the rated plate Function version 020920000000000 B a Compliant standard sm ams ams em em em em em em am em em em ca eee amet a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN Serial No first 5 digits 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS PLC 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 MELSEC Q b Using the GX Developer to check The method of checking the serial No and function version of the corresponding module with the GX Developer is shown The serial No and function version are displayed on the GX Developer Product Information List or Module s Detailed Information screen The method of checking the serial No and function version on the Product Information List screen is shown below See Section 10 1 1 for details about the Module s Detailed Information screen Start Procedure Diagnostics gt System monit
149. Number of data byte registered acquisition command M13 e User frame acquisition COMMANGC eceeceeeeeeteeeeteteeeteteees M14 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 107 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO NSUN iaiaeiaeiaa tartans ee ai M200 to 204 Read INSTRUCTION ssi sasszce lesseattaneasesdasacateateraseedapasdiaviseseleneatans DO Frame No 34 kn dine eves ve ete eee dae D1 v Readiresultes uae aie ee eee D2 e Number of data bytes registered ee eeeeeeeseeeneeeeeeeteeeteees D3 USSR TAINS 2 foi E abe accel awcveeth lea secel xtevestivaneech etevecareevett ls D4 or later e Number of registered data ccccccecceeeseceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeseesenees D50 D100 b Buffer memory settings used in this example These settings are used to read the user frame registered in Appendix 9 9 Address Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name value Register read delete instructions Frame No direction 03E8H Registration read delete result storage ee al Number of data bytes registered designation App 50 App 50 APPENDIX 2 Program example lt Read command gt X1029 H PLS lt Setting of read instruction gt M10 M11 X101E K2 H3E8 K2 M100 M101 f SET M101 I SET lt Flash ROM read request gt M11 X1017 SET X1017 sss e lt Read of read result gt M12 X101E H HHL RENRR U1 KI KI HO H4 D2 K M102 M
150. O Available X Not available Functions of the Q series C24 n configuration Reference section gici na tin mn Data Data transmission receiving in arbitrary format in arbitrary format Data transmission receiving with usertrames O O O O PLC CPU monitoringtunction OT x xfx Reading received data using interuptprograms o o o jarion Sending receiving ASCII data using ASCII BIN conversion o o o c Communication using the bidirectional protocol O Available X Not available Functions of the Q series C24 System configuration configuration Reference section Data transmission receiving Po x x x thismanua Chapter 7 Reading received data using interrupt programs olx x x Meena Chapter 4 Sending receiving ASCII data using ASCII BIN conversion Lee dl Se ose x Chapter 13 x In general if data communication is performed using a system configuration of other than 1 1 connection mode the following points should be well noted e Avoid simultaneous transmission e Discard data received other than that addressed to the local station 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 3 For Use in Multiple CPU System This section explains the use of the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system 1 When making access from the external device to the non control CPU of the Q series C24 using either of the following functions use the Q series C24 of function version B
151. O Signals for Handshake with PLC CPU and Buffer Memory 15 4 Switching the Mode from the PLC CPU 15 5 Switching the Mode from an External Device 16 USING COMMUNICATION DATA MONITORING FUNCTION 16 1 Communication Data Monitoring Function 16 2 Communication Data Monitoring Function Settings 16 3 Communication Data Monitoring Example 17 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 17 1 Dedicated Instruction List 17 2 BUFRCVS Instruction 17 3 CSET Instruction PLC CPU Monitoring Register Cancel 17 4 CSET Instruction Initial Settings 17 5 GETE Instruction 17 6 PRR Instruction 17 7 PUTE Instruction 17 8 UINI Instruction SH 080007 G Related Manual 2 Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 1 2 Overview of the MELSEC Communication Protocol Features of the MELSEC Communication Protocol 2 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 Types and Applications of Data Communication Frames Accessible Range of Each Data Communication Frames How to Read the Control Procedures of the MC Protocol Access Timing of the PLC CPU Side Setting Method for Writing to the PLC CPU during RUN Accessing Other Stations Precautions on Data Communication Time Chart and Communication Time of the Transmission Sequence of the Serial Communication Module Transmission Time When Accessing Other Stations Via MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 2 10
152. O slot 1 of the base module x1 Limited to within the range of I O points for the CPU module and network module for remote I O station 3 Multiple CPU systems When using the Q series C24 on a multiple CPU system refer to the QPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System before operation a Applicable Q series C24 If using the Q series C24 on a multiple CPU system use function version B of the Q series C24 b Intelligent function module parameter To write the intelligent function module parameter on a PLC be sure to write it in the Q series C24 control PLC only 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Applicable software packages a Software setting amp monitor tools 1 for the PLC The following table lists the systems and software packages applicable for the Q series C24 When using the Q series C24 GX Developer is required GX Developer GX Configurator SC a CPU system Version 1 0 or later Q00J Q00 Q001CPU Versions prior to SWOD5C Mutiple CPU system CPU system Version 8 or later QSCU E 40E are not usable Q02 Q02H Q06H Single CPU system SWOD5C QSCU E 00A or later Q12H Q25HCPU Mutiple CPU system CPU system SW0D5C QSCU E 20C or later Single CPU system CPU system Version 1 13P or later Q12PH Q25PHCPU Multiole CPU syst Version 7 10L or later Versions prior to SWOD5C abies system QSCU E 40E are not usable cae anMELSECNET H remote VO Version 6 or later SWODSC QSCU
153. OL MELSEC Q 1 Receive data can also be read using interrupt programs For more details on reading receive data with interrupt programs see Chapter 4 of the User s Manual Application Note that if the reading of data received from the same interface is to be performed it is not possible to combine the reading of data received by the main program and reading of data received by the interrupt program Accordingly use one or the other of the above programs to read the data received 2 The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 9 3 More than one INPUT instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next INPUT instruction only after the execution of the first INPUT instruction is completed 4 When the communication data count is set in word units and if the received data count is an odd byte when requesting the reading of received data to the PLC CPU the receive data count is processed as follows Receive data count Receive data byte count 2 Fractions following the decimal point are rounded up Also 00H is stored in the higher byte of the final data storage position in the receive area where receive data is stored 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 4 Receive data clear For the data reception by a non procedure protocol if the transmission of data from a transmitting device is interrupted due to troub
154. ON A tn nit el aa eevee D1 e Buffer memory length designation for on demand WANSMISSION isl tne lec a ieee D2 e Transmission buffer memory head address designation D3 e Transmission buffer memory length designation 4 D4 e Receive buffer memory head address designation D5 e Receive buffer memory length designation s D6 Buffer memory settings used in this example b Address Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name value 150 96H Word byte units designation 160 AO App 46 H Buffer memory head address designation for on demand function designation 0400H Transmission buffer memory length designation 0400H Receive buffer memory head address designation 0600H 167 A7H Receive buffer memory length designation 0200H App 46 APPENDIX 2 Program example lt Initial setting command gt MELSEC Q Changes the initial setting command into pulses Sets the word byte units designation to byte Transfers the setting value to the word byte units designation area of the buffer memory Initial setting command 2 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Sets 400x to the buffer memory head address for on demand transmission Sets On to the buffer memory length for on demand transmission Sets OC00u to the transmission buffer memory head address Sets 400 to the transmission buffer memory length Transfers the s
155. ONS eee eee cece eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeesaeeseeesaeeeeseeesaeeseeeseeeseeeteneeaees 8 13 8 4 System Registration to Flash ROM c ccccescesceeeeseeeeceeceeeeaeeaecaeeeeeeaecaeceeseeeeaesaesaeseeesaesaeseeseaseseeeeaeeaees 8 16 8 4 1 User frame registration ceeeccecseceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseaeseaeeeaeseaeeeaesaeseaeseaeseaeeeaeeeasecaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 8 18 8 4 2 Data for modem initialization registration eeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeteeseeeteeeteeeteneeaaes 8 19 8 4 3 Data for modem CONNECTION registration eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeteeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 8 20 8 4 4 Modem function system Setting registration eceecseceseceeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeteaeseeeeeeeeenteaes 8 21 8 4 5 Transmission control and others system Setting 0 02 eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeseeeseeeeeeseaeseeeteeeeeaeeats 8 22 8 4 6 MC protocol system Setting ceccecceseseeceeceeeeeeceeceeceeeeaecaeceeeeaesaecaeseeeeaeeaesaeseaesaesaeseeseaeeeseaeseeseateaes 8 24 8 4 7 Non procedure System Setting 2 2 0 cecceeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeneeneeeneeaees 8 25 8 4 8 Bidirectional system setting 0 ee eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeesseeseeesaaesaeeseeeseeseeeseeseeseeseateeeseeeeeeeeaes 8 26 8 4 9 PLC CPU monitoring system Setting cecceseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeaecaeseeeeaecaeseeseeeeaesaeseeeeaeeaee
156. P Set whether to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM Section 8 4 12 allow prohibit designation X Y monitor test Perform the monitoring testing of I O signals to from the PLC CPU lol o o Section 8 6 1 Modem function monitor test_ Monitor the execution status of the modem function lol o oo Section 8 6 2 CHn Transmission control and others monitor test Monitor the status of interface control signals values set from the GX Developer etc CHn MC protocol monitor Monitor the data communication result I O signal status and ion 8 6 5 ppt setting values in the buffer memory orn Bidirectional JE e ee ee ae a e Leaner monitoring monitor _ monitoring function CHn User frame No designation F i g Monitor the setting value for user frame to be transmitted Section8 6 8 monitor for transmission Monitor test others Monitor the data reception result error occurrence status etc lol o o Section 8 6 9 ERR LED off Turn off the ERR LEDs on the front face of the module lol o o Sections 6 10 Non procedure protocol A P p Clear the currently received data Section 8 7 receive data clear ion 8 6 4 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 2 Installing and Uninstalling Utility Package See Method of installing the MELSOFT Series attached with the utility package regarding the install and uninstall operation for the utility package 8 2 1 Usage precautions The following describes
157. Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module MITSUBISHI User s Manual Basic ao A QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 GX Configurator SC SW2D5C QSCU E Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEG Q e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module to use In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION N Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions O DANGER resulting in death or severe injury i l CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Design Instructions lt DANGER e See manuals of each data link for the ope
158. ROM read request signal Sets the delete flag App 53 APPENDIX Appendix 9 12 When changing the communication protocol and transmission setting MELSEC Q This section provides a program example that changes the communication protocol and transmission setting using the REMFR REMTO instructions and I O signals When the module is used on a MELSECNET H remote I O station the station No cannot be changed because the UINI instruction is unavailable For changing the communication protocol and transmission setting refer to Chapter 15 of the User s Manual Application 1 Program conditions When the change command X1031 turns on the communication protocol and transmission setting are changed a Devices used by user Change COMMANG ccecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeaeeaesaeeeeteeeaees Changing flagri cida iisa dailies Change completion flag ce ceccceceeceeseeeeseeseeeeeeeeetereeeeneeaees CH1 change command pulse signal cceeeseeeeeeeeees CH1 change command eesseseseeseseesesrsresrerssnsrsrsrsrernsrsrnsns CH1 mode switching completion sseseseeseseeeeeieseeeeeenn CH1 receive ProCeSSiNG ceccecceeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeteseeeeteneeaees CH1 send processing ceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeteeeeeseeeeeeeeaees CH2 change command pulse Signal ceceseeeeeeeeees CH2 change command eesseseseeeesiesrerssrsrssnsrernrsrernsrsrnens CH2 mode switching c
159. ROM write allow prohibit designation are written to the buffer memory Write to module Registers all system setting data for the Q series C24 in the flash ROM Read from module Reads all system setting data for the Q series C24 from the flash ROM 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 1 2 MELSEC Q Saves all system setting data for the Q series C24 to the designated file extension UMD Reads all system setting data for the Q series C24 from the designated file extension UMD Closes the currently displayed screen and returns to the previously displayed screen Saves writes the system setting data closes the current screen and returns to the previously displayed screen With offline operation only File save and File read are enabled When the setting operation is complete in each system setting screen register the system setting data in the flash ROM then restart the PLC CPU to resume data transmission If two or more intelligent function module utility package are running perform each operation after selecting the target utility package from the task bar and making it active When the menu screen for system registration to flash ROM see Section 8 4 is closed all the system setting data will be cleared Before closing the screen write the data to the module enabled only via online operation or save it to a file Data file to be created with utility package The data a
160. RS RTS 7 RS RTS CS CTS 8 CS CTS RI Cl 9 x The CD terminal check setting is set according to the specification of the external device When wiring shown above DTR DSR control or DC code control may be performed b Connection example with an external device not capable of turning on and off the CD signal No 1 pin 1 Connection example 1 Q series C24 External device Signal name Pin No Signalname CD 1 CD RD RXD 2 RD RXD SD TXD 3 SD TXD DTR ER 4 DTR ER SG 5 gt SG DSR DR 6 DSR DR RS RTS 7 EA RS RTS CS CTS 8 CS CTS RI Cl 9 x When wiring shown above DTR DSR control or DC code control may be performed 2 Connection example 2 Q series C24 External device Signal name Pin No Signal name cD 1 cD RD RXD 2 gt RD RXD SD TXD 3 SD TXD DTR ER 4 DTR ER SG 5 gt SG DSR DR 6 gt DSR DR RS RTS 7 ca RS RTS CS CTS 8 CS CTS RI Cl 9 x When wiring shown above DC code control may be performed If the PLC CPU and an external device cannot be communicated try to perform data communication as a connection test using the wiring connection as shown in Connection example 2 If data can be communicated using the wiring connection shown in Connection example 2 rewire after checking the interface specifications
161. SD WAIT SIO PRO P S C N NAK ACK NEU CH2 ERR CH1 ERR 2 H W SW Information Parameter The switch information of the Q series C24 is displayed Numbers 1 through 5 correspond to switches 1 through 5 shown in Section 4 5 2 See Section 4 5 2 of the User s Manual Basic 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 3 Checking by GX Configurator SC Display the Monitor test others screen For details on display screens see Section 8 6 9 of the User s Manual Basic 4 Description of LED ON status and communications error status Related Related protocol Status Description when ON Description when OFF Initial NOH signal Description when LED turned on when LED is turned off Bidirection state procedure name 0 al protocol protocol Waiting for data transmission Overrun or framing error occurred SIO error status OS area is full Received data was deleted Communication protocol p Error occurred Normal error status Status of parity error or P S parny Error occurred Normal sum check error Access status with the 5 C N a1 Normal OFF ia PLC CPU e po Abnormal completion Abnormal completion Normal completion NAK i N sie OFF status transmission transmission Normal completion Normal completion Abnormal completion OFF status transmission transmission Neutral status Waiting to receive Command reception command Error occurrence status Switch setting error on CH2 side Mode
162. SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Procedure 4 Ending a ROM RAM switch test 1 Perform the following procedures after checking normal completion abnormal completion of the test results Normal completion Perform operation 2 to finish tests Upon error occurrence When an error occurs in a switch check or linked operation setting check set the correct values and test again When an error occurs in a ROM or RAM check check the mounting status of module and test again If there is no error in the mounting status of module consult your nearest dealer or branch office Perform the ending procedure for ROM RAM switch test 1 Follow the procedure in Section 4 7 2 to perform an individual loopback test operation 2 Perform the following procedure to end the test and start data communication with an external device e Set the switch settings on GX Developer according to the procedure specified in Section 4 5 2 e Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect the communication cable with an external device e Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 7 2 Individual station loopback test The individual station loopback test checks the operation of the communication function of the Q series C24 Follow the procedure below to perform an individual station loopback test Procedu
163. See Section 6 4 of the User s Manual Application If response messages still cannot be received after increasing the setting value it is necessary to reduce the processing time from the end of transmission processing to the start of reception processing on the external device side 10 38 10 38 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 12 Troubleshooting when data that cannot be decoded is transmitted and received Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure e With a multidrop link e Connect the external devices and the Q series two or more devices C24 in a 1 1 configuration and perform a transmitted data at the communications test same time Since data is transmitted simultaneously from two or more devices with a multidrop link when normal data communications among all the devices is possible interlock the external devices so that they do not transmit simultaneously Data does not match the e Match the Q series C24 and external device parity bit setting parity bit settings If the setting of one side is data bit length 7 bits and with parity and the setting of the other side is data length 8 bits and without parity the number of transmission receive Data does not match the parity bit setting Data that cannot be bits will be the same and the data will sent decogea was and receive without generating an error transmitted and sana e Transmission rate Match the Q series C24 and external device setti
164. Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting Switch 5 Station number setting X For settings to perform linked operation between two Q series C24 interfaces see 2 When GX Developer and or the GOT is connected directly to the Q series C24 switching settings using GX Developer need not be made to perform access to the QCPU monitoring and other operations If switch settings are not made operation is performed in the GX Developer connection mode 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q a Transmission setting CH1 side switch 1 lower level CH2 side switch 3 lower level b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Bt Description OFF 0 ON 1 eo Operation seting Independent Link Must be set to OFF on CH1 Data bit Parity bit is not included EE Parity bit f hoe a eer a Vertical parity ve only when parity bit is set to Ea pili paniy peee e b4 Soph hs e aS a a a AS bs Write during RUN Prohibited Allowed o7 Setting modifications Prohibited Allowed All items listed in the table should be set to OFF for the interfaces for which GX Developer connection is set in the communication protocol setting If connecting directly to the GX Developer it operates with the setting value on the GX developer Refer to the description below Operation setting Independent Data bit po Paityit es Evervoddparty dd SC Stop bit rr Sum check code Yes Setting mo
165. The CD terminal check setting should be set to No check according to the explanation in Section 3 2 1 1 Transmission control cannot be used Connection example 4 KS 485 External device side RS232 signal RS485 signal Q series C24 side FG 1l FG swi se H FG SD 2 Rp ON TRD 2 SDA gt 3 TRD 3 gt SDB l gt ARDT 5 SD 2 ON Fa 9 UC RDA When connecting RS CS 3 ON IR with other stations cs 6 ER ADEE le 7 4 OFF SG fr ey DSR SG 5 OFF i SG 20 DR 24 6 OFF CD TC These switches should DTR 25 SNT 7 OFF be ON when the KS 485 8 OFF IS at the terminal of the x Data communication can be made line in half duplex communication Transmission control cannot be used App 22 App 22 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 7 Communication Support Tool MX Component MX Component is an ActiveX control library that supports any types of communication paths between IBM PC AT compatible personal computers and PLCs It allows the users to establish communication using simple processing only without having to know about the different communication protocols used in the individual communication It also supports various programming languages allowing for a wide range of application development This section provides the overview of the functions provided by MX Component and explains the procedure up to creation of applications See Operating Manual and Programming Manual of MX Component for the details
166. The sum check calculated by the Q series C24 and P S e Recheck the external device the received sum check are not the same sum check e Correct the data length that is transmitted from the external device e Change the word byte units set by the Q series C24 to byte units e Increase the receiving area of the Q series C24 e Perform the communication after the unlock processing is normally completed e Process by agreement with the external device e When necessary change the simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation setting by GX Configurator SC buffer memory addresses 9B 13Bn data was dropped from the receive data e Check if DTR control etc interrupted reception e Check the status of the message transmission destination and restart data communications as required e Check if DTR control etc interrupted transmission Decrease the data transmission rate and restart data communications Check whether a temporary stop has occurred in the station in which the Q series C24 is installed For the QCPU this can be checked using special register SD1005 If a temporary stop has occurred remove its cause Match the Q series C24 and external device settings Clear the error information according to the error information initialization request YE YF In addition when communicating data with the non procedure protocol execute the INPUT instruction and read and discard the unnece
167. Transmission abnormal completion Off 02 Transmission processing in progress Off gt 14 Global signal Off Y00 Transmission request Off On demand function designation 0400 X m Flash ROM setting m Details Write to Fil Current value Monitoring module mans display Cannot execute test pea man File read Make text file Start monitor Stop monitor Execute te Close 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor items buffer memory address detailed explanation 257 2674 Chapter 10 of X00 CH1 Transmission normal completion Users Manual Basic X01 CH1 Transmission abnormal completion X02 CH1 Transmission processing in progress Sections 3 10 and 3 11 of X1A CH1 Global signal i ee Reference Manual Y00 CH1 Transmission request ee Buffer memory head address designation A0H 140H Data length designation A1H 141H Chapter 10 of User s Manual Application Chapter 6 of Message wait time designation units 10 ms 11EH 1BExH p ee User s Manual Application 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 6 5 Non procedure monitor test Purpose Monitor the status and setting values of the data transmission using the non procedure protocol The test operation for the receive data clear is explained in Section 8 7 Startup procedure Monitor screen gt CHO Non procedure monitor test Monitor test screen CH1 Non procedure monitor test _ oxi Modu
168. When the Q series C24 of function version A is used only the control CPU can be accessed Access to the non control CPU will result in an error e Communication using MC protocol e Communication using GX Developer External device Multiple CPU system Communication using MC protocol Communication using GX Developer Q series C24 of function version B 2 Ifthe other stations to be accessed belong to the multiple CPU system the modules used for routing and QCPUs at the local station all the relay stations and the accessed station should be modules of function version B or later This has to hold in all cases of accessing the non control PLC of the module used for routing and the accessed station 1 Example It is possible to access other stations regardless of whether the control PLC of the module to be routed through is the same or different External device Local station Peripheral device Communication through GX Developer Communication using the MC protocol Setting from GX Developer MELSECNET H 1 2 3 4 2 Relay station 1 PLC No 1 2 PLC No 2 3 PLC No 3 4 PLC No 4 1 Module used for routing controlled by PLC No 1 Station to be accessed 1 Q series C24 controlled by PLC No 1 2 Modul
169. a dedicated instructions can be read by an SPBUSY instruction 2 Designate the storage capacity of transmission data stored in D10 to D11 in the program example above and data length stored in D2 in the program example above within the range of the buffer memory the user has assigned for an on demand function 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 9 3 OUTPUT Instruction This instruction transmission data in any message format specified by the user using the non procedure protocol Applicable device MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10_ Special module Direct JO O UO GD Internal device Index register Zn Constant Others System user File register Instruction Executi code condition Command OUTPUT k courut un St 82 D Command s t GP OUTPUT Un S1 2 D Set data Description Un Start I O signal of the module m BIN1 emet bit 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit User S1 Head number of the devices in which control data is stored asen 81 system Device name Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored User Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution System Bit The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Device Item Set data Setting range Set by 3 Set transmission channel S1 0 Transmission chann
170. a multidrop connection system The Q series C24 can be installed on an existing system to which the PLC CPU and external devices are connected as 1 n or m n multidrop connection 1 x1 This is when a QC24 N or a computer link module such as AJ71UC24 is used as the PLC CPU module of the multidrop connection However there are frame restrictions when data communication is performed See the Reference Manual 2 Replacing the QnACPU module with a QCPU The wiring used by the QC24 N can be used as is POINT The functional use is the same except for the functions added by the Q series C24 to the conventional module However with the introduction of high speed QCPUs there may be cases in which communication cannot be performed normally when a PLC module in the QnA series is replaced by a Q series PLC When a module is changed to a Q series PLC module make sure to perform an operation check App 9 App 9 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 3 Using Programs Designed for the Computer Link Module and Installing the Q Series C24 into Existing Systems This section describes how to use programs created for A series computer link modules and installing the Q series C24 into an existing system When using the Q series C24 make sure to set the operation mode station number and transmission specifications with the following parameter setting screen of GX Developer e Intelligent function module switch setting screen The Q se
171. aeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeeeteeneseeeaees 6 28 6 3 Data Communications Precautions ccccceccecceceeeeeseceeceeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeaecaeceeseaesaseeseaesaesaeseeseaeeaesaseeseaeeaees 6 30 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL 7 1 to 7 28 7 1 Data Reception from the External Device oe eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeseaeeeeeeaeenaeeeaeeeaeenas 7 2 FRET RECEIVING MEMOOS ve 8 4 alae ea a a ea a 7 2 7 1 2 Arrangement and contents of the receive area and the receive data eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 7 4 7 1 3 Sequence program for data reception ececceceeceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeaecaeseeeeaeeaeseseeesaesaeseetaeseeeeeeeeaees 7 10 7 1 4 How to detect reception CrrOrs cecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeseeeseeeseesaeeseeeseeseeeseeesenseeeseneeaaes 7 13 FAD Receive data ceai nreno ai aaa seventies send AT RN 7 14 7 2 Sending Data to the External Device eteeeecceceeseeeeeeececeeeeeaeceeeeeeeaecaecaeeeaeeaesaesaesaeeaesaeeeeseaeseesneseaeeaees 7 15 7 2 1 Transmissi n methods crecen a n iiki 7 15 7 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data 7 16 7 2 3 Sequence program for data transmission c ccecceceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeseeseeeeaesaeseeeeaeseeeeeeeaees 7 19 7 2 4 How to detect transmission effors ceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeneeeseeseeeeeees 7 22 7 3 Processing when Simultaneous Tr
172. al Explanation Function MC procedure P Remarks protocol page protocol Refresh the Q series C24 s error codes and set devices on the PLC Auto refresh setting CPU side Section 4 6 Register the user frame in the flash ROM lol o Sections 4 1 Section 8 4 1 Data for modem initialization Register the data for modem initialization in the flash ROM ee oeo Section 8 4 2 Data for modem connection Register the data for model connection in the flash BOM Section 8 4 3 setting ROM CHn Transmission Set the transmission specifications with the other device control and others DTR DSR control DC code control communication method data ears ction 8 4 5 system setting communication monitoring timer value etc ciel leita a ae system setting frame number etc Assign the buffer memory needed to perform data communication jo fs CHn Non procedure A ee the non procedure protocol and change the setting values system setting Eg ae a aM Ee system setting using the bidirectional protocol and change the setting values etc ele Section 8 4 9 CHn Transmission rai tame No Set the user frame number to be transmitted etc Section 8 4 10 designation system setting Reset the setting values in the buffer memory to their default pene semg Seau ee ee ee ere alt fee es eee System setting write Write the setting values in the buffer memory to the flash ROM lof o o Section 8 4 11 Flash ROM wri asao F e 3
173. al communication MOGUIE eceeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeteeeeees 10 6 10 1 3 Reading the RS 232 control Signal Status ccecceeeeceeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeeaeeaeeeeaetaee 10 9 10 1 4 Reading the data communication status Transmission sequence status ceeeeeeeeeeeeee 10 10 10 1 5 Reading the switch Setting Status 00 eee ccc eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseeeseesaeeseeseeeseeeteateeeeeeeeaaes 10 11 10 1 6 How to read the current operation Status ce ee eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeseeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseataes 10 13 102 Eror Code Tables jets a a a eee noes aa e E Ta eed atts lv teed alien atie en ied diel 10 15 10 21 Error code tables s 2icccse 5 sich sist teas sti a tected detec hated ouside eet 10 15 10 2 2 A compatible 1C frame communications error code table ceccceceeseseteseeseeessesseesseeeseeees 10 24 10 2 3 Error code list while modem function IS USCC eee eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeseeteeeteneteneeeeetanes 10 25 10 3 Troubleshooting by SyMptom cccecceceececcecceeeesececeecesesaecaeceeseaeeaesaeseseaesaesaeseseaesaesaeseeseaeeeseeseateaees 10 27 10 3 1 Troubleshooting when RUN LED is turned OFF ccccccecseeseesseceseeeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeaeseaeesaeesaeeaes 10 29 10 3 2 Troubleshooting when RD LED does not blink even though an external device is transmitting a Message nai aia eA i ae 10 30 10 3 3 Troubleshooting when the Q series C24 does not retu
174. al communication line is the most widely used medium on the market today 1 1 1 1 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 2 Features of the Serial Communication Module The following describes the features of the Q series C24 1 Data communication based on the MELSEC communication protocol hereinafter referred to as the MC protocol Details are explained in the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual a External devices can read write the PLC device data and sequence programs and can monitor PLC equipment status With the exception of the on demand function described below the PLC does not require a sequence program because the PLC sends and receives data based solely on commands from external devices b Using the on demand function data can be sent from the PLC CPU to the external devices in each frame format of the MC protocol c Data communication can be performed using a program at the external device side that has been created for communicating data with conventional A QnA series computer link module serial communication modules d If the external device is a PC running one of the basic operation systems below it is possible to create a communication program for the external device without considering the detailed MC protocol transmission reception procedures using one of the following separately sold communication support tools Supported basic operation systems Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System Micr
175. al completion of REMTO instruction Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory number of registered data bytes and later Sets the registration flag Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Turns ON the flash ROM write request signal Registration result acquisition command Reads the registration result from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2 Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the flash ROM write request signal Resets the registration flag App 49 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 10 When reading user frame The following program example reads a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to Section 9 4 of the User s Manual Application for details It is recommended to use GX Configurator SC when reading a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions The following program reads a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N when the read command X1029 turns ON a Devices used Read COMMANA cceccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeeesaeeseaeeeeieeeseaeeteaees X1029 e Read command pulse Signal ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees M10 t FRO TAG rann naaa aA T est tuted iseescs M11 e Registration result acquisition command l M12 e
176. al station FF or a local station FF ora station No set with the network parameter and station other than a restart data communications e Communication error station No set with the signal C N turned on network parameters Routing parameters e Check the routing parameters and set them up between CPU with the Q to the communications destination CPU series C24 loaded and communications destination CPU are not set 10 33 10 33 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure An error was generated Check the error contents from the state of SB on the MELSECNET H and SW related to the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET 10 with the GX Developer The local station CPU monitor etc and perform the checks and take on the MELSECNET H the corrective action described in the MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 reference generated an error manual Module installation e Change the transmit message designation data A address designation e Communication error DER during communications signal C N turned on ct ae with intelligent function module is incorrect A command that cannot be transmitted during Set the Enable disable write during RUN RUN sequence switch to Enable by command program parameters etc was transmitted or Disable write during RUN is set 10 3 7 Troubleshooting when communication error P S generates Symptom Correctiv
177. ame 7E00u to System error 7E05u e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Buffer memory i T ff 7E06 address setting e Transmit receive buffer memory addresses are in the special applications area error 7EO7u to System error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error 7EOAn 7 401 Command error eA nonexistent command or subcommand was designated e A data length exceeding the number of points that can communicate during random read write was designated Data length error e Number of requested points exceeds the range for Error count error the command e A nonexistent device was designated e Device that cannot be specified by the corresponding command was designated Device error Timer 1 time out e A response message was not returned within the error response monitoring time timer 1 monitoring time System error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Continuous request e The next request was received before a response message was returned for the preceding request System error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Error during data e Mode switching was executed during data transmission transmission 7E4Exn e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Device point count error 7E4Fu e Access point count is incorrect User frame No fi e A user frame No outside the range was designated designation error Unwritten user e An unwritten user
178. and the device that has completed the BIDOUT instruction turns ON When the BIDOUT instruction ends abnormally due to the reception of an NAK message the complete device 1 abnormal completion signal turns ON and the error code is stored in the control data completion status S1 1 Program example When Q series C24 I O signals are from X Y00 to X Y1F PLS M50 Transmission command is converted to pulse MOV ABCDEFG D11 Transmission data is stored mov HOAOD D15 MOV Ki DO Designate the number of the interface CHL that will send the data MOV Ko D1 Clear the transmission result storage device to 0 MoV K5 D2 Designate the transmission data count in word units Designate K10 when the unit is bytes DO D11 MO The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent F Mioi After the BIDOUT instruction is executed the user designated transmission complete signal M1 turns ON for one scan MOV D D101 Storing the transmission data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory and issuing a transmission request to the Q series C24 are all executed SE M102 by the PLC CPU RS M101 The completion flag is reset by the external command RS M102 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Q series C24 Address Buffer memory 257 Data transmission result storage area For normal completion DO Interface number 00011
179. ansmission Performed During Full Duplex Communications 7 24 7 3 1 Processing when simultaneous transmissions OCCUL 2 ccssccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeaeeecaeeeeeeeseneeseaees 7 24 7 3 2 Communication data processing when simultaneous transmissions OCCUTL cecceeteeeeereeeees 7 25 7 4 Data Communications Precautions cccceeccecceceeseeeececeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeaecaeceeseaeeaesaecaeseaeeaesaeseeeeaesaeeeseaeeaees 7 27 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR SC 8 1 to 8 51 8 1 Functions Available with Utility Package oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaaeeeaeeeatenas 8 2 8 2 Installing and Uninstalling Utility PACKAQC eee ee eeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeesaeeaaeeeaeeeaeenas 8 3 8 2 1 Usage precautions s casts aAa lied heres Bie dese sien RA RAA eens head aetna deat 8 3 8 2 2 Operating environMent sinc cve6 kee ava aed aves an rade nian sie ie i 8 5 8 3 Explanation of Utility Package Operation ceccesccececeeseeeeeeeceeeeaeeaecaeceeeeaecaeceeseeesaesaeseseaeeaeeeeseeeeaeeaee 8 6 8 3 1 Operation OVErVIOW ececceccecesseeseceeeeseeseceeceeeeaeeaecaeesaeeaecaecaeesaeeaecaecseseaeeaeseeseaseaeeaesaeesaeeaesaeeaeseaseaes 8 6 8 3 2 Starting the intelligent function module utility displaying the select parameter setting module SCFEEN eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeetaeetaeeteetaeeteetaeee 8 10 8 3 3 Performing COMMON Utility OPETALI
180. ansmission data data length E designation area J Transmission data 5FFu v The transmission data designated with the BIDOUT instruction is written and then sent Default 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the transmission data length See Section 8 4 5 a When changing the position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC designate as follows Transmission buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area of the buffer memory address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH Transmission buffer memory length designation Designate by addresses the length of the area 0001H to 1A00h to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area of the buffer memory address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH If the following functions are also used when the position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory are changed make sure that the addresses of the transmission area do not overlap with those for the buffer memory that stores the transmission and receive data to be used by these functions 1 MC protocol buffer memory read write function MC protocol on demand function Non pro
181. ansmission is explained below For details on the BIDOUT instruction for data transmission see Chapter 9 Transmission In case of the CH1 side instruction Create transmission data from D11 Create control data from DO G BIDOUT Mo M1 1p Processing for normal completion M1 Processing for abnormal completion retransmission etc Q series C24 ready signal X1E 1 Transmission instruction 2 3 BIDOUT BIDOUT instruction BIDOUT instruction complete device BIDOUT instruction complete device 1 Normal completion abnormal completion Transmission data count designation area buffer memory address 4001 Transmission data storage area buffer memory address 4014 to Transmission data Data transmission Receiving response 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Starts the local station PLC The setting values for GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 Inputs the user data transmission instruction signal Executes the BIDOUT instruction after storing the transmission data and the control data for the BIDOUT instruction in the device Data is sent when the BIDOUT instruction is executed A response message for the data transmission for normal completion ACK message for abnormal completion NAK message is received When the response is received the Q series C24 transmission processing completes
182. arge Fonts may cause the text to extend off screen Therefore choose Small Fonts Used operating system and performance required for personal computer Performance Required for Personal Computer Operating system Required memory Windows 95 Service Pack 1 or later Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more Windows 98 Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more Pentium 150MHz or more 32MB or more Windows NT Workstation 4 0 n 26 Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more Service Pack 3 or later Windows 2000 Professional Pentium 133MHz or more 64MB or more Windows XP XP compatibilit P y Pentium 300MHz or more 128MB or more Professional mode and Fast User Windows XP Switching are not Dag Pa Pentium 300MHz or more 128MB or more Home Edition supported 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 3 Explanation of Utility Package Operation 8 3 1 Operation overview GX Developer screen LD Edit mode MAIN 35 Step Loads uncon aa The following settings must be performed before starting Pes dt He ue ae erge data sti sels iS the intelligent function module utility Check parameter Transfer ROM Delete unused comments e Set the project using the GX Developer Clear all parameters enemys 6 HIG 4 Set QCPU Q mode for the PC series Start ladder logic test Set TEL data gt Intelligent function utility Utility list EB support function Customize key
183. arranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the u
184. as cable offcuts from entering the module when wiring Do not remove this film until the wiring is complete Before operating the system be sure to remove the film to provide adequate heat ventilation Startup Maintenance Instructions A CAUTION e Do not disassemble or modify each module Doing so could cause failure malfunction injury or fire e Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module e Do not mount remove the module onto from base unit more than 50 times IEC61 131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector e Do not touch the connector while the power is on Doing so may cause malfunction e Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning or retightening terminal screws and module installing screws Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module If the screws are loose it may cause the module to fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in the module falling out short circuits or malfunction e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module
185. as the following combined uses with For registration No 8013H data written by the user according to the purpose of use by the TO instruction etc See each explanation item concerning the configuration of each For registration No 8015H area the data written etc 1 If data communications is being carried out by user registration frame For registration No For registration No For registration No 8017H User registration frame User s Manual Application Not allowed pa e For registration No 8018H Chapter 9 2 If data communications is being carried out by the modem For registration No function 7937 to 7977 Initializati icati j E uA For registration No 801AH Initialization Data User s Manual Application Section 3 4 3 7978 to 8018 ik i ae 1F2An to 1F52h For registration No 801BH Connection Data User s Manual Application Section 8019 to 8059 ate 4 1F53H o F7Bu For registration No 801CH st 8060 to 8100 A 1F7CH s FA4H For registration No 801DH 8101 to 8141 y 1FA5H ep For registration No 801EH 8142 to 1FCEn to a For registration No 801FH 8183 to 8191 GERAD arr y o e One System area oo ee So 8192 System Flash ROM write allow prohibit designation Section RW Not allowed 2000H designation 0 Write prohibited 1 Write allowed N 8 4 12 Callback fu
186. ata count gt M10 X101E H H HHZ RENFR g1 Kl Ki HO H600 DO Kl M100 M101 PLS M101 lt SE received data gt M11 X101E H H HHL REWFR U1 KI KI HO H601 D1 DO M102 M103 H SET M103 SET SET error detection gt lt When receive error detected Read of data reception result gt M2 XI0E H HH 7 Rewer ui KA KI HO H258 D8000 KI M104 mo5 1 SET mo5 f SET I HSET Pee al 1 L X1003 x1004 1 RST M10 M100 M11 M200 M102 M300 M201 M301 M12 MELSEC Q Changes the receive read request signal into pulses Reads the received data count from the communication area of the buffer memory to D1 Received data acquisition command Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Reads data as many as the received data count from the communication area of the buffer memory to D1 Normal reception completion Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns ON the receive read completion signal I Abnormal reception completion Reception result acquisition command Reads the data reception result of the buffer memory to D8000 Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns ON the receive read completion signal Turns OFF the receive read completion signal When data reception is executed by the bidirectional protocol the area enclosed by the dotted line shown above must be removed Set the int
187. ating environment of the personal computer where the GX Configurator SC is used is explained Peripheral devices Installation Add in destination Add in to GX Developer Version 4 English version or later Computer main unit Personal computer on which Windows operates Refer to the following table Used operating system and performance required for Required memory personal computer Hard disk For installation 65 MB or more free space 20 MB or more Display ssid 800 x 600 dot or more resolution 3 Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System English version Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 English version Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version 1 Install the GX Configurator SC in GX Developer Version 4 or higher in the same language GX Developer English version and GX Configurator SC Japanese version cannot be used in combination and GX Developer Japanese version and GX Configurator SC English version cannot be used in configuration x2 GX Configurator SC cannot be used as an add in with GX Developer Version 3 or earlier versions 3 Setting fonts Size of Windows for L
188. ation must be performed by a registration operation using GX Configurator SC or by executing the CSET instruction for the sequence program 1 Initial settings for communication using the MC protocol Setting the unit of data length sent by the on demand function Word byte units designation addresses 150 96H 310 136H e Setting the buffer memory used by the on demand function Buffer memory head address designation addresses 160 A0u 320 140n Data length designation addresses 161 A1H 321 141H 2 Initial settings for communication using the non procedure bidirectional protocols e Setting the unit of data length to be sent and received Word byte units designation addresses 150 96H 310 136n Setting the transmission area Transmission buffer memory head address designation addresses 162 A21 322 142h Transmission buffer memory length designation addresses 163 A34 323 143h Setting the reception area Receive buffer memory head address designation addresses 166 A6uH 326 146H Receive buffer memory length designation addresses 167 A7H 327 147H For more details on the registration operation by GX Configurator SC see the explanation of the system settings of the corresponding protocol in Sections 8 4 5 to 8 4 8 For more details on the CSET instruction see Section 16 4 of the User s Manual Application 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address a Applicable Registration 3 ea Initial Ref
189. auto refresh for required information only 2 Writing auto refresh settings to QCPU and saving them in a file a Writing auto refresh settings to QCPU Use online PLC write function of GX Configurator SC or GX Developer b Saving ina file Use the file storage function shown in the file items in the parameter module selection screen shown in Section 8 3 2 of GX Configurator SC 1 The auto refresh settings are stored in the intelligent function module parameter After the intelligent function module parameters have been written to the CPU module it enables the auto refresh setting by turning the power OFF gt ON or by resetting the CPU module 2 The auto refresh settings cannot be changed from the sequence program However it is possible to add a process similar to auto refresh by using the FROM TO command of the sequence program 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 7 Individual Station Test After installing the Q series C24 to the base unit of QCPU perform an individual station test first to check the switch setting see Section 4 5 2 and operation of the Q series C24 1 When a problem occurs during data communication with an external device perform an individual station test as described in this section to check whether or not there is any problem in the operation of the Q series C24 In order to avoid problems set the PLC CPU to STOP status during the individual station test Test both
190. b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Buffer memory address 2031 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Ne z 3 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH1 CH1 CH1 ere twos including b2 and b6 f I Communication protocol number Station number of the Q series on CH side is outside the range C24 is outside the range Communication rate on CH side Linked operation setting error is outside the range see Section 4 5 2 2 Mode switching request was 1 Error 0 Normal issued when the setting modification allow prohibit was set to prohibit 3 Communication protocol storage area address 250H and 260n b15 to bO Buffer memory address 2504 Oto 8 Information on the CH1 side 2604 0to7 Information on the CH2 side 4 Transmission setting status storage area address 251H and 261h b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Buffer memory address 251H 0 0 O O 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH1 side 261H O O O O 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Information on the CH2 side Communication rate setting LL Setting modification t Operation setting allow prohibit Data bit setting 10 11 10 11 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Example of a program that reads from the setting status storage area The following
191. be initialized by an off request to the LED off request area address 1h of the buffer memory By using output signals YE to YF the error codes stored in the above buffer memory can further be initialized 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q b Initializing communication error information by writing Communication error information can be initialized by writing 1 to the corresponding bit in the buffer memory addresses OH to 1H The displayed LEDs and communication error information may be turned on off in the following cases e NEU to NAK turn on off depending on the status e C N to SIO turn on when errors occur and keep the ON status even after the operation returns to normal 1 LED and communications error information initialization request area address OH to 1h The contents of the error information corresponding to each bit in this request area are the same as those for the LED ON communication error status storage area address 201H to 202k For more details see Section 10 1 1 1 The following describes the correspondence between the LED OFF request areas and the LED ON status storage areas e Communication error clear request area for CH1 and to turn LED off address 0H LED ON status and communication error status area on CH1 side address 201 e Communication error clear request area for CH2 and to turn LED off address 1H gt LED ON status and communication error status area on CH2 side address 202h
192. bidirectional protocol is received the received data will be disregarded 10 28 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 1 Troubleshooting when RUN LED is turned OFF Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure A transmission setting Set the switch by GX Developer correctly and switch is set to an after writing to the CPU reset the CPU unusable position e Remove the cause of the CPU error and reset the CPU e During the Q series C24 and external device loopback test the minimum parameters file must be written to the CPU beforehand e Calculate the 5 V current drain of each installed module If the current capacity is insufficient PLC CPU error The Q series C24 RUN LED turned off check power module selection Power module 5 V a Note current capacity is ee Whether or not the current capacity is insufficient insufficient can be checked by disconnecting the expansion base and installing only the Q series C24 to the basic base Extraneous noise e Check if the shield wire is 2 point ground caused the Q series When ground is used with other devices C24 to abnormal ground the Q series C24 independently operation 10 29 10 29 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 2 Troubleshooting when RD LED does not blink even though an external device is transmitting a message Symptom e RD does not blink even through an external device is transmitting a message 10 30
193. cated instruction Data communication FROM i A instruction 1 Use the input Use the input output signalasa X output signal as contact a contact It should be output Y to an output signal 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 3 It is possible to access the control PLC and non control PLCs using the MC protocol and through GX Developer from the external device In addition data communication with the control PLC of the Q series C24 can be performed using the non procedure bidirectional protocol Example When communicating with the MC protocol External Non control PLC Control PLC Q series C24 device nee Command message Communication using the 3 MC protocol read write transmitted using a P QnA compatible 4C i o aa e a bare oe 03EQn to 03E3H _Q3FFh Specify the QCPU tobe frame SS accessed by the I O number of the requested module 1 Response message Device memory etc gt Data i Device memory etc i Local TES Peripheral device aa i If the MC protocol GX Developer is used to access other stations it is possible to access the control PLC and non control PLCs of the station to be accessed even if the relay station and the accessed station are multiple CPU systems Example It is possible to access other stations regardless of whether the control PLC of the module to be routed
194. cation and the Reference Manual a The remote password check function of the Q series C24 prevents users at a remote location to access QCPUs illegally using the modem function of the Q series C24 The remote password is checked in the following forms of data communication e Communication using the MC protocol The remote password check is not carried out in data communication using the non procedure bidirectional protocols e Access to the PLC through GX Developer The remote password function is one of the QCPU functions and used for preventing illegal access to the QCPU by other users Use GX Developer to set a remote password for the QCPU in order to activate the remote password function of the QCPU b If the Q series C24 is specified in the parameters of a QCPU as being subject to the remote password check the remote password can be unlocked canceled using either one of the methods below to allow data communication from the external device It is necessary to connect a line to the modem first e When communicating using the MC protocol Use the dedicated command for communication using the MC protocol to unlock the remote password from the external device e When accessing the PLC through GX Developer Unlock the remote password using GX Developer at the start of online operation The remote password is automatically locked by disconnecting the line to the modem Set the parameters to make the Q series C24 as a subject to
195. causes of errors that may occur during data reception Cause of reception error Reference section A transmission error occurred because of noise SE a A timeout occurred for the no reception monitoring time timer 0 Section 6 1 ae User s Manual A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time timer 2 Section 6 2 Application Data that could not be converted with the ASCII BIN conversion was detected Chapter 13 Received the data length that was too long to store in the receiving area Section 7 1 2 1 Confirmation using the sequence program a Detecting the occurrence of a reception error 1 The single XE XF is on when the ERR LED is on 2 The receive error code is confirmed and read in the buffer memory data reception result storage area address 258H 268 For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions see Chapter 10 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 10 1 2 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write a 1 to the LED OFF request area addresses 0H 1H in the buffer memory 2 To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code turn ON the ERR LED OFF request output signal YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side Read command MI YOE XOE 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 7 1 5 Receive data clear
196. ccumulated co k process based on circuit disconnection 22FFH A n allback function designation 2001H Callback denial notification accumulated count designation 2002H Data No for Callback designation 1 to 10 2101Hto 210AH m i esignation allback denial accumulated count 22F1H Auto callback connection permit accumulated count 22F2H A callback denial acc 22F3H Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel 22F4H cu cu unt of loc uto modem initialization designatio 2007H uto cal connection denial ac o Callback permit accumulated count 22F0H a 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Test Items The following accumulated count of times counter values can be cleared to 0 by the select test function Setting value storage Reference section containing Test items i buffer memory address detailed explanation Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 22FBH Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion 22FCH Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection 22FFH Callback permit accumulated count Section 3 3 of Callback denial accumulated count 22F1H User s Manual Application Auto callback connection permit accumulated count 22F2H Auto callback connection denial accumulated count 22F3H Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel 22F4H Operation procedure Step 1 Display the Modem function monitor test screen Step 2 Click the s
197. ce 1 Q series C24 Setting processing 1 i i 1 Error 1 If the dedicated instruction is abnormally completed the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See the following manuals according to the error code and check take action according to the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Program example This is an example of a program that clears reception data on the Q series C24 side It is assumed that the input output signals of the Q series C24 are X YOO to X Y1F X20 KO DO Set the execution type K4 D2 Set the request type Reception data clear D200 MO Execute the reception data clear NO M1 SET M100 Normal completion Mi SET M101 Abnomal completion MOV D1 D300 RST M100 Reset the complete flag by external command RST M101 10 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains the definitions of errors that may occur during data communication between the Q series C24 and external devices and the corrective actions 10 1 Checking the Status of the Serial Communication Module 10 1 1 Checking the LED ON status communications error status and switch setting status of the serial communication module This section explains how to check the status of communication between the Q series C24 and external devi
198. cedure protocol transmission receive function Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function Communication data monitoring function 2 Set the size of data per data transmission from the PLC CPU to the external device to be smaller than the size of the transmission data designation area in the buffer memory Transmission data designation area gt Size of data portion to be sent from the PLC CPU To transmit data whose size is larger than the transmission data designation area increase the transmission area or divide the transmission data before sending 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Transmission data arrangement The following example shows an arrangement of the transmission data to be sent to the external device when storing it in the transmission area Example When ABCDEFG123 is sent Transmission data count designation area Transmission data designation area Transmission area Q series C24 buffer memory Transmission data response message 5 00x 05x Bo A 424 41n D C 44n 43 Foi CE 464 45x 1 i G 31H 47H Receive data response message 3 1 2 33x L 83x 1 327 ACK l 06H External device Normal completion 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 3 Sequence program for data transmission A sequence program for data tr
199. ces the transmission status of the Q series C24 and the switch setting status of the Q series C24 When a communication problem occurs check the error status using one of the following procedures 1 Checking the module status and error codes in the detailed module information screen of the GX Developer diagnostic functions Startup procedure GX Developer gt Diagnostics gt System monitor gt Module s Detailed Information Module s Detailed Information r Module 4 Module Name QJ71C24N Product information 051020000000000 B 170 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base OSlot r Module Information Module access Possible 1 0 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status Input Type Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Remote password setting status Nothing r Error Display Display format HEX f DEC 1 7F68 2 7F68 3 7FB8 z 4 7F68 The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error 5 7F68 The latest error is displayed in the line as under Present Error F68 l _ _ r Error contents Disposal aa een aa oe ne Contents Framing error a Data does not match the stop bit setting A malfunction occurred in the network because the power source of the xl Disposal Match the Q series C24 and external device settings Clear the error information ac
200. col 0004H MC protocol format 4 OOFFH GX Developer connection Reference section 144 304 90H 130H Transmission specifications after switching designation Designates transmission specifications below after switching when b15 of this area is 1 ON Section Operation setting b0 0 Independent 1 Link 4 5 2 For designation of Data bit b1 0 7 bit 1 8 bit Chapter 15 mode Sei Parity bit b2 0 No 1 Yes Rw Notallowed at ee Odd even parity b3 0 Odd 1 Even Manual 145 305 Stop bit b4 0 1 bit 1 2 bit Application 91H 1311 Sum check code b5 0 No 1 Yes Write during RUN b6 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed Setting modification b7 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed Communication rate b8 to b11 50 bps to 230400 bps For system b12 to b14 All O Transmission specifications after switching 615 designation 0 Match settings in GX Developer 1 Match settings in this area RS and DTR signal status designation 0 Off 1 On RS signal b0 DTR signal b2 For system b1 b3 to b15 DTR DSR ER DR DC control designation Transmission control b0 0 DTR DSR control DC1 DC3 control b8 0 No control 146 306 Signal setting 92H 132H DC2 DC4 control b9 Section 147 307 93H 133H 0 No control 1 Controlled 8 45 For designation of DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff code designation eo eee el 94H 134H HOE Th Coe DC3 code b8 to b15 00H to FFH DC3 code DC2 DC4 code
201. communication protocol setting on the CH2 side to EH ROM RAM switch test Set the communication protocol setting on the CH1 side to the number 1 to 8 used for data communication with an external device following the test 2 Set the transmission settings for the two interfaces to match the specifications used when communicating data with an external device Procedure 2 Performing ROM RAM switch tests 1 Set the PLC CPU to STOP status 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 2 Restart the PLC CPU station or reset the CPU The test starts automatically in about one second 3 For the Q series C24 the following tests should be performed once 1 ROM check Read the ROM data and verify the sum check 2 RAM check Write data to RAM and read and check it 3 Switch check Check whether or not each switch is set within the tolerance range and the operation setting in the transmission settings is set to off 4 Linked operation setting check perform this test with the operation setting in the transmission settings of CH2 set to on Check to see that the communication protocol setting on CH1 is set to 8H and whether the communication rate setting of each channel is within the tolerance range x A linked operation setting check is performed when values are set as follows e Communication protocol setting on the CH1 side 8H e Operation setting in the transmission settings on the CH2 side bit 8 ON Procedu
202. completion D2 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the INPUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the INPUT instruction e Normal completion Off with no change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the INPUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation during execution of an INPUT instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program t i i Execution of INPUT i Completion of reception by 1 instruction J is INPUT instruction INPUT instruction 1 1 ON Completion device OFF Abnormal ON completion Status display device OFF at completion Normal completion tA One scan 9 9 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Error MELSEC Q 1 When a dedicated instruction is completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result S1 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section
203. completion device D2 or status display device at completion D2 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BIDIN instruction is completed normally and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Does not change when left off Operation during execution of a BIDIN instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program t 1 Execution of BIDIN instruction Completion of reception by J 808 instruction i i BIDIN instruction l 1 ON i Completion device OFF Status display device OFF at completion One scan 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Error MELSEC Q 1 Incase of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Program example The following example shows a program that receives any data using the bidirectional protocol and stores that data in D10 or later The input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X YOO to X Y1F x3 m MOVP MOVP WovP Eee BIDIN UO Do MO M1 m MOV BMOV D10 Ki Ko K10 D10 D2 D110 Designate the receive channel Clear the receive data count storage device to 0 Designate the a
204. confirm the status of the Q series C24 and check the relevant item in the table below Symptom Symptom description A Non Bidirec Reference section Dedicated procedure tional e RUN LED tumed of Sofo f o Setoniosi e RD does not blink even through an external device Section 10 3 2 is transmitting a message Be e An external device transmitted a message and RD LED turns on off check according to blinked but the Q series C24 did not return a O Q Section 10 3 3 Section 4 3 response message e An external device transmitted a message and RD blinked but the Q series C24 did not turn ON the Section 10 3 4 read request t ERR LEDtumson OT OT o Section 0 3 20 e The NAK was turned ON o J o Section 10 3 5 e The GIN wastumedON O Oof o Section 10 3 6 e The P S was turned ON po o Sectionto37 e The PRO wastumedON OTT Section 0 3 8 The S10 was inet N__________ _O 9 _ __Seeion 1e3 _ Communication errors occurred e The CH1 ERR or CH2 ERR wastumed ON O O o lost ve E received eo the Q series C24 or the external device is unknown Cannot communicate via modem e Cannot communicate viamodem lt communicate via modem ce on eee oon a e Does not operate in the cycle time designated in the The PLC CPU monitoring function p y 9 ction 10 3 16 i constant cycle transmission setting does not operate in the designated e Does not operate in the cycle
205. connection from the Q Series C24 callback Transmission costs after line connection from the Q Series C24 side are borne by the Q Series C24 side Chapter 3 of the User s Manual Application Addition of non reception monitoring time format in non procedure protocol This function allows messages to be received in the non reception protocol by time out in non reception monitoring time timer 0 if the received complete code and received data count have been not determined Chapter 6 of User s Manual Application Transmission control start end free area designation This function allows the designation of the available capacity of the OS area that notifies the data reception failure at the time of transmission control DTR DSR signal control and DC code control Chapter 7 of User s Manual Application Addition of changeable data to the user frame 05H OBH 11H 17H Addition of changeable data to the user frame 04H OAH E5H EBH These functions allow the following codes to be registered as the changeable data of user frames for data communication e Horizontal parity code Sum check code of two s complement number Chapter 9 of User s Manual Application Adding a reception function through the use of user frames 1 10 This function allows reception of a message consisting of the head frame and any data field when receiving data by specifying the head frame The data le
206. cording to the error information initialization request YE ZYF In addition when communicating data with the non procedure protocol execute the INPUT instruction and read and discard the unnecessary data X H Information t Stop monitor Close 10 1 10 1 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Displays e Module The following information is displayed Module name The name of the module installed I O Address The start input output signal number of the target module Implementation Position The slot position where the module is mounted Product information Product information The last character of the product information indicates the function version of the module Example If the last character is B it means that the module is of function version B e Unit access Module access Displays access permissions when the Ready signal X1E is turned on and the WDT error signal X1F is turned off e Status of I O Address Verify Displays whether or not the module for which the user set the parameters matches the module installed Remote password setting status Displays the setting status of the remote password Present Error Displays the error code of the latest error occurrence e Error Display Displays the error codes for any errors that have occurred in any of the functions being used Error details corrective action Displays the error details and corrective action for the err
207. ction Startup procedure Monitor screen gt CHO Monitoring monitor Monitor screen CH1 PLC CPU monitoring monitor Jot Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value PLC CPU monitoring function No execution Operation status Execution result 0000 Number of transmission 0 Monitoring condition arrival block No 0000 0 No block which monitoring condition consists H0001 HO00a Registration order of word bit block H1000 PLC CPU Abnormal monitoring block Cycle time units designation min Cycle time designation 5 PLC CPU monitoring function designation Do not use function 5 m Flash ROM setting Details Write to Fil Current value Monitoring module mans display Cannot execute test eed nan File read Make text file Start monitor Stop monitor Execute te Close 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor items buffer memory address detailed explanation PLC CPU monitoring funetion 2040W 21 401 2044 2144 Number of registered word blocks designation 204D 214DH Monitoring device designation 20A1H 21A1H 2051H 2052H 2151H 2152H to Head device No designation Chapter 2 of 20A1H 20A2H 21A1H 21A2 2053H 2153 Read point designation 20A3H 21A Condition agreement transmission 2054H 2154H Monitoring condition designation
208. cution gt 1 M10 X101E 1k wov KI Z REMTO U1 K1 K1 HO HOA8 D1 KI SET M100 M101 SET PLS M101 SET lt Read of receive clear status gt M21 X101E H Z REMFR J1 K1 Kl HO HOA8 DO KI M102 M103 PLS M103 M15 M16 M10 D1 M100 M17 M20 M21 M200 M102 M22 MELSEC Q Lt Changes the receive clear command into pulses n Sets the receive clear acceptance flag Lo Receive clear processing execution command Lt Sets the clear request Transfers the setting value to the J receive data clear request area of the buffer memory Lt Sets the receive clearing flag F Sets the completion check flag Receive clear processing execution status acquisition command Lo Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Lo Reads data of the receive data clear request area of the buffer memory to DO Receive clear processing execution status judgment command a Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Lo Resets the receive clear acceptance flag Lo Resets the receive clearing flag F Resets the completion check flag Sets the communication J disable flag 1 amp 1 J Receive clear processing execution status acquisition command J Timer start Resets the communication disable flag X Outputs the communication enable flag x1 When using the Q series C24 of function version A add the areas enclosed by the dotte
209. cution of the Input instruction to the End processing of the sequence scan at the completion of the Input instruction execution ms Sr Scan time Dr Number of bytes of reception data T2 QU71C24N R2 R4 T2 7 0 QJ71C24 R2 T2 14 91 x1 This stands for the time range of processing Tp Start of the Input Start of the End processing of instruction execution N Tp the scan at the completion of the Input instruction execution Step 0 END i j Ta Sequence program i Reception data read request X3 Input instruction Input instruction complete device DX3 Q series C24 side Reception data External device side Calculation example Estimate the time required to process the Input instruction when receiving 100 bytes of data using the non procedure protocol with the QU71C24N Unit ms e Scan time 10 ms 10 0 09 X 100 7 0 26 00 ms x2 When only using CH1 of the Q series C24 and when processing only 30 bytes of data received the time until the reception data read request X3 comes on is displayed after the Q series C24 receives data from the network App 15 App 15 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Processing time of dedicated instructions The following table shows the operation processing time rough standard of each dedicated instruction The operation processing time differs slightly depending on the system configuration and communication p
210. d in order to register a user frame to the flash ROM from an external device using the MC protocol Setting changes in interfaces on the CH1 and CH2 sides should both be set to Allowed in order to register the system setting values and user frames to the flash ROM from the PLC CPU 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q b Communication rate setting CH1 side switch 1 upper level CH2 side switch 3 upper level 1 2 3 Communication rate Remarks Unit bps b15 to b8 Unit bps b15 to b8 00H 07H Try lowering the communication 0 rate when data cannot be 600 BH 1200 38400 communicated normally with an 2400 03H 57600 OAH external device due to overrun 051 1 Transmission speed of 230 400 bps is available for only CH1 of the QJ71C24N R2 R4 x2 When connecting external devices to both of two interfaces the total of the communication speed should be 115 200bps or less 230 400 bps or less if using QU71C24N R2 R4 When connecting an external device to either of two interfaces the maximum of 115 200 bps is available for the interface the maximum of 230 400 bps if using QJ71C24N R2 R4 In this case set 300 bps for the other interface to which no external device is connected x3 Set OOH to the interface for which GX Developer connection is set in the communication protocol setting Serial communication module will operate at the communication speed set on the GX Developer c Commu
211. d lines to the sequence program Make communication when M19 is ON App 42 App 42 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 7 When sending data using user frames The following program example sends data by the user frames using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to Section 11 4 of the User s Manual Application for the transmission using the user frames 1 Program conditions The following program sends data using the user frames from the CH1 side when the transmission signal X1026 turns ON a Devices used TIANSMISSION COMMANA serani e ee n X1026 e Transmission command pulse Signal cceeeeeeeeeeeeees M10 e Transmission user frame designation command M11 e Transmission result acquisition Command sssseeeseeesese M12 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 105 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO INSTUCTION nn eh tein cen a aa M200 to 203 e Normal abnormal completion of transmission cceee M300 M301 Transmission data COUN nocrop DO Transmission data gpr a a a a D1 D2 e CR LF output designatiOn ccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees D5 e Output head pointer designation ccccseeseeseeseeseeeteeees D6 Output count AeSIQNAtiON ccceeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteaees D7 e Output frame No designation cceceeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeteteeees D8 to D12 Data transmission reSUlt cece
212. dem 6 Notification in progress R Not allowed Chapter 3 547 function Number of data registration for connection of User s 223h 0 No registration 1 or more Number of registration Manual Data registration status for connection Application for confirmation of registration No 548 to 549 0 No registration 1 Registered 224H to 2251 x Bit corresponding to registration No is O ON 1 OFF Registration No BB8H 3000 Address 224H b0 to Registration No BD5x 3029 Address 225H b13 Number of data registration for initialization 0 No registration 1 or more Number of registrations 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address a Applicable Registration 3 ea Initial Reference Decimal Hex Application Name valus protocol allowed not Section mc Non Bi allowed Data registration status for initialization For confirmation for confirmation of registration No l 551 to 552 bi mod m 0 No registration 1 Registered 227H to 228H function Bit corresponding to registration No is 0 ON 1 OFF Registration No 9C4H 2500 Address 227H b0 to Registration No 9E1H 2529 Address 228H b13 553 Number of notification execution 229H 0 Not executed 1 or more Number of executions Section Notification execution data No 8 6 2 554 0 Notification not executed 22An BB8 or more Notification executed Not allowed Chapter 3 notification execution No of User s 7 eer Ke an For confirmation System area use prohibited Manual
213. designation Last frame No designation 2nd 0 No designation Other than 0 Designated 1 Requested Other than 0 Designated Other than 0 Designated Other than 0 Designated 1 Half duplex communication User frame use enable disable designation 0 Do not use 1 Use 2 Data communication possible Q series C24 set First frame No designation 1st 1st to 4th OH No designation Last frame No designation 1st to 4th OH No designation 1H or more Last frame No 0 No transmission designation 1 or more Output frame No 1H or more Head frame No MELSEC Q Applicable Registration pp gistratio Reference protocol allowed not section MC Non Bi allowed Chapter 7 Section 8 4 5 Section Allowed One Chapter 8 of User s Manual Application Section 8 4 5 Allowed Chapter 6 of User s Manual Application Section 8 4 6 Reference Manual Allowed Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Section 8 4 5 Section 8 4 7 Section 8 7 Not allowed Chapters 9 and 10 of User s Manual Application Section 8 4 6 RW 0 Allowed Section 8 4 7 Chapters 9 and 11 of User s Manual Application 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Applicable 3 ee Initial Decimal Hex Application Name valli protocol Mc Non Bi 182 B6H 342 User frame being 156H transmitted 183 343 B7u 1574 B8x 158H For user frame being transmitted designation For designation of transmission
214. dicated instruction is completed Dedicated instructions for the Q series C24 are executed based on the current setting values stored in the buffer memory when the module is started When it is necessary to change a setting value change the value by GX Configurator SC before starting up the module Alternatively a setting value can be changed via the sequence program using a CSET instruction before starting up the PLC CPU See the User s Manual Application Area of buffer memory assigned as applicable functions for dedicated instructions Setting values for data communication e Word byte units designation e Receive complete code e Received data count etc 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 9 2 ONDEMAND Instruction The ONDEAMAND instruction transmission data using the on demand function of the MC protocol Applicable device MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10_ Special module Direct JO O UO GD Internal device System user File register Index register Zn Constant Others Instruction Executing code condition Command ONDEMAND G ONDEMAND Un S1 S2 D Command ONDEMAND GP ONDEMAND Un S1 S2 D Description Start I O signal of the module Un x uer _ emet bit 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit User Head number of the devices in which control data is stored en system Device name Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored User
215. difications Allowed Prohibited 1 Operation setting e This sets whether to use each of the two Q series C24 interfaces for independent data communication or to use the two for linked data communication e The setting and data flow for linked operation is explained in 2 2 Data bit setting e This sets the bit length for one character in data communicated with an external device according to the specifications of the external device When data communication is performed using format 5 of the MC protocol for binary code communication it is necessary to set it to 8 bits when processing the sum check code with the bidirectional protocol e If 7 bits are set the data is communicated by ignoring the most significant bit 8th bit 3 Parity bit setting e This sets whether or not a parity bit vertical parity is added for one byte of transmission receive data according to the specifications of the external device e The addition of the parity bit to the transmission data and the checking of the parity bit of receive data are performed by the Q series C24 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION 4 MELSEC Q Even odd parity setting This sets whether the parity bit vertical parity should be odd parity or even parity when adding the parity bit vertical parity according to the specifications of the external device Stop bit setting This sets the stop bit length for one character in data communicated with an external dev
216. e Product Configuration The following lists the product configuration of the Q series serial communication modules Model Item name Quantit QJ71C24N serial communication module or QU71C24 serial communication module Terminal resistor 3309 1 4W for RS 422 communication Terminal resistor 110 1 2W _ for RS 485 communication QJ71C24N R2 or QJ71C24N R2 serial communication module or QJ71C24 R2 serial communication module QJ71C24N or QU71024 QJ71C24N R 4 serial communication module RS 422 485 plug in connector socket block Terminal resistor 330 1 4W_ for RS 422 communication Terminal resistor 1109 1 2W _ for RS 485 communication Plate terminal for connecting a braided shield cable GX Configurator SC Version 2 1 license product CD ROM SW2D5C QSCU EA GX Configurator SC Version 2 Multi 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 OVERVIEW This manual describes the specifications for the QU71C24N QU71C24N R2 QJ71C24N R4 QU71C24 QU71C24 R2 serial communication module hereinafter referred to as Q series C24 as well as the procedures prior to starting the operation maintenance inspection data communication methods for use with external devices and troubleshooting When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems 1 1 Overview of the Serial Communication Module The Q
217. e Section 2 1 Section 3 1 Table Section 4 4 2 1 d 4 9 2 Section 8 3 2 POINT Section 10 2 1 7164H 7E70H Appendix 3 1 POINT 8 4 2 8 4 9 Table 8 6 3 Table 8 6 7 Table Section 10 1 2 b 10 3 Table Appendix 1 1 2 1 6 7 9 Addition Section 2 6 Section 8 4 4 8 6 2 Table Section 10 2 1 716FH 7FEFx 10 3 14 Appendix 3 Jun 2001 SH NA 080006 C Put Windows base software product together from Mitsubishi Programmable Logic Controller MELSEC Series to Mitsubishi integrated FA Software MELSOFT Series Standardize the name from software package GPP function to Product name GX Developer Standardize the name from utility package QSCU to Product name GX Congifurator SC Correction Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Product Configuration Program Examples Section 6 1 4 6 2 3 Section 7 2 3 Section 9 3 9 5 Appendix 8 Section 1 2 1 d 1 2 4 b Diagram 1 2 8 b 1 3 Section 2 1 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 7 Section 3 1 Table 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 2 3 4 Table 3 9 Section 4 3 4 5 2 Section 5 1 5 3 5 2 Section 6 1 4 Section 8 2 8 3 2 Feb 2002 SH NA 080006 D Addition About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 Section 2 1 2 7 Section 4 5 2 Section 8 2 1 8 2 2 Section 10 2 1 Appendix 1 1 6 Oct 2002 SH NA 080006 E Addition The Manual s Use and Structure About The
218. e Clear the storage area of the The number of remote password mismatch exceeded Accumulated count of unlock process Section 3 3 3 the value designated at the address 200D abnormal completion address 22FCx ay to 0 A lear th r area of the callback Callback denial exceeded the value designated at the e ea meses denial accumulated count address Section 3 3 4 address 20024 22F 1x to 0 x1 Take corrective action in the following procedure 1 Check whether the Q series C24 power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit 2 Check whether the operating environment of the Q series C24 is within the general specifications range of the CPU module 3 Check whether the power supply capacity is sufficient or not 4 Check whether the hardware of the Q series C24 CPU module and base unit are normal according to the manuals of the corresponding modules If any module is faulty please contact your local Mitsubishi service center or representative for repair 5 If the problem cannot be solved through the above steps please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 10 26 10 26 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 Troubleshooting by Symptom This following shows troubleshooting of trouble generated during communications between the Q series C24 and external device according to the trouble symptom When trouble occurs first
219. e Hex Ex 02024 03 in case of registering a 5 bytes of data STX 02H C24 E TX 03H User frame 1140368 2 H03e3 3 H03ea AH03eb 5 H03ec B HO3ed 7HOBee TITER Details The various setting values to be registered in the Q series C24 s flash ROM can be saved in a file of the PC via offline operation Use online operation to write system setting values to the Q series e See Sections 8 4 1 through 8 4 10 8 6 8 6 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 1 When using online operation 2 When setting auto refresh Auto refresh Select Online Monitor test from the menu bar Enter Start O No then select Module type and Module model name t module EJ Auto refresh setting AEE Select monitor test module Module information Start 1 0 No Module type Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 0000 erial Communications Module 7 Module model name QU71C24 N N A Module model name QJ7IC24 N N RA zi Module side Module side PLC side Setting tem Buffer size Transfer Transfer Device mor direction ay word count Module implementation status Flash ROM access register read delete T 1 gt result Start 170 No Module model name CH1 LED ON status communications error T 7 gt O000 0J71C24 N N R4 status CH2 LED ON status communicatio
220. e PLC CPU when the watchdog timer error signal is turned on reset the power and the CPU module x6 QJ71C24N R4 cannot be used Related to modem function signal e X10 to X16 For system e Y10 to Y16 Use prohibited IMPORTANT 1 Of the input output signals to the PLC CPU the signals marked with Use prohibited must not be output ON If any of the Use prohibited signals is output the PLC system may malfunction 2 When the modem function is not used or the QU71C24N R4 is used X10 to X16 are used for the system and Y10 to Y16 cannot be used 1 The input output signals shown in this section are the signals used when a QnA series serial communication module program is utilized for the Q series C24 see Section 2 in appendix In the QCPU the on off of input output signals to intelligent function modules is executed with a dedicated instruction It is not necessary to turn the signals on off by the sequence program except for the input output signals shown in the programming of each function reference page When a program for a QnA series serial communication module is also utilized for the Q series C24 it is recommended to replace the instructions with the dedicated instructions shown on the corresponding function reference page of each manual for the Q series C24 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 9 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory This section describes the buffer memory 1 Configuration
221. e action procedure e Data does not match the e Check the Q series C24 and external device parity bit setting data format and match the settings e Sum check codes do not Check if the sum check code transmitted from the external device is correct Recalculate e When CH1 and CH2 are e When using CH1 and CH2 independently check used in the linked mode thatthe Q series C24 is not in the linked mode e Communication error the cable is not e When using CH1 and CH2 in the linked mode signal P S turned on connected to one of the also connect the cable to both of the interfaces interface If the cable is not connected to one of the interfaces when CH1 and CH2 are used in the linked mode noise may enter and the data may be destroyed and Data cannot be decoded or Communications error cause 10 34 10 34 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 8 Troubleshooting when communication error PRO generates Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure e Communications were e Check the Q series C24 communication performed with a control protocol setting and the message from the procedure different from i devi the series C24 external device and match the settings or communication protocol correct the message and restart data setting communications e Some of the data are different from the control procedure does not exist The device No designation is not the character count correspond
222. e connector The Q series C24 uses the following type of RS 232 interface connector 9 pin D sub female screw fixing type Use one of the following as a connector shell for the connection cable of the Q series C24 side e 3M Plug model 8209 6009 Shell model 3702 2209 M2 6 e Tyco Electronics AMP K K Plug model 747904 2 Shell model 747515 or 174469 2 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Confirmation of RS 232 control signal status The control signal status of DTR DSR RS and CD can be confirmed during data communication by the RS 232 control signal status storage area address 254 264n of the GX Configurator SC or Q series C24 buffer memory Buffer memory address Bit position CH1 side CH2 side 0 ee SS E ea ae eae 9 e M O E E ao 1 System area for QJ71C24 R2 2 Designation of RS and DTR signal status When the Q series it turned on or off the on and off states of the RS and DTR signals can be designated when the buffer memory of the RS and DTR signal status designation area address 92H 132H for the corresponding bit is turned on or off by the RS signal or DTR signal 1 2 x3 b15 b3 b2 b1 bO Buffer memory address 924 132n Default 0005 eee EZ 1 0N 0 OFF x1 The RS signal is controlled by the Q series C24 in the following cases Ignore setting contents e When data is communicated with half duplex communication e When communication time and the RS and CS signals are controlled by
223. e first data is fixed according to the frame and format the user uses e When transferring data using user frames with non procedure protocol or bidirectional protocol the first data is selected according to the user frame that the user registers to the Q series C24 3 SPECIFICATIONS 2 RS 422 485 interface operation 1 RS 422 485 interface construction The following illustration shows the construction of the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface driver send receiver receive 2 RS 422 485 interface operation MELSEC Q 1 Output control input also called send gate of the driver send section of the illustration at the left determines whether or not data from SDA SDB is output to the outside When the Output control input in the illustration above is ON the interface enters the low impedance state state in which data can be sent When the Output control input is OFF the interface enters the high impedance state state in which data cannot be sent 3 Timing to start sending and to complete the transmission processing for the Q series C24 e Timing to start sending During data transmission the Q series C24 outputs the actual data after sending a mark for 2 characters or longer after the high impedance set by the operations described in 1 and 2 above is reset e Transmission processing completion timing The following times are necessary as H W gate OFF time from the time that data tran
224. e in the serial communication modules for QnA series Appendix 2 2 1 Using programs designed for the QC24 N The data communication between the QnACPU and external devices as well as other QnACPU which has been performed by QC24 N can also be performed by the Q series C24 The following explains how to use programs designed for QC24 N during data communication using the Q series C24 1 The communication programs directed to the QC24 N on the external device side and the communication programs on the QnACPU self station side to which the QC24 N is mounted can be used for the Q series C24 However note the following points e There is no function that allows data communication with other station s PLC CPUs by a data link instruction Delete the part of data communication program by data link instructions e When using a new function create a new program 2 Make sure to check operation when using communication programs for QC24 N on the external device side and the QnACPU self station side 3 The notes during data communication by RS 422 485 interface also apply to the Q series C24 e Take measures against data error reception on the external device side see Section 3 3 3 e Operation of RS 422 485 interface on the PLC side App 8 App 8 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 2 2 Installing on existing systems The following explains the Installation of the Q series C24 on an existing system 1 Installing on
225. e module fixing tab into the fixing hole in the base unit until it stops Then securely mount the module with the fixing hole as a supporting point If the module is not installed properly it may cause the module to malfunction fail or fall off Secure the module with screws especially when it is used in an environment where constant vibrations may occur e Tighten the screws within the range of specified torque If the screws are loose it may cause the module to fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damage to the screw and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction e Switch all phases of the external power supply off when mounting or removing the module Not doing so may cause damage to the module e Do not directly touch the conductive area or electronic components of the module Doing so may cause malfunction or failure in the module Wiring Instructions A CAUTION e When turning on the power and operating the module after installation and wiring are completed always attach the terminal cover that comes with the product There is a risk of electric shock if the terminal cover is not attached e Perform correct pressure displacement crimp contact or soldering for external wire connections using the tools specified by the manufactures Incorrect connection may cause short circuits fire or malfunction e Attach connectors to the module securely
226. e processing time The range of devices that can be accessed differs depending on the frame used in data communications 2 Use Q00J Q00 Q01CPU function version B or later When using the function version 8 or later of the GX Developer is required 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 5 For Use at MELSECNET H Remote I O Station This section describes the use of the Q series C24 at a MELSECNET H remote I O station It is not necessary to read this section if the Q series C24 is used with the QCPU 1 System configuration Example Remote master station Remote I O station External device MELSECNET H Remote I O network QJ72 LP25 25 Remote I O station 2 Available functions The following table indicates the functions that can be used when the Q series C24 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station Function Availabilit Communications using the MC protocol PLC CPU monitoring PLC CPU monitoring function O Communications using non procedure protocol Data reception by interrupt program PLC CPU monitoring PLC CPU monitoring function Communications using the bidirectional protocol Data reception by interrupt program Communications using dedicated instructions Communications via public line etc modem function Remote password check DC code control including Xon Xoff control Control DTR DSR ER DR control Communications protocol switchin
227. e selection menus for system setting registration are displayed by scrolling on the Monitor screen during online operation The selection buttons pertaining to flash ROM registration are displayed in blue on the screen 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Setting Items The following table shows the selection menus for system setting registration to be displayed User frame registration Section 8 4 1 Data for modem initialization registration Section 8 4 2 Data for modem connection registration Section 8 4 3 Modem function system setting Section 8 4 4 Canes new oning at R ration Transmission control and others system setting Section 8 4 5 operatio MC protocol system settin Section 8 4 6 5 y g ec an Can be used via offline Non procedure system setting Section 8 4 7 operation PLC CPU monitoring system setting Section 8 4 9 Can be used only via online operation 1 The User s Manual Basic and GX Configurator SC s Help function provide the code list Use this list as a reference 2 The values set in the respective setting screens explained in Section 8 4 can be written to the Q series C24 module via online operation only or saved to a file 3 Perform the following operations in advance to enable the registration of setting values in the flash ROM a Switch setting using the GX Developer see Section 4 5 2 Set Setting change under Transmission settings to Enable for both the CH1 and CH2
228. e transmit message and restart data communications Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications 10 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hexa decimal Error Contents 7F244 e The length of the received data exceeds the receive Data length error 3 area size e Another command was received before an unlock processing while the remote password is registered e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error 7F264 Command error 7F30n e The Q series C24 and an external device started transmitting simultaneously Simultaneous transmission error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e No reception watchdog timer timer 0 time out occurred Time out error e Response watchdog timer timer 1 time out occurred e Transmit watchdog timer timer 2 time out occurred e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e The Q series C24 received the next data before it Overrun error completed receive processing of the previous data e Data does not match the stop bit setting e A malfunction occurred in the network because the 7 power source of the partner station was on or off Framing error p e Noise occurs in the network e When the multidrop was connected data was transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices 10 20 7F32H 7F401 7F41H 7F424 7F50n 7F67H 7F68H MELSEC Q Bidire ctional Corrective action Suinehe k error e
229. e transparentcods o I Specification of Transmission transparent ist 3 CL Multiple specification of Transmission transparent 2ndto 10th CO x Registration of user frame for data communication Registration of changeable data added 054 0B 114 and 17 o x Registration of changeable data addedO4uandoAy CT Cx CX x Registration of changeable data added E5y and EB A Communication via public network etc modem function A Automatic initialization of modem ee aia Remotepasswordcheck x yams i BoE E oe troi DC code control including Xon Xoff control o Remake ransmission contro DTR DSR ER DR control o olo l poao aaeeea IIIa Switch to GX Developer connectonmode CT x CY x Independent linked operation of each interface Oo Support for 230400 bps a Al Data transmission reception at low speed transmission speed 50 bps Or Control of RS and DTR signal states O x x Data communication monitoring time ei I Non procedure and non reception monitoring time format designation 25 I pay ee Transmission control start end free area designation Communication data monitoring function Support for multiple CPU system Communication with non control CPU using the MC protocol ow emir Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame ASCII code Formats 1 to 4 emma Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame binary code lFomas o o x Multiple CPU setting using GX Developer V O as
230. e used for routing controlled by PLC No 2 The modules used for the routing are MELSECNET H network modules x1 When accessing other stations a module used for routing can access the following modules e MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network modules Q series C24 e Ethernet interface modules 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 4 For Use with Q00J Q00 Q01CPU This section describes the use of the Q series C24 with the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU 1 Available functions The following table indicates the functions that can be used when the Q series C24 is mounted in the Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Function Availabilit Communications using the MC protocol gt 1 Communications using non procedure protocol Data reception by interrupt program Communications using the bidirectional protocol Communications using dedicated instructions Communications via public line etc modem function Remote password check Transmission DC code control including Xon Xoff control ge Control DTR DSR ER DR control Communications protocol switching Independent linked operation of each interface Initial setting and monitoring testing of setting values by the utility package Connecting the GX Developer and GOT Available x Not available 1 Communications are according to the MC protocol See the Reference Manual concerning the number of devices that can be accessed and th
231. e using either reception via receive complete code or reception via received data count method the reception data read request signal X3 XA turns ON 2 Control data is stored in the device designated with the INPUT instruction 3 When the INPUT instruction is executed receive data is read from the reception area of the buffer memory 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 Data reception by receive complete code for variable length reception a This method is used to send data by adding the receive complete code set in the Q series C24 at the complete of the message to be sent from the external device When the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code data preset in GX Configurator SC by the user it sends a receive data read request to the sequence program The read request from the Q series C24 allows the sequence program to read the receive data up to the receive complete code received from the external device The receive complete code can be changed to match the specifications of the external device An arbitrary 1 character 1 byte code within the 00H to FFH range can be designated The Q series C24 issues a receive data read request to the PLC CPU as follows according to the set value of the receive end code 1 When receive complete code not changed Default value ODOAn CR LF is added to the end of the message and sent from the external device e If LF is received
232. e version information of the intelligent function module utility Product information 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 1 Saving the intelligent function module parameter files Since files cannot be saved using the GX Developer project save operation save the files on the module selection screen for parameter setting described above Reading from and writing to PLC operations for the intelligent function module parameters using GX Developer a After the intelligent function module parameters are saved in a file they can be read from and written into the PLC Set the target PLC using the GX Developer Online Transfer setup Only use the control PLC for the Q series C24 to write the intelligent function module parameters for a multiple CPU system to the PLC Use the GX Developer for PLC reading or PLC writing the intelligent function module parameters at the remote I O station GX Configurator SC can not be used Checking for the required utility The head I O is displayed in the Intelligent function module utility setting screen but a x may be displayed for the model name This means that either the required utility is not installed or that the utility cannot be started from the GX Developer Check for the required utility in Tools Intelligent function utility Utility list in GX Developer and set it 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 3 3 Performing common utility opera
233. eaes 3 3 3 2 2 RS 232 cable specification cceccecceseseeceeceeeeseeeeceeceeeeaecaeceeeeaesaecaeceeeeaeeaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaeeaeseeeeseaeeaes 3 5 3 3 RS 422 485 Interface Specifications ccccceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseceeceeeeaecaeceeseesaecaeseeseaeeaesaeseeeeaeeeeseseaeeateas 3 6 3 3 1 RS 422 485 terminal block specifications 0 eee eeeecceeeeeeeeeeceeeeaecaeeeeeeeeeaesaeceeseaesaesaeeeesaesaeseeeeateate 3 6 3 3 2 RS 422 485 cable specifications eecceccecceseeeeceeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaecaecaeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaeseeseeseaesaeseeeeaetaees 3 7 3 3 3 Precautions when transferring data using RS 422 485 circuit esessssesessesesresreesrsresrsrsrnerernns 3 8 3 4 Serial Communication Module Function LiSt ccccccceceeceeseeeeceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeeeaesaeeeseaeeaes 3 11 3 5 Dedicated INStruction OSE reena aea A TA Aa ARA TAE EE AR A Tea ea TNES 3 12 3 6 Utility Package GX Configurator SC Function List eseseeseseeeeeeeeseenenernsresnsrsnnsnsrnrnsnnrnsrsnnsnsnnssnnnns 3 13 3 7 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Serial Communication MOdUIeS e ceceeeceeteeeeeeeteeetees 3 14 3 8 List of Input Output Signals for the PLC CPU ceceecceceeceeseeeeceeeeeeeeesaeceeeeeesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeeeaeeaneeeeateaes 3 15 3 9 List of Applications and Assignments of the Buffer Memory eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaneas 3 17 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OP
234. eceiving data on eae a STX Any data format ETX a O 4 i E ETX Any data format STX USB lt a _ ER se eE When sending data Itis possible to clear the current reception data without interrupting the transmission processing by using the dedicated instruction CSET S 3 Data communication using the bidirectional protocol Details are explained in Chapter 7 and the User s Manual Application a In communication between PLC CPUs and communication with an external device for which transmission receive control programming is allowed data communication is performed in a sequence of data transmission and response receipt b Error check of received data can be performed using the sum check code while the occurrence of a reception error at an external device can be checked via an ACK NAK response 4ENQ Data length Any data Scie ACK Sending completed normally Error nak Sending completed code abnormally c ASCII code data can be used for communication using the ASCII BIN conversion function QJ71024 aes data ASCII BIN p s conversion Binary a data Binary asn 5 250 gt data ere
235. eck each module and remove the cause of the error Reconnect the cable correctly Reinstall the module correctly Error occurrence in the base unit extension cable CPU module or the Q series C24 b5 to b13 Oooo o o CH2 ERR CH2 side communication error Reconnect the cable correctly CH1 ERR CH1 side communication error Examine the test Wiring connecton Procedure 5 Ending individual station loopback test 1 Perform the following procedures after checking normal completion abnormal completion of the test result Normal completion Perform operation 2 to finish the test Upon error occurrence Remove the cause of the error according to the corrective action specified in the table above and test again 2 Perform the ending procedure for individual station loopback test 1 Follow the procedure in Section 4 7 1 to perform a ROM RAM switch test 2 Perform the following procedure to end the test and start data communication with an external device e Set the switch settings on GX Developer according to the procedure specified in Section 4 5 2 e Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect the communication cable with the external device e Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed 4 29 4 29 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 8 Loopback Test A loopback test performs a communication test using the loopback test functio
236. ect transmission errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when sending data to the external device The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data transmission Cause of reception error Reference section ee rer eee User s Manual A timeout occurred for the transmission monitoring time timer 2 Section 6 3 Application Designated number of transmission data was larger than the size that could be stored in the y i Section 6 2 2 transmission area 1 Confirmation using the sequence program a Detecting a transmission error 1 The following device and input signal turn ON e OUTPUT instruction complete device 1 e ERR LED ON signal XE XF 2 The transmission error code can be checked using the OUTPUT instruction control data S1 1 Or it can be checked by reading the data transmission result storage area in the buffer memory addresses 257H 267h For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions see Chapter 10 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 10 1 2 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write a 1 to the LED OFF request area addresses 0H 1h in the buffer memory 2 To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code turn ON the ERR LED OFF request output signal YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side OUTPUT instruction Complete d
237. ected some error Processing canceled due to mode switching transmiss ion sequence initialization e The processing was canceled due to mode switching or receive data clear executed during the processing Simultaneous access error e Multiple external devices accessed a remote station on the same network at the same time 7FF8 EF System error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error H B0004 to BFFFx C0001 to e Errors detected by the Ethernet module CFFFu e Errors detected by the CC Link module F000 to FFFFs e Errors detected by the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network system 10 22 MELSEC Q Bidire ctional e A remote password processing command is not necessary when a remote password is not registered e Perform a remote password unlock processing through GX Developer Alternatively change the communication protocol setting of the corresponding CH to the MC protocol e Clear the storage area of the cumulative number of abnormal completions of unlock processing address 22FC 1 to 0 e Write CPU to the parameter and reboot after correcting the setting value for the switch e Do not use dedicated instructions simultaneously e Correct the setting value of the communication protocol e Do not execute mode switching receive data clear during any processing e Multiple external devices must not access a remote station on the same network at the same time e Take corrective
238. ection 10 1 2 NAK to NEU No 6 to 8 turn on off depending on the status SD WAIT turns on when data cannot be sent to the external device by the transmission control of the Q series C24 waiting for data transmission e When transmission cannot be started e When a transmission pause request is received during data transmission DSR signal is off reception by DC3 SD WAIT turns off when transmission becomes possible and data transmission is started resumed 10 5 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 1 2 Initializing error information of the serial communication module This section explains the ERR LED ON factors and the error code initialization clear for the Q series C24 1 ERR LED ON factors When any of the following errors occurs its error code is stored in the buffer memory corresponding to the interface CH where the error occurred and the ERR LED turns on Error code storage buffer memory Applicable protocol Address Non Bidirec Cause of error procedure tional CHi Ce protocol Switch setting error 203 Switch setting error mode switching error H Mode switching error storage area On demand execution r r 2564 2664 On demand execution result storage area Data transmission result storage area Data reception error Data reception result storage area om ikem os MC protocol transmission eer M BSI 025A 026A MC protocol transmission error code RIES PLC CPU monitoring function execution M
239. ecuted by the PLC CPU The completion flag is reset by an external instruction 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 9 4 INPUT Instruction This instruction receives data in any message format specified by the user using the non procedure protocol Applicable device MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10_ Special module Direct JO O UO GD Internal device System user File register Index register Zn Constant Others Instruction Executing code condition Command Set data Description Un Start I O signal of ne module l l T fo BIN16 bit 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit User S Head number of the devices in which control data is stored system Device name Head number of the devices in which receive data is stored a Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Set receive channel Receive channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side e Reception result by an INPUT instruction are 2 stored Reception result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error code S 2___ Receive data count Receive data count is stored Allowable number of Set the allowable number of words for received S 3 i 1 or more User receive data data that can be stored in D1 1 The command of G INPUT cannot be converted into pulse 2 G INPUT should be execu
240. eding devices via the bidirectional protocol of the module designated in Un 2 When a BIDOUT instruction is executed on a channel other BIDOUT instructions cannot be executed on that channel at the same time If an attempt is made during execution of a BIDOUT instruction to execute another BIDOUT instruction the second instruction will not be executed until the execution of the first instruction is completed 3 Whether a BIDOUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BIDOUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the BIDOUT instruction e Normal completion Off with no change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the BIDOUT instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation during execution of a BIDOUT instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program y i 7 t E Execution of BIDOUT t Completion of transmission by f instruction J BIDOUT BIDOUT instruction i ION Completion device OFF Status display device OFF 4 at completion Normal completion One scan 1 When a dedicated instruction i
241. ee App 23 Appendix 7 2 Usage Procedure of MX Component cccceceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaesaesaeeeeesaesaeeeeseneeateas App 26 Appendix 8 Example of Clear Process Program for Receive Datta ce csscceccecceseeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeneeaeeas App 30 Appendix 9 Program Examples for Using Q Series C24 at MELSECNET H Remote I O Station App 32 Appendix 9 1 System configuration and program conditions cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeteeeeaeens App 32 Appendix 9 2 When accessing buffer memory using SEQUENCE PFOGrAM eeeeeeeteeteeeneeeeeeeeeees App 34 Appendix 9 3 When sending on demand ata c eeceeceeeceeseeneeeneeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeneeeas App 35 Appendix 9 4 When receiving data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol eeeeeeeeee App 37 Appendix 9 5 When sending data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol App 39 Appendix 9 6 When clearing received data ceecceeceeseeseeneeeneceeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateeas App 41 Appendix 9 7 When sending data using user frames 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeceaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeenatenas App 43 Appendix 9 8 When performing initial setting ee ee eeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas App 46 Appendix 9 9 When registering user frame eeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeesaeeeaeenaeeeaeeeas App 48 Appendix 9 10 When reading
242. eee eeee eee eeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas D20 b Intelligent function module switch settings Refer to Section 4 5 2 Switch No Description value a 8 bits Even odd parity Od Sum check code Write during RUN Enabled lS tting modifications Enabled Communication protocol setting Non procedure protocol 0006H Station number setting Station 0 0000H App 43 App 43 APPENDIX MELSEC Q c Buffer memory settings used in this example Settin value Word byte units designation Byte units Transmission buffer memory head address designation 0400H Transmission buffer memory length designation 0200H CR LF output designation Output head pointer designation 1 Output count designation First output frame No designation 03F2H Second output frame No designation 03F3H Third output frame No designation 8001H Fourth output frame No designation 8000H Fifth output frame No designation 041BH 6912 1B00H For registration Registered data byte count designation 6913 1B01H No 8001 012s App 44 App 44 APPENDIX 2 Program example MELSEC Q The user frames No 3F2hH 3F3H 41BH and 8001H are assumed to have been registered in advance lt Transmission command gt X1026 X1000 X1001 Y1000 PLS lt Setting of transmission data gt M10 X101E K H1234 H56AB Z REMTO J1 Ki K3 M100 M101 PLS M101 J _ A i er lt Transmission user frame designation command gt M11
243. eeeeeeseeeseeeneeeseeeseeeeeeeses D2 e Number of data bytes registered eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees D3 O E TMG E E E O E A ATA D4 to 8 b Buffer memory settings used in this example adeci Setting 3 3H Frame No direction 03E8H Registration read delete result storage 10 AH App 48 APPENDIX lt Registra 2 Program example ion command gt X1028 1 f PLs lt Setting of user frame gt M10 M12 X101E K1 H3E8 K10 H3946 H3030 H3030 H4646 H3030 Z REMTO J1 Kl Kl HO H2 DO K2 M100 M101 PLS wio1 _ A et lt Registration command 2 gt M1 XIOE HH H H REWTO ui KI KI HO H5 D3 K6 Wo2 m03 SET M103 G lt Flash ROM write request gt lt Read of M12 X1018 SET x1018 WY S App registration result gt M13 X101E z REMFR J1 KI Kl HO H4 D2 K1 M104 M105 SET M105 H SET RST RST 49 M10 DO D1 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 M100 M11 M200 M102 M12 M201 Y1018 M13 M104 M202 M203 Y1018 M12 MELSEC Q Changes the registration command into pulses Sets the registration instruction Sets the frame No Sets the number of data bytes registered Sets the user frame Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory registration instruction and frame No Registration instruction 2 Abnorm
244. eference Manual Bidirectional protocol Independent operation A communication procedure for the serial communication modules and one of the data communication functions for communicating any data between the PLC CPU and an opposite device Details are explained in Chapter 7 A mode of interface operation to communicate data with external devices using a function specified in each communication protocol setting Two interfaces of serial communication modules do not interact Linked operation The operation mode of each of the two interfaces for a serial communication module that are connected to external devices and linked to one another in order to send receive data to from the external devices The two interfaces communicate data using the identical data communication function MC protocol identical format or non procedure protocol and the identical transmission specifications Linked operation using the bidirectional protocol is not allowed MELSEC communication protocol MC protocol A communication procedure for the Q series serial communication modules or the Ethernet interface modules and a name of communication method for accessing to the PLC CPU from an opposite device This is called the MC protocol in this manual There are two communication methods one uses ASCII code data and the other uses binary code data Details are explained in the Reference Manual Message send function Printer function Th
245. eive data count user designated is read Mo Mt from the receive data storage area in the buffer memory Once the INPUT instruction is executed the user designated read completion signal MO turns ON for 1 scan The reading of receive data and switching of the ON OFF status are performed by the PLC CPU T Ht Mov D2 zo E n D10 D110 KOZO M s M100 X100 e L M100 The abnormal completion flag is reset by an external command Q series C24 Address _ Buffer memory 258 Data reception result storage area For normal completion DO Interface number 1 D1 Reception result 0 6001 Receive data count storage area D2 Receive data count lt lt oe 10 ee D3 _ Allowable receive data count 10 D10 Receive data Dm Receive data x When the receive data count is larger than the allowable receive data count only the data up to the allowable receive data count will be stored and the excess data will be discarded For abnormal completion Interface number 1 Reception result other than 0 Receive data count n Allowable receive data count 10 From the buffer memory address 258n From the buffer memory address 6001 D10 Receive data 22222 to x Data received prior to an error occurrence will be Dx Receive data stored in the receive data storage device 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOC
246. el 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side e Transmission result by an OUTPUT instruction are stored Transmission result 0 Normal System Other than 0 Error code S cm Transmission oe Sn ihe i ia peng ae jii x1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 10 of the User s Manual Basic x2 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated and set the number of words when words are selected as the unit types x3 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the OUTPUT instructions e System The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the OUTPUT instructions 9 5 9 5 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function MELSEC Q 1 Data stored in the device designated in S2 and succeeding devices are sent according to the control data of the device designated in S1 and succeeding devices via the non procedure protocol of the module specified in Un QCPU Q series C24 _7 Channel to be i used is set by b15 to bo x the control data S2 0 Send 1 gt Channeli gt m 4 2 B x a Send Channel 2 7 gt 2 The following instructions cannot be executed on a channel on which an OUTPUT instruction is being executed e Other OUTPUT instructions e PRR instructions
247. elligent function module utility Other intelligent function module utilities can perform the Monitor Test operation only 5 How to change screens when two or more intelligent function module utilities are started When two or more intelligent function module utility screens cannot be displayed side by side use the task bar to change the intelligent function module utility screen so that it is displayed on top of other screens A Start E MELSOFT series GX Deve Intelligent function Module JA Intelligent function W 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 6 About the number of parameters that can be set in GX Configurator SC The number of parameters that can be set by the GX Configurator for an intelligent function module installed in the CPU module and in a remote I O station of the MELSECNET H network system is limited Intelligent function module installation object ee MELSECNET H remote VO station 512 e For example if multiple intelligent function modules are installed in a remote I O station set the GX Configurator so that the number of parameter settings of all the intelligent function modules does not exceed the maximum number of parameter settings The total number of parameter settings is calculated separately for the initial setting and for the automatic refresh setting The number of parameter settings that can be set for one module in the GX Configurator SC is as shown below Object Module I
248. elligent function module switches as indicated below Refer to Section 4 5 2 Switch No Setting value 0700r 0007 App 38 App 38 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 5 When sending data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol The following program example sends data under the nonprocedural protocol or bidirectional protocol using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to Chapter 6 for the communication using the nonprocedural protocol and to Chapter 7 for the communication using the bidirectional protocol 1 Program conditions The following program sends data from the CH1 side when the transmission signal X1024 turns ON Devices used a Transmission command errete ie a T X1024 Transmission command pulse signal M10 Transmission result acquisition command sssseseeseeeesee M11 Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO INSUMUCTION iv eee AS eh ha ede ee M200 to 202 Normal abnormal completion of transmission ccee M300 M301 Transmission data count eee ceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas D10 Transmission data 5 Words cecceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeas D11 to D15 Data transmission result eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeaeee D20 Operation setting Independent Data bit 7 bits Sum check code e Write during RUN Enabled Setting modificatio
249. emote password setting GX Developer a e a data Data item name setting screen Setting value value Remaks Password Password Input format Character strings Remote settings password Password Modelname name QJ71C24 CMO Input format Selection settings active module Start XY Input format Hexadecimal settings Recording sheet 3 Intelligent function module switch setting Switch number number Description CH1 Communication rate setting CHi Transmission setting Switch 1 eenn Ga b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 Switch 2 CH1 Communication A setting CH2 Communication rate setting CH2 Transmission setting Switch 3 Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting Switch 5 Station number setting Check the setting values in the next page and record them App 57 App 57 APPENDIX MELSEC Q GX Developer Intelligent function module switch setting setting values recording check sheet 1 Transmission setting Enter 0 or 1 in the bit position field b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO CH1 side Always set to OFF on O tion setting Independent Linked eee pee A CH1 side Databt bit Do not include Do not include parity bit bit fa Parity bit ie Vertical parity Valid only when parity bit is set to Yes b4 stopbt 2 b5 Sumcheckcode No Yes b6 Write during RUN Prohibit Allow b7 Setting modification Pronibit Allow 2
250. en transmission from an external device is interrupted long e When a link error was generated while accessing another station over a MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 See Chapter 6 of User s Manual Application for a detailed description of the monitoring time The path setting of the Check the path of the PLC CPU to be accessed PLC CPU to be and set the path again accessed is incorrect monitoring time is set to infinite or the monitoring time is too 10 31 10 31 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 4 Troubleshooting when an external device transmitted a message and RD LED blinked but the Read Request signal was not turned ON Symptom Corrective action Bidirectiona procedure e Check if the communication protocol is set correctly e Check if the mode was switched without using the buffer memory mode switching area Communication protocol is set incorrect e The communication protocol setting contents and the communication protocol in the current operation can be checked at buffer memory addresses 250 to CH1 and 260 CH2 When Check CD Since messages are skipped when the CD terminal is turned OFF when Check CD terminal is set change terminal was set the CD the wiring so that the CD terminal remains on all the terminal was turned off time Check if a message is transmitted without transmitting When DC control is DC1 111 after the external device transmits DC3 selected the necessary 13 during
251. ength designation for on demand function 0 D3 e On demand execution result ceeeeceeseeeeeseceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaees D8 e LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side a Sastre a a a a sbeatece ta tasteseaniteste tact caestitee D9 b Intelligent function module switch settings Refer to Section 4 5 2 Pit Settin Switch No Description g Position Designated value value o oF O e __ fe bt SS ON 2 _ bits Parity bit 07E2H bs OFF Transmission Switch 1 i is bs on O o oaz oN O Ceen O o a l switen2 Communication protocol setting MC protocolformat1 00014 _ switens I Station number setting Station ooo c Buffer memory settings used in this example Address Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name ee value 150 o Word byte units designation eriy Data length designation for on demand function designation 2 513 201K LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side 598 256H Ondemandexecutonresut oo d o i App 35 App 35 APPENDIX 2 Program example lt Transmission command gt X1022 H PLS lt Setting of war emission data gt a H1234 H5678 Z REMTO J1 K2 M100 M101 PLS mal SET lt Setting of pt memory head address and data length gt E HOCOO K2 K2 M102 M103 SET mas 4 SET lt On demand transmission gt M12 X101E X1000 X1001 Y1000 S H iF SET RST lt Proce
252. ent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series PLC Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased so as to ensure correct use Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user CONTENTS This manual SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 22 itn lian are ai aes ead ies ais dene ii at hve Arentiavaroe ara A 1 REVISIONS EATA A A r r r A r E nes A 5 CONTENTS r a ede ee A 7 About ManualS c 2 20 3eh olde aie ena ale rane ie ie hea wna nanan eee nan A 15 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction c ccecceceeseeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeseaeeaeeaeeeeeeeeaees A 15 The Manual s Use and Structure 0 0 ccccccceccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaeeaecaeseeseaeeaecaeesaeeaesaeseeeeaseaesaeeeeeaesaeeeeseaeeats A 16 About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations c ceccecceeccecceseeeeeceeeeeeeaeeaecaesesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeneaeeats A 19 Definitions and Descriptions Of Terminology eccceeceeeeeseeeneeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeesaeeeaeesaeetaeesaeeeeseeeeaeens A 21 Product Configuration ris erap a anaa a aaae a aaae aaae a aaa a adaa aiaa A 23 1 1 O
253. ents of the receive area and the receive data This section shows the arrangement and contents of the receive area and the receive data for performing data reception using the bidirectional protocol 1 Receive area The receive area is a memory that stores the received data length receive data count and data area received from an external device The receive area is allocated to addresses 600H to 7FFH CH1 side and AOOH to BFFH CH2 side at initial setting CH1 fr E e The units of data length word byte is in accordance address Buffer memory with the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC 600H Data length S Receive gata count storage area The contents of data length of the received 6011 g message are stored to 3 Receive data storage area Data area oc The contents of the data area of the received 7FFH message are stored in ascending address order Default 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the received data length See Sections 8 4 5 and 8 4 7 a When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC specify as follows Receive buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the receive area in the u
254. er s Manual Application 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL 4 MELSEC Q Retry processing for data reception errors The data when reception error occurred is discarded and only the data for the normal reception is taken into the Q series C24 For this reason the reception message may be missing data when an error occurs To assure the correct transmission and reception of data it is recommended that a normal error response message is received and a response message reception timeout check is conducted for data transmitted between the PLC CPU and the external equipment and that measures be taken when an error message is received or when an error timeout occurs such as retransmitting the data transmission retry 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL Data communication using the bidirectional protocol is a function for sending receiving any data using the message format and transmission control procedure for the Q series C24 bidirectional protocol between external devices and PLC CPUs Any external devices that can install application programs and transmit and receive data in accordance with the MELSEC PLC protocol can communicate with the PLC CPUs using the bidirectional protocol This chapter explains the basic transmission and reception methods when performing data communication using the bidirectional protocol Follow the
255. erence Decimal Hex Application valus protocol allowed not MC Non Bi allowed section Communication error clear request for CH1 and to turn LED off 0 ON No initialization request 1 OFF Initialization requested SD WAIT b0 CIN b4 SIO b1 NAK b5 PRO b2 ACK b6 P S b3 NEU b7 Section 8 6 10 Section 10 1 1 Section For LED and communication Communication error clear request for CH2 and to turn LED off Not allowed error clear 0 ON No initialization request 1 OFF Initialization requested 10 1 2 SD WAIT bo NAK b5 x a SIO b1 ACK b6 PRO b2 NEU b7 P S b3 CH2 ERR b14 CIN b4 CH1 ERR b15 For system b8 to b13 Register read delete instructions 0 No request 1 Register request 2 Read request 3 Delete request Frame No direction 0 No designation Other than 0 Frame No Registration read delete result storage 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Abnormal completion Number of data bytes registered designation 0 No designation Other than 0 Number of data bytes registered maximum 80 bytes User frame 0 No designation Other than 0 Registered data maximum 80 bytes Modem connection channel designation 2EH 0 Non 1 CH1 2 CH2 4 Notification execution designation 2FH 0 Do not execute 1 Execute Number of connection retries designation 30H 1 to 5 Number of retries Connection retry interval designation 31H 90 to 300 Connection retry interval
256. ernal device The following items are considered as the primary causes of errors that may occur during data reception Cause of reception error Reference section A transmission error occurred due to noise es see a A timeout for the no reception monitoring timer 0 occurred User s Manual Chapter 6 Received data that could not be converted using the ASCII BIN conversion Application Chapter 13 Received data larger than the size that could be stored in the OS area of the Q series C24 Section 6 1 2 1 Confirmation using the sequence program 1 The following device and input signals turn ON e INPUT instruction complete device 1 e Reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB e ERR LED ON signal XE XF 2 The reception error code can be checked using the INPUT instruction control data S1 1 Or it can be checked by reading the data reception result storage area in the buffer memory addresses 258H 268h For details on how to check the error code contents and take corrective actions see Chapter 10 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 10 1 2 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write 1 to the LED OFF request area addresses 0H 1h in the buffer memory 2 To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code turn ON the ERR LED OFF request output signal YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side INPUT instruction Completion device 1 MI
257. esaeseeeaesaesaeseaesaesaeseseaesaeseeneeeaeeaes 5 6 6 1 Data Reception from the External Device oe eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeeseaeeeaeeeaseeateeas 6 2 6 1 Receiving methods iss stil agatha tins niall Mant Ag atl Adinth all Ad atl adindt 6 2 6 1 2 The receive area and the received data list cee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 6 6 6 1 3 Sequence program for data reception ececceceeececceeceeeeececeeeeaeeeeceeeeeeeaesaeseeseaeeaesaeseeeaeseeneeeeeaees 6 11 6 1 4 Receive data Caio o e AE eal et ee en a ee ee ge 6 14 6 1 5 How to detect reception CrrOrs eceeceeneeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaneeanseaeeeaneeaneeaneeaeeeaneeeeeeeneeneeeneeaees 6 17 6 1 6 Received data count and receive complete Code settings eceecseceeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeaes 6 20 6 2 Sending Data to the External Device eeceeceeceeseeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaecaeceeeeeesaesaeeeesaesaesaeseaeeaeeeeseeeeateaees 6 22 G21 Transmission MOOS secs sac ssce5 foc ea eas cce gees tes sbeaecces diester sdeeecces sh of aaeas cess A ERT 6 22 6 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data 00 6 23 6 2 3 Sequence program for transmission data ceccecceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeseeseeesaesaeseeseateeseeseateaees 6 25 6 2 4 How to detect tranSMISSION CFOS c ceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeee
258. ess 254 0 264H Information on CH2 side System area for QU71C24 R2 1 For more details on signals for RS 232 see Section 3 2 1 2 Signals output from the Q series C24 side RTS and DTR are controlled by the operating system OS of the Q series C24 They cannot be directly controlled by the sequence program 3 There is a maximum delay of 100 ms in signal status stored in the buffer memory above 2 Example of a program that reads from RS 232 control signal status storage area The following shows an example of a program that reads the RS 232 control signal status input output signals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 Example of FROM instruction ead commen Reads the status of RS 232 control signal on Frome Ho H294 po K the CH1 side from address 254 FRP Ho H264 DI KI Reads the status of RS 232 control signal on the CH2 side from address 264 b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO DO O o 0G 1 E PE DTR signal ON DSR signal ON RTS signal ON D1 0 0 1 1 10 CD signal ON DTR signal ON DSR signal ON 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 1 4 Reading the data communication status Transmission sequence status 10 10 This section explains how to read the current status of the data communication using the MC protocol stored in the buffer memory When GX Configurator SC is used check the status using the MC protocol monitor screen see
259. essed as the received data count Receive data storage area gt Data length received from external device Example When 550 words of data is received through the CH1 interface in three parts when the CH1 interface receive area consists of addresses 600H to 7FFH default value 1st data 2nd data 3rd data 511 words 39 words 472 words 78 words 117 words 433 words Q series C24 Reception data read request signal X3 Sequence program Read data 1st 39 words and 2nd 472 words Read data 1st 511 words 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 3 Sequence program for data reception This section explains the sequence program for data reception For details on the INPUT instruction for data reception see Chapter 9 X3 Read request CH1 side Create control data from DO c Abnormal detection G INPUT MO M1 Processing for normal completion receive data is stored M1 Processing for abnormal completion Reading and discarding received data resent request etc CH1 side Q series C24 ready signal X1E 1 Reception data read request X3 signal Reception abnormal detection ON during abnormal ON during abnormal signal X4 reception detection reception detection INPUT instruction INPUT instruction complete MO device Mo INPUT instructi
260. est error 7 a 9 is wrong 71661 e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e Write the device to be monitored before issuing a monitor request 71554 e If there is an error in the CPU remove the CPU error and restart data communications Q Z e Check the transmission message request from the external device make the necessary corrections and send again i ek e Change the setting to Enable e A write command was designated when Disable 71674 Cannot execute a i s R write during RUN and restart write during RUN was set command during data communications 768 RUN e A command that cannot be executed during RUN CN e Stop the CPU and restart data i i was designated communications e If there is an error in the CPU 71694 CPU error e Cannot communicate normally with the CPU remove the CPU error and restart data communications System error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Monitor data write 2C 3C 4C frame frame 10 16 10 16 e Rewrite monitor data 10 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Contents Error code Hexa Error decimal e A nonexistent device was designated 716FH Device error e Device that cannot be specified by the corresponding command was designated 71701 A compatible 1C 71714 frame error 7172 example 0 was designated Monitor data write e Monitor data was written for a CPU other than a pici error Q QnACPU using QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C fr
261. etting value area of the item to be cleared to 0 Step 3 Click the Execute test The counter value of the selected item becomes 0 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 6 3 Transmission control and others monitor test Purpose Monitor the RS 232 signal status and the various setting values for data communication Startup procedure Monitor screen gt CHO Transmission control monitor test Monitor test screen CH1 Transmission control and others monitor test _ ox Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value RS 232 control signal status RTS AS ON DSR DR OFF DTRIER ON cD OFF CS CTS OFF RI CI OFF Communication protocol status GX Developer connection During GX Developer the following transmission status is invalid Transmission status Independent Operation setting ha r Flash ROM setting r Details Write to a Current value Monitoring module t display Cannot execute test Read from 7 pars File read Make text file tart monito Stop monitor Execute test Close Monitor test items f Setting value storage Reference section containing Monitor test items buffer memory address detailed explanation RTS RS 254H 264H bO DSR DR 2544 2644 b1 RS 232 control DTR ER 254H 264H b2 Section 4 4 1 of
262. etting values to the on demand function designation and transmission area designation areas of the buffer memory Initial setting command 3 Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Sets 6004 to the receive buffer memory head address Sets 200H to the receive buffer memory length Transfers the setting value to the receive area designation area of the buffer memory Initial setting completion Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction X1027 PLS M10 lt Setting of word byte units designation gt M10 X101E KI D0 Kl M100 M100 M101 1 F PLS M1 M101 SET M200 lt Setting of on demand function designation and transmission area designation gt M11 X101E KWH MOV H400 D1 s nov HO D2 a HOCOO D3 mov H400 D4 7 REMTO J1 K1 KI HO HOAO D1 K4 M102 M102 M103 PLS M12 i R E M201 lt Setting of receive area designation gt M12 X101E J A a iv H600 D5 vov H200 D6 7 REMTO J1 K1 KI HO HOAG D5 K2 M104 M104 M105 SET M202 M105 SET M203 REMARK When changing the default values of the following buffer memory areas refer to above 2 Program example to perform programming DTR DSR ER DR DC control designation e DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff code designation e DC2 DC4 code designation e CD terminal check designation for RS 232 Communication system designation for RS 232 e Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation e Retransmission time transmission method designation e Simultaneously t
263. eviation for interface conforming to RS 232 RS 422 485 interface Abbreviation for interface conforming to RS 422 and RS 485 Generic term for the A QnA series PLC modules that are operated by commands from the PLC CPU equivalent to the Q series PLC intelligent function modules Examples e CC Link interface module e A D and D A conversion modules e High speed counter module e Ethernet interface module e Computer link module and serial communication module Switch setting Generic term for intelligent function module switch setting User s Manual Application or Application User s Manual Basic or Basic Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Basic Special function modules Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application Definitions and Descriptions of Terminology The following table lists the definitions and descriptions of terminology used in this manual and related manuals for the Q series serial communication modules Terms Description A compatible IC frame Formats 1 to 4 One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data This is the same message format as when communicating using the protocol for the A series computer link modules Device memory read write operations for the QCPU are allowed within the device range of the AnACPU For details see Chapter 5 of the R
264. evice 1 MI YOE XOE 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 1 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a transmission error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 10 2 Confirmation using the GX Configurator SC e The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 8 6 3 and 8 6 5 e The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 8 6 10 3 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code GX Configurator SC monitor function See Section 8 6 5 e GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 257H 267h When a transmission error occurs the PLC CPU may not transmit all the designated data It is recommended that data communications be performed by establishing a user arbitrary communication procedure that can check normal transmission by reception of a response to data transmission 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 3 Data Communications Precautions The following describes the precautions to be taken during non procedure protocol data communications 1 Example The Q series C24 transmission sequence initialization conditions The initial status indicates the status where transmission has stopped and reception data has been discarded The Q series C24 transmission se
265. evice to the Q series C24 one of the following two adjustments should be made so that the relationship shown below is maintained 1 Reduce the transmission data size 2 Increase the receive area Receive data storage area 2 Size of data sent from the external device 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL From external device Head l 321GFEDCBA 2 MELSEC Q Receive data list The following describes the data list when data received from an external device is stored to the receive area 1 The receive message is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory receive data storage area 2 The data is stored to the receive data storage area in low address L H next address L H order Under the following conditions when the receive data count is an odd byte 00H is stored in the upper byte of the final data storage position e When the unit for the received data count is designated in bytes e When data reception is performed using the receive complete code Example When receive arbitrary data area ABCDEFG123 was stored The receive area is the default value Q series C24 OS area gt CH1 address Buffer memory 6001 5 or 10 Receive data count storage area 6014 B A N 6024 D C EE a EE 43h _ J 6031 P E Receive data storage area e04 0 The receive data is stored in low 31H 47H address L gt H next address 6054
266. f the receive data Receive area 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory can be changed with the GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the receive data length See Section 8 4 7 a When changing the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC specify as follows Receive buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address for the area to be used as the receive area in the user definable area of the buffer memory address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH Receive buffer memory length designation Designate by address the length of the area 0001H to 1A00x to be used as the receive area in the user definable area of the buffer memory address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH If the following functions are also used when the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory are changed make sure that the addresses of the receive area do not overlap with those for the buffer memory that stores the transmission and reception data to be used by these functions MC protocol buffer memory read write function MC protocol on demand function Non procedure protocol transmission receive function Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function Communication data monitoring function 2 When sending data from the external d
267. features functions and component parts a To learn about features and functions e Chapter 1 describes the features of the serial communication modules e Chapter 3 describes the common specifications and functions of the serial communication modules b To learn about the packed items and system configured items e The section prior to Chapter 1 Product Configuration describes the parts that are packed along with the serial communication module e Parts and components other than those packed with the module must be prepared separately by the user To learn about processing required to start up the serial communication module a To learn about the startup procedure e Section 4 2 describes the general procedures prior to starting the operation of the serial communication module b To learn about the connection with the external devices e Section 4 4 describes the connection methods for each type of interface c To learn about processing required prior to operation of the serial communication module e Section 4 5 explains the parameter settings with GX Developer in order to use the serial communication module e Section 4 6 and Chapter 8 describe the settings from GX Configurator SC to perform the initial setting of the serial communication module To change an initial value follow the procedure described in Chapter 8 d To check for failure in the serial communication module e Section 4 7 describes the test of the individual
268. for Communication error clear request for CHO and to turn LED off Target of LED off communication error information initialization SIO PRO P S C N NAK ERR LED 1 SD WAIT ACK NEU LED All of Requests 1 and 2 x1 The ERR LED is turned off However it is not turned off if an error has occurred on either the CH1 or CH2 side 3 Click on Execute test 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 7 Non Procedure Protocol Receive Data Clear This section explains how to clear the received data using the non procedure protocol By using this function the receive data can be cleared from GX Configurator SC while the communication with the non procedure protocol is still in progress without resetting the PLC CPU or turning off the power Operation procedure Procedure 1 Display the Non procedure monitor test screen See Section 8 6 5 Procedure 2 Set Clear request issued for Receive data clear request Procedure 3 Click on Execute test The received data will be cleared Clear the received data when transmission reception are not in progress with the external device Executing a receive data clear while the data transmission is in progress causes the Q series C24 to stop the data transmission abruptly resulting in an abnormal completion of the dedicated transmission instruction The transmission completion signal will not be lit When the receive data clear is executed while the
269. formed on the external station side Also execution programs can be changed replaced from the external device side 3 Remote control of the PLC CPU This function executes remote RUN STOP PAUSE atch clear reset operations Remote operations of the PLC CPU can be performed from the external device side using the PLC CPU remote control function 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 4 Monitoring the PLC CPU This function monitors the operating status of the PLC CPU and the data in the device memory The PLC CPU status and the device memory data can be sent to the external device at fixed intervals when an error occurs in the machine equipment or when certain conditions are satisfied This function reduces the data read processing load on the external device side 5 Sending data from the PLC CPU to the external device A function for requesting data transmission from the PLC CPU to the external device is called the on demand function Urgent data that must be forwarded to the external device can be sent as on demand data to the external device by starting up from the PLC CPU 5 1 2 Message format and control procedure for data communication The data communication functions using the MC protocol correspond to the data communication functions using the dedicated protocol for the conventional products listed below e A series computer link module QnA series serial communication module Theref
270. function error code Modem function sequence status Make text file End setup Cancel 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Setting items Setting item Buffer memory address Reference section Flash ROM access register read delete result 4H CH1 CH2 LED ON status communication error status gt 1 201H 202H Section 8 6 9 Section 10 1 Switch setting error mode switching error status gt 203H Number of registered user frame 204H Flash ROM system parameters write result 220H Modem function error code 221H Modem function sequence status 222H Number of data registrations for connection 223H Number of data registrations for initialization 226H Number of notification execution 229H Data storage area 1 notification execution data No 22AH Section 8 6 2 Section 3 3 of User s Manual Application Data storage area 2 notification execution data No 22EH Data storage area 3 notification execution data No 232H Data storage area 4 notification execution data No 236H Data storage area 5 notification execution data No 23AH Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion 22FBH Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion 22FCH Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit DOF Fy disconnection CH1 CH2 communication protocol status 1 252H 262 Section 4 5 2 Transmission status 253H 263H Section
271. g Independent linked operation of each interface Initial setting and monitoring testing of setting values by the utility package Connecting the GX Developer Available X Not available 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q x1 The following functions are available when communicating with the MELSECNET H remote I O station using the MC protocol Available function Function Batch read and batch write Random read test random write Device memory read write Monitor data registration monitoring Batch read of multiple blocks batch write of multiple blocks Reading writing from to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 Reading writing buffer memory of an Reading writing from to the buffer memory of the specified intelligent function module Buffer memory read write intelligent function module The following devices of a MELSECNET H remote I O station can be accessed by the device memory read write function Note that the accessible devices and the ranges vary depending on the type of frames used for the data communication See the Reference Manual for a detailed explanation Device name Special relay Device symbol Device name Link relay Device symbol Special register Data register Input rela Output relay Link register Link special relay Internal rela It is only possible to read write from to the buffer memory of an intelligent function
272. g dedicated screens without having to consider the I O signals or buffer memory The utility package can also be used together with the GX Simulator SWnD5L LLT E Intelligent function module utility C MELSEC GPPW sample _ Of x Intelligent function module parameter Online Tools Help r Intelligent function module parameter setting module select Start 1 0 No Module type 0000 Serial Communications Module z Module model name QJ71C24N N R4 bd Parameter settin Intelligent functi Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh O000 G 71C24 N N R4 Unavailable Initial setting Auto refresh Delete Exit Protocol FB support function The protocol FB support function automatically generates the FB function block for communication that supports data communication processing and traces the network that monitors the data transmitted received on the communication network By using the protocol FB support function producing PLC programs and transmission debug is made easy For details on the protocol FB support function see the GX Configurator SC Operating Manual Protocol FB support function 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 1 Functions Available with Utility Package The following table Fe the utility package function indicates that the setting is valid with the applicable protocol Non Bidirection
273. gnals X Y00 to X Y1F of the Q series C24 1 When data is communicated using the MC protocol XOE Reads LED and communication error _ FROMP Ho H201 DO K1 information from address 2011 FROMP HO H203 D1 KI Reads switch setting error description from address 2031 Reads data transmission reception H256 D2 K3 Turn off clear PONE results from address 2564 to 258n command To o Ho GEE ki Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory YOE Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 10 2 2 When data is communicated using the non procedure or bidirectional protocol XOE Aer s FROMP HO H201 DO KI Reads LED and communication error information from address 2011 FROMP HO H203 D1 K1 Reads switch setting error description from address 2031 FROMP HO H257 D2 K2 Reads data transmission reception results from address Turn off clear 2571 to 258 command H tO H top HO HO HOFF K1 Writes initialization request such as for displayed LED to address 0n YOE Requests initialization of error information on the CH1 side and clearing of error codes in the buffer memory Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 10 2 When data is communicated using the MC protocol the displayed ERR LED may no
274. h Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion x setting Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit EARN 4 6 disconnect O Setting possible X Setting impossible man THH HR x 1 GX Configurator SC SWOD5C QSCU E 20C or later supports the Q series C24 of function version B 2 See Section 2 6 of this manual for how to check the software version of GX Configurator SC App 4 App 4 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 1 2 Precautions when Updating the Module from Function Version A to B This section explains how to utilize programs created for the Q series C24 of function version A for the Q series C24 of function version B and how to incorporate function version B into the existing system 1 Program utilization Programs created for the Q series C24 of function version A can be used as they are for the Q series C24 of function version B 2 Incorporation into the existing system The wiring used for function version A can be used as is for the Q series C24 of function version B App 5 App 5 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 QnA A Series Module This section explains a comparison of the functions of the Q series C24 and QnA A series modules and explains how to utilize programs created for A series modules as well as how to install the Q series C24 into the existing system QnA A modules refer to the following products QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 R4 A1SJ71QC24N R2 QC24 AJ71QC24
275. h GX Configurator SC Address 9Bx 13Bx Message transmit processing Message receive processing Waits to receive the response message Transmits a response message 2 2 1 2 while checking time out after data after data reception 2 1 is complete transmission 1 1 is complete Posts the receive data and receive Posts normal end or abnormal end result to the PLC CPU through the according to whether or not the PLC buffer memory CPU received a response message through the buffer memory Posts a simultaneous transmission error Transmits a response message 2 2 oa to the PLC CPU through the buffer after data reception 2 1 is complete Transmission data Invalid iat Receive data Valid 0100H memory after data transmission 1 1 Posts the receive data and receive i Does not wait for a response massage __ result to the PLC CPU through the 1 2 in reply to data transmission 1 1 buffer memory Transmission data Valid Receive data Valid Waits to receive the response message Ignores data reception 2 1 and 1 2 while checking time out after data discards the received data Transmission data Valid transmission 1 1 is complete Does not transmit a response Bec i e datat Invalid 00011 Posts normal end or abnormal end message 2 2 according to whether or not the PLC Does not inform the PLC CPU that CPU received a response message data was received through the buffer memory Posts a simultaneous transmission
276. hannel Th icati ith the CP Id n 7E701 CPU error e The communication with the CPU could not be performed normally 7E8Ex _ System error 7EC1H Double send e A send request was performed while another send request error request was being processed 7EC2u Transmission data count error Transmission receipt buffer setting error 7E6D _ Ea e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error 7EC3u e Data larger than the transmit buffer size was transmitted e Transmission receipt buffer settings out of range 7EC4n e Write to Flash ROM was requested when the setting modification enable disable switch in the GX Developer was set to OFF Flash ROM access error 7EC5H Flash ROM access e There is an error in the Flash ROM read write request contents e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e The next data was received before processing of the previous data was completed e Multiple requests was simultaneously issued for one channel e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error 7EC6n 7F00n 7FO1H Buffer full error 7FO2n to System error e An ASCII code that cannot be converted to binary code was received ASCII gt BIN conversion error e An odd number of bytes of data was received during data communications using ASCII lt gt BIN conversion A e There is an error in the command frame part Receive header area error e An ASCII code that cannot be converted to bina
277. hannel 2 gt 2 2 When an ONDEMAND instruction is executed on a channel other ONDEMAND instructions cannot be executed on that channel at the same time If an attempt is made during execution of an ONDEMAND instruction to execute another ONDEMAND instruction the second instruction will not be executed until the execution of the first instruction is completed 3 Whether an ONDEMAND instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D or status display device at completion D 1 a Completion device Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ONDEMAND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ONDEMAND instruction e Normal completion Off with no change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ONDEMAND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation during execution of an ONDEMAND instruction END END END END Sequence processing processing processing processing program j o leti f readi f 7 Completion of reading user frame g Executioniof ONDEMAND A by ONDEMAND instruction instruction ONDEMAND i i instruction ON Completion device OFF ON completion Status display device OFF at completion Normal
278. hapter 8 The following concerns the data set from GX Configurator SC 1 Data set in the Q series C24 for the use of specific functions 2 Data set in the PLC CPU to communicate information between the Q series C24 and the PLC CPU of the mounting station This section explains the Auto refresh settings of the data mentioned in 2 above Setting purpose The auto refresh settings are defined to automatically store the error and status information stored in the buffer memory of the Q series C24 in devices designated by the PLC CPU By this setting the users can see the module error and status information without accessing the Q series C24 Setup procedure GX Developer Tools gt Intelligent function utility gt Start gt Intelligent function module parameter setting module select Auto refresh For display screen see Section 8 3 Setting screen Auto refresh setting iol r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module side Module side PLC side E Buffer size Transfer Transfer Device direction word count aa Module modelname QJ71C24 N N R4 Setting item Flash ROM access register read delete result CH1 LED ON status communications error status CH2 LED ON status communications error status Switch setting error mode switching error status Number of registered user frame Flash ROM system parameters write result Modem
279. he Q series C24 cannot send a response message to the external device in response to message reception because the external device issued a terminate transmission request DC3 received DSR signal OFF it transmits the response message after it receives the ready to send signal DC1 received DSR signal ON from the external device 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 4 Data Communications Precautions The following shows the precautions when performing data communications using the bidirectional protocol 1 When the transmission sequence is in the initial status it indicates that data transmission and reception processing has not been started The Q series C24 transmission sequence is initialized in the following cases The power is turned on the CPU is reset When operating or the mode is switched When a response message ACK NAK etc was received in reply to data transmission When a response message ACK NAK etc was transmitted in reply to data reception When the CD signal was turned off during data communications using Check CD terminal in full duplex communications through the RS 232 interface As a data transmission procedure data transmission from the external device or the Q series C24 should be performed after an response for the immediately preceding data transmission has been received The external device and PLC CPU must agree so that the units of the data length word coun
280. he arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data for performing data transmission using the non procedure protocol 1 Transmission area The transmission area is amemory area for storing the data and the data count that are transmitted from the PLC CPU to the external device via the Q series C24 By default the transmission area is assigned to addresses 400H to 5FFH CH1 side and 800H to 9FFH CH2 side CH1 side laletatatatatate The unit of transmission data count words bytes address Buffer memory is in accordance with the word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC 4001 2 Transmission data count 2 _Storagearea The transmission data count designated with the 401H OUTPUT instruction is written 2 Transmission data he P Q l storagearea o Fas The transmission data designated with the OUTPUT T Fo instruction is written H Default setting 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 The position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory can be changed with GX Configurator SC in accordance with the specifications of the external device and the received data length See Sections 8 4 5 and 8 4 7 a When changing the position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory with GX Configurator SC specify as follows Transmission buffer memory head address designation Designate the starting address fo
281. he control signals are described below The pin numbers of the connector are enclosed in parentheses 1 CD signal 1 e The Q series C24 operates according to the setting CD terminal check see Section 8 4 5 of the Q series C24 Po CD terminal check enabled CD terminal check disabled e The Q series C24 performs send and receive e The Q series C24 performs send and receive processing when the CD signal receive processing regardless of the ON OFF status Full duplex carrier detection is ON of the CD signal communication e If the CD signal is turned off during data e Data communications is possible with an communication the Q series C24 initializes external device that cannot turn the CD the transmission sequence signal ON OFF Half duplex See Chapter 8 of User s Manual Application Setting impossible communication 2 RD signal This is a signal to receive data 3 SD signal This is a signal to send data 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 4 DTR signal 4 When communicating data using the non procedure protocol the Q series C24 turns on or off on when data is receivable depending on the amount of unused memory in the OS area allocated for receive data storage if DTR DSR control is being performed Read the receive data from the sequence program as the receive data is stored in the OS area when the DTR signal is OFF If DTR DSR control is not implements the DTR signal is always ON If an MC protocol or bidirectional pro
282. he settings as indicated in Chapter 8 and register these to the flash ROM in the Q series C24 e MC protocol system setting e Transmission control and others system setting To write from the external device to the intelligent function module installed in the MELSECNET H remote I O station during communication using the MC protocol set the Write allow prohibit during PLC CPU RUN in the GX Developer to enable 5 1 4 Support of multiple CPU system or redundant system When the external device accesses a QCPU in a multiple CPU system or redundant system it is possible to selectively access either a control or non control CPU in the multiple CPU system or a control or standby system CPU or System A or System B CPU in the redundant system by specifying the target QCPU in Requested module I O No of the QnA compatible 4C frame for the MC protocol Refer to the Reference Manual for details Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual for the system configuration Example When multiple CPU No 1 is specified iuri 2 oO Frame ID No Station No Network No 4 PC No 4 Self station No 4 Comman Sub command Device code Head device 4 Sum check code station No 2 s 8 E 3 g g a F I Requested module Number of device points HO EJM R THEM EFR P H L H L H L H LIH L F s o 5 0 7 0 7 Jo e ofo ojo 4 0 11 0 0 014 x f 0 0 0 0 4 Ofo 0 0 5 05x 46n 38s 30n 36x
283. he switch settings of the Q series incorrect C24 10 43 10 43 APPENDIX MELSEC Q APPENDIX Appendix 1 Functional Improvements of the Q Series C24 The Q series C24 of function version B has several functions that have been added or changed from the conventional product function version A This chapter explains a comparison of the functions of Q series C24 GX Configurator SC accompanied by the change addition of functions and explains how to utilize programs created for function version A as well as how to incorporate function version B modules into the existing system Appendix 1 1 Comparison of the Functions of Q Series C24 GX Configurator SC 1 Comparison of the functions of Q series C24 The following table shows the functions of Q series C24 function version Function QJ71C24N pA S R2 R4 Ce aa Communication using the MC protocol 32 Os 3S Fomasitoa O O Communication with A compatible 1C frame exist for each O O 0 Communication with binary code Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame Formats atch eadiwiteinbiwordunis f O Oto Monitoring of device memory eramo o Readiwrite by extensiondesignation lofo Accessing other stations via network system ofo E omto the buffer memoy ofthe Qseres E OF Reading writing from to the buffer memory of Een function modules aaa e Monitoring the PLC CPUs PLC CPU monitoring function o Jolo Transmission of the mo
284. hen checking communication with the PLC CPU e The SD and RD LEDs of the interface being tested flash when checking the communication functions of each interface 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Procedure 4 Checking the results of an individual loopback test 1 This test is performed repeatedly When the ERR LED is off the test is being executed normally 2 The test is completed with an error when the ERR LED is lit Check the error description on one of the following screens The ERR LED is lit upon error occurrence and the test is completed e The Monitor test others screen of GX Configurator SC see Section 8 6 9 e The buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer see the GX Developer Manual for operation method x When checking for errors in the buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer monitor the LED ON status storage area address CH1 201h CH2 202k Check the error descriptions on the screens by bit decoding the monitored value 16 bit integer Each bit corresponds to the following error description Buffer memory monitored Description when correspondin Address CH1 side CH2 side p bitis on p g Corrective action Bit location 201H 2024 bO to b3 Ooo T S O Remove errors occurring in the CPU Error occurrence in the CPU module g module Not enough power supply capacity Examine the power supply capacity Module is not mounted correctly Reinstall the module properly Ch
285. hen data cannot be communicated via MOdEM cceceeeteeeeeeeeteeeeees 10 41 10 3 15 Troubleshooting when data cannot be communicated with the ISDN sub address 10 42 10 3 16 Troubleshooting when constant cycle transmission does not operate normally 10 42 10 3 17 Troubleshooting when condition agreement transmission does not operate normally 10 42 10 3 18 Troubleshooting when data cannot be received by an interrupt program eeeeeeeeeees 10 42 10 3 19 Troubleshooting when data cannot be written to Flash ROM cccscccsessecsesseseseeseeseeees 10 42 10 3 20 Troubleshooting when the ERR LED is lit 2 ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenas 10 43 Appendix 1 Functional Improvements of the Q Series C24 oo ees eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseesetaeeeseesnetaneaeee App 1 Appendix 1 1 Comparison of the Functions of Q Series C24 GX Configurator SC ceeeeeee App 1 Appendix 1 2 Precautions when Updating the Module from Function Version A to B eeeeeee App 5 Appendix 2 QnA A Series Module ccscccccecceeeeeeececeeeeaeceecaeeeecaecaesaesaesaecaeceeseaesaesaesaeseaeeaeeeseaeeateas App 6 Appendix 2 1 Functional Comparison with the Q series C24 and the QnA A Series Modules App 6 Appendix 2 2 Using Programs Designed for the QC24 N and Installing the Q Series C24 Into Existing Systems arnee bee eedteed yess Paes hevadeed ba aeishannedd aaanuth hirclie
286. ial communication module QnA series AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 AJ71QC24N R4 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N R2 Q series QJ71C24N QJ71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QJ71C24 QJ71C24 R2 2 Other generic terms and abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the data communication devices for the serial communication module The names model names are provided when it is necessary to explicitly identify the model being discussed Generic term abbreviation Description of generic term abbreviation Generic term for memory of the intelligent function modules special function modules used for storing data sent to or received from the PLC CPU setting values monitor values etc Generic term for one of the external devices with which data can be sent received using the MC protocol or the bidirectional protocol Data communication functions Generic term for MC protocol non procedure protocol and bidirectional protocol Abbreviation for GX Configurator SC SWOD5C QSCU E or later Initial settings for the module monitoring and testing can be performed without using a sequence program and without considering I O signals or buffer memory Intelligent function utility Buffer memory Computer GX Configurator SC Converting sequence programs necessary for data communication processing into FB can shorten program production man hours In addition the monitoring and analysis of the transmitted
287. ications Extension R block No error e Change the setting to Enable write during RUN and restart data communications e Stop the CPU and restart data communications Cannot execute a command during RUN System error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e Check and correct the other Monitor network e The written monitor network No and the monitor station access valid module No No error request network No are different in the network parameters e Rewrite the monitor data 71501 e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error PLC No APLC No other than FF or 0 to 64 00x to 40x designation error was designated 71521 e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error N A m e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications 71514 e Review the transmission message e Correct the message format so the number of access points is within the allowable range e The received message length has exceeded the Frame length error allowable range 71544 e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Unwritten monitor e Monitoring was requested before monitor data was data error written 71561 e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error 7160 PLC access error e CPU model name cannot be confirmed 71614 to e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error 71631 e Either the request or the device designation method 71644 Requ
288. ice according to the specifications of the external device Sum check code setting This sets according to the specifications of the external device whether or not a sum check code is added to transmission and reception messages of each frame and format during data communication using the MC or bidirectional protocol For an explanation of the message configuration and sum check code when a sum check code is added set to Yes see the applicable explanation of each protocol Write during RUN setting This sets according to the system specifications whether or not data transmitted using the MC protocol is written to the PLC CPU from an external device while the PLC CPU is running When write during RUN is prohibited disabled the data is not written and an NAK message is returned if the external device requests the PLC CPU to write data while it is running For an explanation of the functions available in this setting check in the write allowed setting and write prohibited setting columns in the command list of the Reference Manual Setting modifications setting This sets whether or not the following actions are allowed after starting up the Q series C24 Changing data communication functions and transmission Specifications and the switching mode of each interface e Writing data to the flash ROM writing the system setting values and user frame 1 A setting change in the connected interface side should be set to Allowe
289. ides are partitioned as follows e User Data set by the user before executing the dedicated instruction e System The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the dedicated instruction 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Function 1 This function clears reception data in the OS area It does not clear the user data reception area in the buffer memory 2 Ifthe CSET instruction is executed while the read request X03 X0A or reception abnormal detection signal X04 XOB is turned on the CSET instruction is kept waiting until the signal is turned off 3 The status of the CSET instruction whether it is being executed or completed normally abnormally can be checked by the complete device D2 specified by the setting data a Complete device D2 0 This device turns on at the End processing of the scan at which the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next End processing b Complete device D2 1 It turns on off by the status at which the CSET instruction is completed At normal completion It is kept turned off and does not change At abnormal completion It turns on at the END processing of the scan at which the CSET instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation at execution of CSET instruction End End End Sequence program Scan ___ processing Scan processing processing CSET instruction Execution of instruction Complete device Complete devi
290. idirectional protocol lt in the table is the error code when the target CPU is not a Q QnACPU Signal name Protocol Error code Hexa decimal Error Contents Corrective action e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error PLC access error e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e Number of request points exceeds the range for the command e A word device was designated in a bit units command e The last device No exceeds the range Given device last No gt Designated head device No Designated number of points e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e See Troubleshooting of the QCPU Q mode maintenance and inspection user s manual and take corrective action e See Appendix of the QCPU Q mode maintenance and inspection user s manual details and take corrective action e Make the watchdog timer timer 1 time longer e Check if the CPU can communicate in communication protocol No F 3E8H to 3FFFu Error detected by the CPU 40001 to 4FFFu Error detected by the CPU 71014 71024 e Cannot communicate with the Q series C24 CPU 71044 to 71164 e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications 71404 Request data error 71414 e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data c
291. ies C24 Output control input Receive data Send data Output control input Q series C24 Receive data 2 When the Q series C24 is used if operation of the two interfaces is linked see Section 4 5 2 2 the time to send one character becomes the Q series C24 H W gate OFF time The Q series C24 turns OFF the gate after the one character send time 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 4 Serial Communication Module Function List The following table lists the functions of the Q series C24 Communication with Formats 1 to 4 ASCII code exist for each Communication with Communication with QnA compatible 4C frame Format 5 binary code Batch read write in bit word units eae onis Monitoring of device memory icati ead write of device Communication Batch read write of multiple blocks Chapter 5 using MC protocol memor x a p Read write by extension designation Reference Manual Accessing other stations via network system Turning on off input signals of the Q series C24 from an external device global function Data transmission from a PLC CPU to an external device on demand function Data transmission reception in any format Chapter 6 Data transmission reception using user frames Data reception by interrupt programs procedure protocol Monitoring the PLC CPUs PLC CPU monitoring function Application 2 ASCII data transmission reception by ASCII BIN conversion App Data transmission recepti
292. ies C24 and external device As the wiring precautions external wiring which is resistant to the effects of external noise is a prerequisite for reliable system operation and full use of the Q series C24 function 1 Ground the shield at only one point 2 When connecting with an external device using an RS 232 line use a connector shell as specified in Section 3 2 1 on the Q series C24 end 3 When connecting with an external device using an RS 422 485 cable be sure to note the following a QJ71C24N and QJ71C24 1 Use the RS 422 485 cable recommended in section 3 3 2 2 The RS 422 485 interface terminal block uses M3 terminal screws Use suitable crimp on terminals for the terminals b QJ71C24N R4 1 Use the RS 422 485 cable recommended in section 3 3 2 Be sure to strip the outer insulation layer by 7 mm before connecting the cable to the plug in socket block 2 When connecting the braided shield wire inside the RS 422 485 cable use the plate terminals included with the product The braided shield wire can be connected without the plate terminal Four plate terminals are included to connect the FG terminals of both stations see section 4 4 2 6 3 When connecting the plug in socket block to the QU71C24N R4 be sure to confirm the layout of the socket block and then insert it into the RS 422 485 connector on the QU71C24N R4 QJ71C24N R4 RUN ERR NEU NEU emf sD RD RD 1 cH RS 4221485 O
293. ing multiple CPU systems Details are explained in the Reference Manual a When accessing QCPUs in a multiple CPU system using the MC protocol or through GX Developer it is possible to perform data communication such as reading writing device data by specifying the QCPU to be accessed When using the Q series C24 in a multiple CPU system a QCPU controlling the Q series C24 hereinafter referred to as the control PLC should be specified using GX Developer It is also possible to mount a Q series C24 of function version A ina multiple CPU system and access to the only control PLC PLC No 1 External device Q series C24 Peripheral device control PLC Communication through GX Developer Communication using the MC protocol Q series C24 non control PLCs PLC No 1 PLC No 2 PLC No 3 PLC No 4 Module controlled by __ PLC No 1 2 Module controlled by PLC No 2 RON b When a Q series C24 CPU of function version B is used in a multiple CPU system the following forms of data communication can be performed with the Q series C24 1 It is possible to perform data communication using the non procedure bidirectional protocols from the control PLC 2 It is possible to read the buffer memory from non control PLCs Input output signals can be used as contacts External Non control PLC Control PLC Q series C24 device FROM TO instryction Buffer memory _ Dedi
294. ing to the command The characters in the e Check and correct the external device message message include a data _ and restart data communications other than the A to Z Note 0 to 9 LL and e Only the data 0 to 9 and A to F can be control data handled as character area data during communications using an MC protocol ASCII mode Therefore when transmitting a signal PRO turned on character string as data convert the ASCII code of each character string to 2 byte binary code Examples e Transmitting the character G The ASCII code for the character G is 47H and is transmitted as the two bytes 34H 37H Transmitting the character A The ASCII code for A is 41H and is transmitted as the two bytes 34h 31H If the ASCII code 41H for the character A is transmitted unchanged the Q series C24 ASCII BIN conversion will convert it to AH 10 and pass it to the PLC CPU A device No outside the When designating a device check Device designated range was setting of the parameters written to the CPU designated and correct it to a device No within the designated range and restart data communications e Aremote RUN STOP e Check if remote STOP is applied from another request was issued while remote STOP was applied from another module Communication error module and restart data communications 10 35 10 35 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 9 Troubleshooting when communication error SIO
295. ins data reception from the external device There are two methods for receiving data the reception via receive complete code for receiving variable length messages and the reception via received data count for receiving fixed length messages The receive complete code and received data count used for data reception can be changed to any setting values chosen by the user using GX Configurator SC 6 1 1 Receiving methods The following shows the methods for receiving data in any format using the non procedure protocol There are two methods for receiving data the reception via receive complete code for receiving variable length messages and the reception via received data count for receiving fixed length messages The receive complete code and received data count used for data reception can be changed to any setting values chosen by the user using GX Configurator SC Q series C24 PLC CPU Receiving area 1 buffer memory Reception data Receive data read request count storage a irea Head data Receive complete code 2 3 Receive data stx a e c o e rl aa lex INPUT 4 storage area 02H 41 42x 43x 44 45 46x 471 48 03H instruction lt 4 Transmission data External device Description CH1 CH2 Control timing Reception data read request signal X3 XA INPUT instruction complete device INPUT instruction 1 When data is received from the external devic
296. ion protocol to MC Communication protocol setting is incorrect Data cannot be protocol format 5 communicated with GX Transmission setting does not match the REN e Review the transmission setting Developer supporting the Q external device series C24 Communication rate does not match the f z ai Review the communication rate setting external device The product is not supported by the GX i p PP y Confirm the GX Developer s S W version re ont Developer Check the GX Developer s connection The GX Developer does not A A There was an error in the GX Developer system receive the callback signals P connection system Set the connection system on callback from the Q Series C24 i Sh Sh reception waiting and connect e Check the GX Developer s connection f e There s an error in the GX Developer s pare Callback connections from system connection system F the GX Developer are Correct the Q Series C24 s settings refused by the Q Series Check the telephone No There is an error in the connection system s C24 y Change the telephone No to the data for telephone No callback There is an error in the Q Series C24 Set the callback function designation on the ra When performing Auto setting value setting 1 to 3 callback during fixed F e Check the GX Developer s connection here is an error in the GX Developer s during designated number Gannidctionisvetar
297. is automatically locked when the modem is disconnected 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q The remote password should be set to a QCPU using GX Developer in order to use the remote password function of QCPU Unlocking the remote password is possible only for the QCPU of the local station with the Q series C24 It is impossible to unlock the remote password for the QCPU of other stations See Section 3 18 of the Reference Manual for the command for unlocking the remote password When accessing the PLC using GX Developer the remote password should be unlocked when starting the online operation 3 Q series C24 setting and monitoring function when using the QCPU remote password function a Modem function system setting by GX Configurator SC 1 Remote password mismatch notification count designation Designate the number of times before notification when a remote password disagreement occurs at the unlock processing by the user external device after the line is connected The Q series C24 automatically disconnects the line if more remote password disagreements occur than the number of times designated by this value Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count designation Designate the number of times before notification when remote password disagreements occur at the unlock processing by the user external device after the startup of the Q series C24 The error signal on
298. is function registers character data messages to be sent to external devices mainly printers in the serial communication module as an user frame in advance and sends the registered data for multiple user frames using the non procedure protocol sent by an instruction from the PLC CPU Multidrop connection A name of the connection when multiple external devices or other serial communication modules are connected in a 1 n or m n mode using the serial communication module s RS 422 485 interface Non procedure protocol An user s communication procedure and one of the data communication functions for communicating any data between the PLC CPU and an opposite device Details are explained in Chapter 6 QnA compatible 2C frame Formats 1 to 4 One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA series serial communication modules QnA compatible 2C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA simplified frame Formats 1 to 4 Details are explained in Chapter 4 of the Reference Manual QnA compatible 3C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA compatible 4C frame Formats 1 to 4 One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and ASCII code data This is the same message format as the communication frame using
299. is shown on the following page x1 For details on the data reception using interrupt programs see the User s Manual Application I O signal Siral Device that turns ON OFF Timin ignal name CH1 side CH2 side E Q series C24 3 x3 xa Reception data read request ee Ws yee Only when normal Reception Paes Reception abnormal detection ae Ls Only when abnormal When the reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB turns ON read the error code from the buffer memory below and then check the type of error and take corrective action based on the information found in Chapter 10 e Data reception result storage area addresses 258H 268n 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Setting values that can be changed Of the initial settings from GX Configurator SC stored in the buffer memory only the following setting values can be changed after data communication has started e Received data count buffer memory addresses A4H 1441 e Receive complete code buffer memory addresses A5H 145n 3 Timing and procedure for changing the setting values 1 Timing of change To change the receive complete code and received data count after data communication has started change the setting when the status of the I O signals relating to the reading of receive data is as follows e Reception data read request signal X3 XA or reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB ON e Reception da
300. ission 11 5 Transmission program 12 TRANSPARENT CODES AND ADDITIONAL CODES 12 1 Handling the Transparent Code and Additional Code Data 12 2 Registering Transparent Codes and Additional Codes 12 3 Handling Transparent Codes and Additional Codes During Non Procedure Protocol Data Communication 12 4 Example of Data Communication Using the Non Procedure Protocol 12 5 Handling Transparent Codes and Additional Codes During Bidirectional Protocol Data Communication 12 6 Example of Data Communication Using the Bidirectional Protocol A 12 Related Manual 1 Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application 13 COMMUNICATING WITH ASCII CODE ASCII BIN CONVERSION 13 1 ASCII BIN Conversion 13 2 Settings for ASCII BIN Conversion 13 3 Performing ASCII BIN Conversion for Data Communicated via Non Procedure Protocol 13 4 Example of Data Communication Using the Non Procedure Protocol 13 5 Performing ASCII BIN Conversion for Data Communicated Via the Bidirectional Protocol 13 6 Example of Data Communication Using the Bidirectional Protocol 14 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING EXTERNAL DEVICE AND PLC CPU M N CONFIGURATION 14 1 Data Communications Precautions 14 2 External Devices Interlock Conditions 14 3 Examples of Procedure for Data Communications with the PLC CPU 15 SWITCHING THE MODE AFTER STARTING 15 1 Mode Switching Operation and Contents that can be Changed 15 2 Mode Switching Precautions 15 3 I
301. ive data storage area depending on the data contents exchanged with the external device 1 When the receive complete code and received data count are set to GX Configurator SC both become valid In this case if the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code before data corresponding to the received data count it outputs X3 XA ON a reception read request signal to the sequence program For details on how to change the receive complete code and received data count see Section 8 4 7 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 2 The receive area and the received data list CH1 address 60014 601H to 7FFu Default The following shows the list of the receive area and the receive data for performing data reception using the non procedure protocol 1 Receive area The receive area is a memory area for storing the data received from the external device and the receive data count in order to read the receive data for the PLC CPU By default the receive area is assigned to addresses 600H to 7FFH CH1 side and AOOH to BFFH CH2 side Buffer memory r777 The receive data count units word byte are up to the value set to GX Configurator SC word byte units designation Receive data count storage area Writes the receive data storage count when the PLC CPU is requested to read the receive data Receive data storage area Stores the arbitrary data area o
302. ked operation setting b15 0 Normal 1 Error 516 Number of registered user frames Section 8 6 9 Depends i Not allowed registration Section Status 8 6 9 Section 9 1 2 of User s Manual Application Reference section 204 Ou No registration 1 or more Number of registered frames User frame registration status for confirmation of registration No 0 No registration 1 Registered x Bit corresponding to registration No is 0 ON 1 OFF Registration No 3E8H 1000 Address 205H b0 to Registration No 4AFH 1199 Address 211H b7 517 to 541 205H to 21DH For confirmation of user frame 42 iS Ex Number of registered default registration frames for system 543 me For confirmation Flash ROM system parameters write result X 544 3 Section 220 of flash ROM 0 Normal completion RW Not allowed 8 6 9 2201 write result Other than 1 error code Abnormal completion iaz Modem function error code error code when modem function is 545 being used 2211 0 Normal completion Other than 1 error code Abnormal completion Modem function sequence status 0 Idle 7 Modem disconnected 1 Waiting for initialization 8 Callback Request reception waiting 546 2 Initializing modem 9 Callback Modem disconnect waiting Section 222H 3 Waiting 10 Callback Delay time waiting ecto ee 4 Checking password 11 Callback Reconnecting 0 8 6 2 For confirmation 5 Communicating 12 Callback Rechecking password of mo
303. l RUN Normal operation display Normal Faulty or reset Valid ERR Error display 1 Error has occurred Normal NEU N he CH1 Waiting for MC nd MC command message U tout status on the C aiting for comma i g Valid Invalid Off 3 side display 2 message to be received __ being received CH1 Transmission status SD Data being transmitted Data not transmitted display Valid RD Reception status display Data being received Data not received NEU N he CH2 Waiting for MC nd MC command message U leutra status on the C aiting for comma i g Valid Invalid Off 3 side display 2 message to be received _ being received T issi MC command message CH2 SD eee status Data being transmitted g displa not transmitted Valid MC command message RD Reception status display Data being received not received x1 This LED comes on when an error occurs at Q series C24 hardware or during data communication x2 This LED displays the data communication status via MC protocol see chapter 10 On Waiting for the command message to be received from the external device Off Processing the command message received from the external device 3 This LED can be made valid also when GX Developer connection OH is specified in communication protocol setting 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 External Wiring This section explains wiring between the Q ser
304. l Basic X04 CH1 Reception abnormal detection E al Y00 CH1 Transmission request ee Y01 CH1 Reception data read completion iL Se Ji Received data count designation A4H 144H Chapter 6 of Receive complete code designation A5H 145H User s Manual Basic Receive user User frame use enable disable designation ADH 14DH First frame No designation 1st to 4th AEn to B1H 14Ex to 151H Last frame No designation ist to 4th B2uH to B5H 152H to 155H 2020 to 2023 2120 to 21234 Chapter 9 of 2024 to 2027 User s Manual Application 21244 to 2127 Transmission CR LF output designation B7H 157H user frame Output head pointer designation B8H 158H designation Output count designation B9H 159H i Chapter 6 of Timeout at No protocol 2014 2114 coer User s Manual Application Chapter 6 of Receive data clear request A8H 148H i User s Manual Basic User frame receive format designation 1st to 4th Exclusive format 1 received data count 1st to 4th 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 6 6 Bidirectional monitor Purpose Monitor the status and setting values of the data transmission using the bidirectional protocol Startup procedure Monitor screen CHL Bidirectional monitor Monitor screen CH1 Bidirectional monitor Of x Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting ite
305. le information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Seting va Setting item Data transmission result 0000 Data reception result 0000 Receive user frame nth 0 User frame being transmitted 0 gt 00 CH1 Transmission normal completion Off 01 Transmission abnormal completion Off x02 Transmission processing in progress Off x03 Reception data read request Off x04 Reception abnormal detection Off Y00 Transmission request Off 01 Reception data read completion Off r Flash ROM setting r Details Write to Fie sava Current value Monitoring module display Cannot execute test Read from File read Make text file Start monitor Stop monitor Execute test Close 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Monitor test items l Setting value storage Reference section containing Monitor test items F buffer memory address detailed explanation Data transmission result 257H 267H Chapter 10 of Data reception result 258H 268H User s Manual Basic Receive user frame nth 25BH 26BH Chapter 11 of User frame being transmitted B6H 156H User s Manual Application X00 CH1 Transmission normal completion ii gee tl X01 CH1 Transmission abnormal completion a a X02 CH1 Transmission processing in progress hee Chapter 6 of X03 CH1 Reception data read request i eS f User s Manua
306. le occurring it may be necessary for the data received up to the present time are cleared in the receiving device and for the data to be received again from the start The methods for clearing reception data in the Q Series C24 is shown below Either method may be used to clear the reception data as is necessary 1 Clear the reception data by the dedicated instruction CSET 2 Write to read from the reception data clear request area address A8H 148h FROM TO instruction 3 Clear the reception data by GX Configurator SC see Section 8 7 When transmitting data to an external device from the Q Series C24 do not execute a clear request of the reception data shown in this section If a reception data clear request is executed when transmitting data to an external device The Q Series C24 stops data transmission and terminates the dedicated instruction for transmission abnormally The transmission completed signal does not go ON If a reception data clear request is executed during data reception the data received up to that point are cleared 1 Receive data clear processing The Q series C24 performs the following procession when the receive data clear is performed The data received up to that point can be ignored e The receive data count up to that point is 0 The receive area in the buffer memory is not initialized e Set to the status prior to the start of data reception 2 Procedure for clearing the reception data b
307. line operation Flash ROM setting screen gt Setting screen User frame ofi xi Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 170 No 0000 Module model name 0J71C24N Setting item The data which can be changed is shown by Hff and the following byte Please specify the registering part of the control code as code Hex Ex 402024403 in case of registering a 5 bytes of data ST 02H C24 ETX 03H Setting value Ll User frame 1 H03e8 2 H03e9 3 H03ea 4 HO3eb 5 HO3ec 6 HO3ed 7 H03ee AUNA Ly Flash ROM setting Details Witte to File save module Read from File read module Cannot execute test Make text file Execute test Close Setting item cece Setting value storage Reference section containing Setting item i buffer memory address detailed explanation Chapter 9 of User frame 1 to 200 Peay User s Manual Application Use code to specify hexadecimal numbers in the control code registration field if QSCU is used for registering a user frame Example To register the 5 bytes of data STX 02h C24 and ETX 03h specify the following 02C24 03 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 4 2 Data for modem initialization registration Purpose Register the data for initializing the modem connected to the Q series C24 Startup procedure e Online operation Monitor screen
308. llowable receive data count With the normal completion the receive data within the allowable receive data count user designated is read from the receive data storage area in the buffer memory After the BIDIN instruction is executed the user designated read completion signal MO comes on for 1 scan The reading of received data is performed by the PLC CPU 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 9 7 SPBUSY Instruction This instruction reads the status of data transmission and reception executed with dedicated instructions Applicable device MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10_ Special module Direct JO O UO GD Internal device System user File register Index register Zn Constant Others Instruction Executing code condition Command SPBUSY G SPBUSY SPBUSY fo GP SPBUSY Set data Description I O signal of th a e O signal of t emodu e l l 7 User BIN16 bit 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit Head number of devices in which the read communication status is D stored System Device name Function 1 The function reads the execution status of a dedicated instruction directed to a module designated by the start I O signal and stores it in the device designated by D or later 2 The execution status is stored in D in the form of 1 at the corresponding bit when the processing of each instruction is started and 0 whe
309. m a Detecting a transmission error 1 The following device and input signal turn ON e BIDOUT instruction complete device 1 ERR LED ON signal XE XF 2 The transmission error code can be checked using the BIDOUT instruction control data S1 1 Or it can be checked by reading the data transmission result storage area in the buffer memory addresses 257H 267h For details on how to check the error code contents and corrective actions see Chapter 10 b How to turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code see Section 10 1 2 1 To turn off only the ERR LED write a 1 to the LED OFF request area addresses 0H 1h in the buffer memory 2 To turn off the ERR LED and clear the error code turn ON the ERR LED OFF request output signal YE YF Example To perform the ERR LED OFF and the error code clear on the CH1 side Read command MI YOE XOE 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Confirmation using the module and GX Configurator SC 1 Confirmation using the display LED When the Q series C24 detects an error including a reception error the ERR LED lights up See Chapter 10 Confirmation using GX Configurator SC e The monitor function is used to check for errors See Sections 8 6 3 and 8 6 6 e The ERR LED is turned off with the ERR LED OFF function See Section 8 6 10 Confirming the error code Use one of the following to confirm the error code GX Configu
310. m Current value Setting value Data transmission result 0000 Data reception result 0000 XO00 CH1 Transmission normal completion Off x01 Transmission abnormal completion Off x02 Transmission processing in progress Off x03 Reception data read request Off Y00 Transmission request Off Y01 Reception data read completion Off Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid Send receive valid designation r Flash ROM setting r Details Write to File sav Current value Monitoring module meag display Cannot execute test Read from A 5 _ module File read Make text file tart monito Stop monitor Execute te Close Monitor items rene Setting value storage Reference section containing Monitor items F buffer memory address detailed explanation Data transmission result 257H 267H Chapter 10 of Data reception result 258H 268H User s Manual Basic X00 CH1 Transmission normal completion i See X01 CH1 Transmission abnormal completion a E X02 CH1 Transmission processing in progress Chapter7of x03 CH1 Reception data read request Users Manual Basic Yoo CH1 Transmission request O Pel ve ch Rae f Section 7 3 of Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation 9BH 13BH f User s Manual Basic 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 6 7 PLC CPU monitoring monitor Purpose Monitor the operating status and setting values of the PLC CPU monitoring fun
311. m area 8269 8225 204D 214Dx 8270 8226 204En 214Ex are buns Number of registered word blocks designation 0 No designation It is possible to 1 to 10 Number of blocks of word devices designate a Number of registered bit blocks designation maximum of 10 0 No designation blocks in total 1 to 10 Number of blocks of bit devices PLC CPU abnormal monitoring designation 0 Do not monitor 1 Monitor oa ro Monitoring device designation 20501 21501 90H to CCH Device code 8273 to 8529 to Head device No designation ee 0 or more Head device No 2152 Read point designation 1 or more Number to read points Monitoring condition designation judgment condition 8276 8532 g n designation 2054n 21541 For designation esignation ar o of PLC CPU 1 or more Monitoring condition 0 R 8277 8533 monitoring Monitoring condition value designation 20551 2155 function At bit device 0 OFF 1 ON Chapter 2 No 1 At word device 0 to FFFFH Monitoring condition value of User s block Transmission pointer designation for condition Allowed Manual monitoring agreement transmission and data transmission Application device 1 to 100 Output head point send from nth Send the user frames designated in the following transmission frame No designation areas from the designated pointer position address CH1 side BAH to 11DH CH2 side 15AH to 1BDH Output co
312. m function disconnect monitor test eee Darr Secu ated court et et OJOO i se ceeston eat amaa O O OT Auto EA connection denial accumulated count Section a ast e a a a Os a 8 4 4 Circuit disconnect wait time PLC CPU watch use O O O O x Section EDE x EE x designation function count designation system Auto modem initialization designation setting Callback function designation mem nem Callback denial notification accumulated count heer mem O Data No for callback designation 1 to 10 Transmission control and other RS 232 control signal status CS CTS monitoring tests x RTS GR designation O O DTR ER designation CE OJS OX x x Transmission controlstartfreearea OT Of x x x Section Transmission Transmission controlendfreearea OTOT x x CX es controland Send Recv data monitoring designation OJ OJ x x x other system Action for buffer ful CO OT settings Stoby Tirer orerar e uaaa E ee Monitor buffer head address ie a a a x o e E TE Non procedure User frame receive format designation 1st 4th Section system setting Exclusive format 1 received data count 1st to 4th n re 8 4 7 N on proced re Timeout at No protocol monitor test Son no treneren sanra ref i Monitor test others Section Communication error clear request for CHO and to turn x x x x 8 6 9 LED off Section Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion fae eS Ese Auto refres
313. m the Q series C24 in the same ways as UC24 b Message transmission by printer function when using programs designed for UC24 1 Message transmission using the printer function of the UC24 can be implemented by the data transmission function that uses a user frame 2 For the PLC CPU register and send messages according to the User s Manual Application Messages handled by the UC24 will become user frames in the Q series C24 4 Data communication using the bidirectional protocol a Setting to add a sum check code to a message The setting to add a sum check code to a message has been changed It is set during switch setting operation by GX Developer b Data transmission reception 1 The same data transmission reception as used by UC24 C24 S8 can be performed 2 Create a new program for data communication upon checking functions and instructions used on the PLC CPU side in Chapter 7 Data transmission reception is performed using dedicated instructions 3 The external device can transmission receive data in the same way as the UC24 C24 S8 5 Others 1 The Q series C24 has other functions that are equivalent to those of UC24 C24 S8 which are not mentioned above 2 Check functions and specifications in this manual and the manuals listed below and use the applicable functions e User s Manual Application e Reference Manual App 12 App 12 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 3 2 Installing the Q series C24
314. make the settings and connect the cables Make the following switch settings from the GX Developer if there is to be no communication if the cables are not to be connected at the interface e Communication protocol setting Set between OH and 7H e Transmission setting communication rate setting Set all to OFF 2 The setting and data flow in linked operation a Set the related switches as follows when two Q series C24 interfaces are in linked operation Switch number Settings Setting value Operation setting b0 OFF Switch 1 Transmission setting Data bit setting Set each switch on both CH1 and CH2 sides to CH1 side a the same specification Communication rate setting Match the external device Communication protocol setting a Operation setting b0 ON S Transmission setting Data bit setting Set each switch on both CH1 and CH2 sides to CH2 side oa the same specification Communication rate setting Match the external device Communication protocol setting Switch 5 Station number setting Set according to d of 1 wi witch 3 wi 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q b Do not use the above settings for the following cases because linked operation cannot be performed 1 When using the QU71C24N R2 or QU71C24 R2 When an external device is not connected to either of the interfaces When the bidirectional protocol is used for data communication When communicating data with an external
315. mission only is performed using only CH1 RS 232 connection a Output instruction Tp St Die Cr x 1000 0 07 xX Ds T1 Tp The time from the start of execution of the Output instruction to the End processing of the sequence scan at the completion of the Output instruction execution ms St Scan time Die Data length of 1 byte at data transmission number of bits Cr Communication rate bps Ds Number of bytes of transmission data T1 QJ71C24N R2 R4 T1 3 0 QJ71C24 R2 T1 4 86 x1 This stands for the time range of processing Tp Start of the Output Start of the End processing of instruction execution y Tp aa the scan at the completion of Step 0 END r the Output instruction execution Sequence program __ Transmission command l Output instruction One scan Output instruction complete device Q series C24 side Transmission data External device side Calculation example Estimate the time required to process the Output instruction when transmitting 100 bytes of data using the non procedure protocol with the QJ71C24N Unit ms e Scan time 10ms e Data length 10 bits 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity bit e Communication rate 19200 bps 10 10 19200 X 1000 0 07 X 100 3 0 72 08 ms App 14 App 14 APPENDIX MELSEC Q b Input instruction Tp Sr 0 09 Xx Dr T2 Tp 1 Time from the start of exe
316. module ceeeeee App 10 Connecting the RS 232 interface 4 4 6 Connecting the RS 422 485 interface 4 8 Comparison of the function 0 06 App 1 CSET Receive data clear 6 14 9 19 Data bitis ais i aa one Qa aboe ets ne 4 14 Data communication functions 2 5 Data format c ccccececeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeeaes 3 1 Data reception by receive complete code 6 3 Dedicated instruction list eee 9 1 Dedicated instructions eects 9 1 ERR LE Dinneri tiia 10 6 Error code table ccscceseeeeeeeeeeees 10 15 Explanation of utility package operation 8 6 External dimensions e cee eeeeeeeee App 18 Index 1 F G H 1 L Full duplex communications 0 0 7 24 Function lists of the Q series C24 3 11 Functions available with utility package 8 2 GX Configurator SC ee A 20 2 2 8 1 GX Configurator SC function list 3 13 GX Deve loper cccccccccscceseeseeseesees A 20 2 2 H W gate OFF time ecceceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeees 3 9 How to detect reception error DidireCtional e ee eeeeseeneeeneeeeeeeneeeneeees 7 13 How to detect reception error MON procedure 6 17 How to detect transmission errors DidireCtional aasa 7 22 How to detect transmission errors MON Procedure jore 6 28 How to read the setting status of SWITCHES miii nira aleve ae 10 11 I O a
317. module for the MELSECNET 10 remote I O station compatible with the QnA A series Link special register x2 PLC CPU monitoring can be registered using the MC protocol or GX Configurator SC The dedicated instruction CSET cannot be used for registration The device to be monitored can be registered within the device range of the MELECNET H remote O station 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 The dedicated instructions are unavailable for the MELSECNET H remote I O station For the functions that use the dedicated instructions to make communication perform programming by the following methods Dedicated instruction Method Explanation section FROM TO Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction Appendix 9 2 ONDEMAND Appendix 9 3 Appendix 9 4 Appendix 9 5 and I O signal Appendix 9 4 9 5 SPBUSY Perform programming using the receive data clear request CSET Receive data clear Appendix 9 6 area of the buffer memory Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction No method BUFRCVS Data cannot be received using an interrupt program Perform programming using the REMFR REMTO instruction Ap Appendix 9 7 _ 9 7 CSET Initial setting and I O signal Appendix 9 8 No method CSET PLC CPU monitoring f Register delete the PLC CPU using the MC protocol or GX function Configurator SC Appendix 9 9 Appendix 9 11 and I O signal Appendix 9 10 Perform programming
318. monitoring monitor Section 8 6 7 Transmission user frame No designation monitor Section 8 6 8 Monitor test others Section 8 6 9 Function MC protocol monitor Non procedure monitor test System setting default system setting write Section 8 4 11 Section 8 4 12 Flash ROM write allow prohibit designation 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 6 1 X Y monitor test Purpose Perform the monitoring of I O signals and testing of output signals Startup procedure Monitor screen gt X Y monitor test Monitor test screen XZY monitor test BE Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value lt 00 CH1 Transmission normal completion Off X01 Transmission abnormal completion Off x02 Transmission processing in progress Off x03 Reception data read request Off x04 Reception abnormal detection Off x06 Mode switching Off SOE ERR occurrence Off X14 Global signal Off x07 CH2 Transmission normal completion Off x08 Transmission abnormal completion Off x09 Transmission processing in progress Off X r Flash ROM setting r Details Writeto Ei Curent value Monitoring module nae display Cannot execute test feed fom File read Make text file Start monitor Stop monitor Execute test Close Monitor test items Mo
319. n Start I O signal of the module Un ae user _ emet bit 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit User Head number of the devices in which control data is stored Len system Device name Head number of the devices in which transmission data is stored User Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution system Bit The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data e Set transmission channel Transmission channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side Transmission result by a BIDOUT instruction ee are stored Transmission result System 0 Normal Other than 0 Error code Transmission data Rad x1 For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 10 of the User s Manual Basic x2 When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated x3 The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the BIDOUT instructions e System The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the BIDOUT instructions 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function Error MELSEC Q 1 The function sends data stored in the device designated in S2 and succeeding devices according to the control data of the device designated in S1 and succe
320. n 2 orlater specifications Data transmission reception at low Function version B O speed 50 bps Clearing reception data by a dedicated instruction G Function version B O O O Transmission of the PLC CPU monitoring information through Function version B SWODSC OSOU Q 20C or later Communication combined use of the modem function via modem Automation initialization of modem O Function version B O Version 1 0 or later Versions prior to function or later whose first SW0D5C QSCU E Callback 5 digits of the serial Version 7 or later 40E No are 03043 me not usable Non procedure and non reception monitoring time format designation O x O O Version 2 or later Transmission control start end free area designation g X O O Version 2 or later d R SWOD5C QSCU 05H OB 11H 17H o Function version B 20C or later Addition of 04H OAH x Version 2 or later changeable data Function version B O O to the user frame E5y EBH or later whose first Version 2 06G or i 5 digits of the serial ms later No are 06062 Reception according to user frames SW0D5C QSCU E reception according to format 1 o Function v rsion B o o 20C or later Multiple specification of transparent codes for SWOD5C QSCU E transmission O Function version B Oo O 20C or later Switching the GX Developer connection mode by switching the mode O x o o o Communication data monitoring function O x O Version 8 or later Version 2 or later Function version B or later whose first UI
321. n monitoring setting with GX Configurator SC a About the automatic refresh setting 1 When reading writing data created by the automatic refresh setting using PLC the read write operation should be performed by GX Developer It cannot be performed from GX Configurator SC 2 The devices used for the automatic refresh setting must be of the types M B D or W 1 GX Configurator SC should be connected to a MELECNET H remote I O station before the monitoring setting 2 The MELECNET H remote I O station should be reset after changing the setting 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS 2 6 Checking the Function Version Serial No and Software Version MELSEC Q This section explains how to check the the function version serial No and software version of related products that can use the functions added by the improvement of the Q series C24 1 Correspondence of related products for use additional functions of Q series C24 Function version of the Q series C24 Version of related product Additional function QU71C24N QJ71C24 R2 CPU module GX Developer GX Configurator R2 R4 SC Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT Function version B O RS and DTR signal status designation A Transmission Support for 230400 bps O O O Versio
322. n of on demand data transmission On demand execution result acquisition command Reads the on demand execution result of the buffer memory to D8 LED ON status acquisition command Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Reads the LED ON status of the buffer memory to D J Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the transmission request signal App 36 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 4 When receiving data using nonprocedural or bidirectional protocol App 37 The following program example receives data under the nonprocedural protocol or bidirectional protocol using the REMFR instruction and I O signals Refer to Chapter 6 for the communication using the nonprocedural protocol Refer to Chapter 7 for the communication using the bidirectional protocol Refer to Chapter 11 of the User s Manual Application for data communication using the user frames 1 Program conditions The following program receives data from the external device by communication using the nonprocedural protocol then turns ON the receive read request signal X1003 and reads the received data from the QU71C24N buffer memory to the PLC CPU a Devices used Error Code read signal ceeceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeieeeeee X1023 Receive read request signal ceeceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeee M10 Received data acquisition command
323. n of the MC protocol in order to check the connection between the Q series C24 and an external device the communication function of each device and the operation of the communication program of the external device Procedure 1 Connecting the Q series C24 to an external device Turn off the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed and connect a communication cable to an external device to perform data communication using the MC protocol see Section 4 4 Procedure 2 Switch setting with GX Developer 1 Set the switch settings with GX Developer as shown in Section 4 5 and write the parameters to the PLC CPU in order to perform data communication using the MC protocol 2 The following shows an example of the settings when performing a loopback test on the interface on the CH1 side e Switch 1 0544H Transmission Operation setting Independent operation setting Data bit 7 bit Parity bit Yes odd Stop bit 1 bit Sum check code No Write during RUN Allowed Setting modification Prohibited Communication rate setting 9600 bps e Switch 2 0001H Communication protocol setting MC protocol format 1 e Switch 3 0O000H e Switch 4 0000H e Switch 5 0000H Station number setting O station Procedure 3 Performing a loopback test 1 Setthe PLC CPU to STOP status and turn the power on or reset the CPU communication is enabled in about one second 2 Create a program for a loopback test on the exte
324. n the processing is completed The processing of each instruction is completed when the completion flag of each instruction is turned from on to off b15 to b4b3b2b1b0 D 0 Stores the execution status of ONDEMAND OUTPUT PRR and BIDOUT instructions directed to channel 1 Stores the execution status of INPUT and BIDIN instructions directed to channel 1 Stores the execution status of ONDEMAND OUTPUT PRR and BIDOUT instructions directed to channel 2 Stores the execution status of INPUT and BIDIN instructions directed to channel 2 Stores the execution status of GETE and PUTE instructions osi eta stares 0 3 The SPBUSY instruction is executed for every scan while the read command is ON if the system is executing during ON And the instruction will be executed for a single scan when the read command rises from OFF to ON if the system is starting up 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Error 1 Incase of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic Program example A program that reads the communication status of a target module When input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F a target module and sto
325. n using the MC protocol identical to the communication functions of the dedicated protocol of UC24 C24 S8 a Communication protocol setting Data communication is performed using an A compatible 1C frame by setting the communication protocol setting of the Q series C24 specified by GX Developer to the same form as set in the mode setting switch of UC24 C24 S8 App 10 App 10 APPENDIX MELSEC Q b Command message and response message 1 The message format used in the data communication using the A compatible 1C frame is the same as the message format of UC24 C24 S8 2 Check available commands and devices that can be accessed in Chapter 8 of the Reference Manual and access the PLC CPU from the external device 3 For the QCPU only read write of device memory is possible For the range of devices that can be accessed see Section 5 2 1 of the Reference Manual The devices added to the QCPU i e the latch relay L step relay S and file register R devices are accessed using commands for QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frames It is necessary to create new programs O Accessing other stations 1 When accessing other station s PLC CPU via the MELSECNET 10 Valid module during other station access must be designated in the parameter setting by GX Developer 2 Check the stations that can be accessed in Chapter 5 of the Reference Manual and access the PLC CPU from the external device 3 When it is necessary to
326. nA Compatible 2C Frames 4 4 Precautions on the Data Communication 4 5 Example of Data Communication Using QnA Compatible 2C Frames 5 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE A COMPATIBLE 1C FRAMES 5 1 Control Procedures and Message Formats 5 2 Device Memory Read Write 5 3 Extension File Register Read and Write 5 4 Reading and Writing in the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module 5 5 Loopback Test 6 WHEN COMMUNICATING USING THE A COMPATIBLE 1E FRAMES 6 1 Message Formats and Control Procedures 6 2 List of Commands and Functions for A Compatible 1E Frames 6 3 Device Memory Read Write 6 4 Extension File Register Read and Write 6 5 Reading and Writing in the Buffer Memory of an Intelligent Function Module APPENDIX Appendix 1 Reading and Writing by Designation of the Device Memory Extension Appendix 2 Reading from and Writing to the Buffer Memory Appendix 3 Processing Time of the PLC CPU Side While Communicating Using the MC Protocol About Manuals The following table lists the manuals relating to this product Please order the desired manual s as needed Related manuals Model Code Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Application This manual explains the specifications and operating procedures for the special module functions the SH 080007 settings for use of special functions and data communication method for use with external devices 13JL87 sold separately Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication
327. nabled Disabled Transmission control F CD signal control Enabled Disabled DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff control DC2 DC4 control e DTR DSR signal control and DC code control are selected by the user Line configuration RS 232 ee oa a gt y Connection gt 2 RS 422 485 1 1 1 n n 1 min DOO O O 1 1 1 n nt m n communication 1 Non proced protocol 1 1 1 n n 1 1 1 communicati 1 Bidirectional Line configuration protocols 1 1 Data communicati communication unication MC protocols 1 1 1 n m n 2 communica Non proced protocol 1 1 1 n n 1 1 1 1 n n 1 communicati Bidirectional protocols 1 1 communication TRS Maximum 15 m Maximum 15 m l Vi Fi y distance RS 422 485 Maximum 1200 m 4592 4 ft Maximum 1200 m 4592 4 ft overall distance overall distance Flash ROM write count Maximum 100 000 times to the same area Number of occupied 1 O points 32 points per slot I O assignment Intelli 32 points 3 7 0 127 OP HRV SV Outside diameter 8 5mm 0 33in or more Recommended Oki Electric Cable Co Ltd Applicable number is specified in O cable SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P Outside diameter approx 6 5mm 0 26 in Mitsubishi Cable Industries LTD SPEV SB 0 2 x 3P Outside diameter approx 7 5mm 0 3 in Mitsubishi Cable Industries LTD 4 D sub 9 pin male screw type 5 f ee i 98 3 86 in H X 27 4 1 08 in W X 90 3 54 in D mm 0 20kg 0 44lb 1 Set to transfer data with exter
328. nal devices using a full duplex communication system when the Q series C24 is started For switching to a half duplex communication system refer to the User s Manual Application 2 Indicates possible combinations when connecting the PLC CPU and external devices external device side PLC CPU side The total number of n and m n is up to 32 stations x3 In order to use the Q series C24 it is necessary to set the GX Developer switches To set the GX Developer switches refer to section 4 5 4 Recommended cables SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P and SPEV SB 0 2 X 3P are equivalent in the electrical characteristics but partially different in the outside diameter internal wire colors etc 5 See Section 3 2 1 3 for the recommended connector Enabled Enabled 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification The following shows the RS 232 interface specifications 3 2 1 RS 232 connector specifications The following shows the specifications of the RS 232 connector that connects the Q series C24 to an external device Signal direction Pin number Signal Signal name abbreviation C24 gt External device 1 CD Carrier detect tM 2 RD RXD Receive data 3 SD TXD Send data gt 4 DTR ER Data terminal ready gt 5 SG Signal ground gt 6 DSR DR Dataset ready So 7 RS RTS Request to send oe 8 CS CTS Clear to send t 9 RI Cl Call Indicate t 1 T
329. nction designation Auto Callback connection during fixed Setting 4 Callback connection during designated number Setting 5 Section 8193 Callback connection during max designated number is 10 Setting 6 8 4 4 2001 For callback Auto Callback connection during fixed Setting 1 Chapter 3 of j Auto Callback connection Allowed User s during designated number Setting 2 Manual Auto Callback connection during max designated number is 10 Setting Ja Application 8194 Callback denial notification accumulated count designation Ou Not specified 2002 a to FFFFu Notification accumulated number count 1 1 ne B a Use prohibited System area 8199 Auto modem initialization designation 2007H 0 Do not auto initialize _1 Auto initialize Section 8200 Modem initialization time DR DSR signal valid invalid designation 8 4 4 2008H For designation 0 Do not ignore DR signal 1 Ignore DR signal 1 ae of modem Complete signal handling for modem function designation Allowed sine 2009H function 2 0 Do not turn on off X13 to X16 1 Manual 1 Turn on off X13 to X16 Application 8202 Wait time of notification designation 200AH 0000H to FFFFH Wait time a s 10 8203 200Bx Use prohibited Sysemarea area Remote password mismatch notification count designation 8204 200CH OH No designation Section 5 1 5 For remote 1H to FFFFH Notification times Section 8 4 4 Chap
330. nd files shown below that are created with utility package are also used by GX Developer operation Figure 8 1 shows an operation used to create data with utility package lt Intelligent function module parameters gt a This data is created with the auto refresh settings and stored in the intelligent function module parameter file of the project to be created using GX Developer Project Program Parameters PLC Parameters t Network Parameters Intelligent Function Module Parameters b Steps 1 to 3 shown in Figure 8 1 are performed using the following operations 1 Operating from GX Developer Project gt Open existing project Save project Save project as 2 Operating from the utility parameter setting module selection screen File File read File save 3 Operating from the GX Developer Online gt Read from PLC Write to PLC gt Intelligent function module parameters Or operate from the utility parameter setting module selection screen Online Read from PLC Write to PLC 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q lt Flash ROM data gt a The data set in Flash ROM setting can be saved in the desired directory separately from the GX Developer project b Operations 4 and 5 shown in Figure 8 1 are performed as follows 4 This operation can be performed from the Flash ROM setting screen or Monitor test screen Flash ROM setting screen gt File read
331. neaeeaees 8 27 8 4 10 Transmission user frame No designation system Setting eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeteeeteeteeeteeeteeeeees 8 29 8 4 11 Resetting the buffer memory flash ROM setting values to the default values cseeeeee 8 30 8 4 12 Flash ROM write allow prohibit Setting ceccceceeceeeeeeeceeceeeeaeeeeceeeeeeeaesaeseeeeeesaesaeseetaesaeseeseeeaees 8 30 8 5 Auto Retresh Setting ci 2y rani iatat aan Milan Laveen lve eet Len vn el ae 8 31 86 gt MOMO TEST scenic cic A A ATI AAR RE AE AAE AEREA AAR A TIe A EA ea ERNA AA REENEN 8 32 8 6 1 X Y monttas t iiini el ae eee ae ee ee ed a eee A E ev ee eee eee re 8 33 8 6 2 Modem function MOnitor test sorsoran ea aE aeS AAAA ANERE SEENEN EANN SPANA n 8 34 8 6 3 Transmission control and others monitor test ee eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeseeeteeeteeeeeeteaees 8 37 8 6 4 MG protocol MONTON seis ve eetch a a a aeae raae r a aa aaa a aaar aaa aa eaaa aaa 8 39 A 9 A 9 8 6 5 Non procedure MOnitor test ee ceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeseeeeeeeeaaes 8 41 8 6 6 Bidirectional Nonio ns wins inane ainda ang Maa Ag AG Atala ings 8 43 8 6 7 PLO GPU Monitoring On itor dessein naiara aa aaaea aeaa aaao ae net aaa Kraana aea Saaana iaaah aae ankara Saanaa 8 44 8 6 8 Transmission user frame No designation MOnItOr sssssssssesrssrssrsnsirsinsinstnstnntnstnntnntnnnnntnnnnnnnnnn 8 46 8 6 9 Monitor te
332. nees DO Frame Noar ennaa aA aata ed aAA anaa eacasea D1 Delete result 2 4 4 28 ek ee ei itai D2 b Buffer memory settings used in this example These settings assume that the user frame registered in Appendix 9 9 is deleted Address Decimal Hexadecimal Setting Name value Register read delete instructions Frame No direction 03E8H Registration read delete result storage Is e 38 App 52 App 52 APPENDIX 2 Program examples lt Delete command gt X1030 1 I PLs lt Setting of delete instruction gt M10 M11 X101E H K3 H3E8 K2 M100 M101 f SET M101 I SET lt Flash ROM write request gt M11 X1018 SET X1018 m_a lt Read of delete result gt M2 XIOIE HK H Z REWFR ul KA KI HO H4 D2 KI M102 M103 SET M103 SET RST RST App 53 M10 DO D1 M100 M11 M200 Y1018 M12 M102 M201 M202 Y1018 M11 MELSEC Q Changes the delete command into pulses Sets the delete instruction Sets the frame No Transfers the setting values to the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory Sets the delete flag Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Turns ON the flash ROM read request signal Delete result acquisition command Reads the delete result from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D2 Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the flash
333. ngs do not match transmission rates e With a multidrop link the e Check if the terminal resistor 110 Q or 330 Q terminal resistor is not in case of the Q series C24 is connected to the connected correctly stations at both ends of the link e When CH1 and CH2 are e When using CH1 and CH2 independently used to the linked mode check that the Q series C24 is not in the linked there is an interface mode without cable e When using CH1 and CH2 in the linked mode connection also connect the cable to both of the interfaces If the cable is not connected to one of the interfaces when CH1 and CH2 are used in the linked mode noise may enter and destroy the data and Data cannot be decoded or Communication error cause may occur 10 39 10 39 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 13 Troubleshooting when it is unclear whether the communication error cause is in the Q series C24 or an external device Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure e Test the Q series C24 as described below to check where the cause is Check the hardware e The Q series C24 must be installed firmly e The pins of the Q series C24 must not be bent or otherwise abnormal Test the Q series C24 alone See Section 4 7 e ROM RAM switch test must not generate any errors Self loopback test must not generate any errors Check the state of the PLC CPU e There must not be any errors that stop PLC CPU operation Whe
334. ngth of the data field can be specified freely for each combination of user frames for reception set by the user Receiving 1 byte providing ACK NAK only is also possible by setting the data length of the data field to 0 Chapter 11 of User s Manual Application 1 10 1 OVERVIEW Function Multiple specification of transparent codes for transmission QU71C24N R2 R4 QU71C24 R2 Outline of function This function allows specification of a maximum of 10 types of transparent codes for transmission per interface when sending data using one of the following protocols Non procedure protocol Bidirectional protocol MELSEC Q erence section Chapter 12 of User s Manual Application Switching to the GX Developer connection mode by switching the mode This functions allows the GX Developer connection mode to be switched by an external device or the PLC CPU Chapter 15 of User s Manual Application Section 3 13 of Reference Manual Communication data monitoring function This function allows the monitoring of communication data transmitted on the communication network of the Q series C24 and an external device Chapter 16 of User s Manual Application Operating Manual Protocol FB support function UINI instruction The UINI instruction allows change of the mode transmission specifications and host station No of the Q series C24 Chapter 17 of User s Manual A
335. nication protocol setting CH1 side switch 2 CH2 side switch 4 F GX Developer communication rate and transmission specifications are OH GX Developer connection p automatically set For communication with ASCII code in the specified form of an A compatible 1C MC protocol Format 3 frame or QnA compatible 2C 3C 4C frame 3H e ee 8H For linked operation setting tos operated with the communication protocol of the CH2 side mto Settingprohibtea ROM RAM switch test For self diagnosis of the modules Individual station loopback test For checking operation of each interface of the modules 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q d Station number setting switch 5 common for both CH1 and CH2 sides e This setting is for communication using the MC protocol e When several the Q series C24s are connected on the same line with multidrop connection set the station number designated in the data items of the transmission frame in each external device to 0 to 31 OH to 1FH x This number designates which external device is to be communicated with the Q series C24 e Set the station number to 0 when the system configuration of the external device and the PLC CPU is 1 1 Q series C24 ee S a Te Station 0 Station 1 Station 2 Station 31 If the communication of data with external device is to be started check the specifications of the functions to be used and then
336. nitial setting Automatic refresh setting QJ71C24N 0 not used 46 Maximum number of settings QJ71C24N R2 0 not used 47 Maximum number of settings QJ71C24N R4 46 Maximum number of settings QJ71C24 46 Maximum number of settings QJ71C24 R2 47 Maximum number of settings Example Counting the number of parameter settings in the automatic refresh setting Auto refresh setting _ o x Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24 N N R4 Module side Module side PLC side Setting item Buffer size Transfer emia Device word count Flash ROM access register read delete 1 1 gt DO result CH1 LED ON status communications error 1 1 2 D1 status CH2 LED ON status communications error 1 1 gt D2 status Switch setting error mode switching error 1 1 gt D3 The number of settings in this one line is status Number of registered user frame 1 1 D4 counted as one setting Flash ROM system parameters write result 1 1 gt D5 The number of settings IS not counted by columns Modem TET ERT 7 7 gt Ibe Add up all the setting items in this setting screen Modem function sequence status TI T T gt D7 al then add them to the total for the other intelligent function modules to get a grand total Make text file End setup Cancel 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 2 2 Operating environment The oper
337. nitor test items i buffer memory address detailed explanation X00 CH1 Transmission normal completion o X01 CH1 Transmission abnormal completion X02 CH1 Transmission processing inprogress X0E CH1 ERR Occurrence oo X0E CH1 ERR Occurrence X1A CH1 Global signal Section 3 8 Y18 Flash ROM write request Y19 Flash ROM system setting request Y1C System setting default request to X08 CH2 Transmission abnormal completion X07 CH2 Transmission normal completion a 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 8 6 2 Modem function monitor test Purpose for monitor test MELSEC Q Monitor test the operating status and setting values of the modem function Startup procedure Monitor screen gt Modem function monitor test Monitor test screen Modem function monitor test Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Module model name QJ71C24N Start 1 0 No 0000 BE Setting item Current value Modem function error code 000 Setting value Modem function sequence status Idle status C indicates callback Number of data registrations for connection Number of data registrations for initialization Number of notification execution Data storage area 1 notification execution data No 2 notification execution data No 3 notification execution data No 4 notification execution data No
338. nitoring information using the modem function OO Status control of the PLC CPUs remote RUN STOP ete OO OT Turing on off input signals of the Q series C24 from an external device global function OO Communication using non procedure protocol Communication with ASCII code Read write of device memory Data transmission reception in any format Data transmission reception using user frames Data reception using format 0 2 Data reception using format 1 Data reception by interrupt programs Monitoring the PLC CPUs PLC CPU monitoring function Transmission of the monitoring information using the modem function E RAE ASCII data transmission reception by ASCII BIN conversion o O TONo Data transmission reception by specifying transparent code Specification of Receive transparent code o Ret Ee Specification of Transmission transparent 1st 3 o olo Multiple specification of Transmission transparent 2nd to 10th Emrika Reception data clear by dedicated instruction CSET instruction Bomar App 1 App 1 APPENDIX MELSEC Q function version Function QJ71C24N QJ71C24 R2 R4 R2 Communication using bidirectional protocol Data transmission reception in any format ica Boake Data reception by interrupt programs Or ASCII data transmission reception by ASCII BIN conversion Data transmission reception by specifying transparent code Specification of Receiv
339. nly the data up to the allowable received data count will be stored and the excess data will be discarded 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 Receive data can also be read using interrupt programs For more details on reading receive data with interrupt programs see Chapter 4 of the User s Manual Application Note that if the reading of data received from the same interface is to be performed it is not possible to combine the reading of data received by the main program and reading of data received by the interrupt program Accordingly use one or the other of the above programs to read the data received 2 The SPBUSY instruction is used to read the execution status when using a dedicated instruction See Chapter 9 More than one BIDIN instruction cannot be executed simultaneously Execute the next BIDIN instruction only after the execution of the first BIDIN instruction is completed If the communication data count is set in byte units and the receive data count is an odd byte when requesting the reading of receive data to the PLC CPU OOH is stored in the higher byte of the final data storage position in the receive data storage area 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 1 4 How to detect reception errors This section explains how to detect errors that may occur when receiving data from the external device The following items are considered as the primary
340. nnection example EL LINE II Connection example 1 RS 422 KS 1 KS 10P RS 485 KS 485 Connection example 3 RS 422 485 1 1 1 n m n RS 232 KS 485 Connection example 4 Connection example 2 App 20 App 20 APPENDIX App 21 2 Connection example Connection example 1 MELSEC Q EL LINE II Q series C24 side RS232 signal RS422 signal External device side cD it 1 FG swt Sw2 5 FG 2 2 RDA RD TXD 1 OFF 1 OFF TX 15 hl SD 3 3 RXD RDB 5 A 4 2 ON 2 OFF 6 SDA DIR 5 RTS l orF l3 OFF Pe i i SB ee 6 30 oa 4 ON 4 OFF 3 DSRA DSR P DTR RTS 46 R 5 OFF 5 OFF DSRB 5 Rs 6 DSR 8 8 6 ON 6 OFF Ce CS CD CTS 20 DTRB RI 2 7 sG 7 OFF 7 OFF sa torl4 APSA ola RTSB CTSA CTSB SG x e The CD terminal check setting should be set to No check according to the explanation in Section 3 2 1 1 DC code control or DTR DSR control becomes possible for transmission control Connection example 2 KS 1 KS 1 OP External device side
341. normal Receive data Receive ee i count storage pE detection rea Head data complete code STX A B C D EJF G H_ ETX 024 414 42x 43x 444 45x 46 471 481 OSH 4 Transmission data External device Receive data A INPUT storage area CG instruction Q series C24 ready signal X1E Reception data read request X3 Reception abnormal X4 detection signal INPUT instruction INPUT instruction complete device INPUT instruction complete device 1 normal completion abnormal completion Receive data count storage area Buffer memory address 600x Receive data storage area Receive data Buffer memory addresses 6011 to ERR LED lights up 2 Reception abnormal detection data Data reception x When the data from G to in the reception message shown in the figure above is received normally the data is stored in the Q series C24 OS area The receive data stored in the OS area will be read to the PLC CPU in the succeeding read operation 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 6 Received data count and receive complete code settings The following default values have been set for the received data count and receive complete code that are used for data reception with the non procedure protocol If it is necessary to change the following default settings change the settings on the GX Configu
342. not e MC Non Bi allowed section 3044 sae aron Callback permit accumulated count 0 or more Accumulated coun Callback denial accumulated count Section 0 or more Accumulated coun 8 6 2 For callback Auto callback connection permit accumulated count Not allowed Chapter 3 of function 0 or more Accumulated coun User s Auto callback connection denial accumulated count applica ea 0 or more Accumulated coun Accumulated count of callback receive procedure cancel 0 or more Accumulated coun 8949 to 8954 A Use prohibited System area i ed 8955 22FBx Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion RTE 0 or more Accumulated count of normal completion 3 For the remote ee password Accumulated count of unlock process abnormal completion Not allowed Chapter 3 of 8956 22FCH function processing User s 0 or more Accumulated count of abnormal completion Manual Application 8957 to 8958 ae 22FDu OEN Use prohibited System area Section 5 1 5 For the remote Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit disconnection H E ere 8959 22FFH password 0 or more Accumulated count of lock process based on circuit Not allowed Chapter 3 of function disconnection User s Manual Application 9216 2400 Use prohibited 9217 2401n Soa Flash ROM write count o A kigeationed 0 to 1000 Write count housing 9218 to 9427 ae Boa iene User free area 2 6656 words 26001 ia 3FFFH x
343. ns Enabled b8 to b15 me oe 19200bps Non procedure protocol 0006H Communication protocol setting or or bidirectional protocol 0007H switens Station number setting Stationo 00008 c Buffer memory settings used in this example a FE O nme O ei Name value 150 96H Word byte units designation 162 A2H Transmission buffer memory head address designation 04001 163 A3H Transmission buffer memory length designation 0200H 599 257H App 39 Data transmission result App 39 APPENDIX 2 Program example lt Transmission command gt X1024 X1000 X1001 Y1000 1 HF if iF LPLS lt Setting of transmission data gt M10 X101E K KR _ni0 ABCDEFGH _f MoV HOAOD mov K5 7z REMTO J1 Kl KI HO H400 D10 K6 lt Transmission request gt M100 M101 SET w01 lt hl lt Processing for normal completion gt X1000 SET RST lt Processing for abnormal completion gt X1001 SET PLS lt Abnormal completion Read of data transmission result gt M1 XIO1E H 17 REWER UI KA KI HO H257 D20 KI M102 W103 i f r j SET W103 App 40 M10 D11 D15 D10 M100 Y1000 M200 M300 Y1000 M301 M11 M102 M201 M202 Y1000 tri e J Lo a oe J MELSEC Q Changes the transmission command into pulses Sets the transmission data Sets the transmission data count Transfers the setting value to
344. ns error 7 T gt status Switch setting error mode switching error 1 1 gt status Number of registered user frame 1 J Flash ROM system parameters write result 1 1 gt Modem function error code 1 7 gt Modem function sequence status 1 1 gt E Make text fie End setup Cancel Moritor Test Exit Monitor test Select the parameter setting module for monitor test See Screen 4 6 Monitor test screen Module type Seal Conmurications Module Stat V O No 0000 Module model name QU71C24N Current value display Make tet fie e Ee Ee See Section 8 4 See Section 8 6 1 When the setting operation is complete in each system setting screen register the system setting data in the flash ROM then restart the PLC CPU resume data transmission 2 With the Q series C24 monitoring testing and reading writing of setting values can be performed via online operation 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q The following diagram illustrates the overview of a procedure in which the GX Configurator SC is used to change the system setting values of the Q series C24 and save the new values to a file or write them to the Q series C24 s flash ROM Do you wish to NO change the setting values via Offline operation Go to 1 setting via online operation
345. nsmission sequence status For confirmation of MC protocol communication status 0 Waiting for receiving command 1 Receiving command 2 Command reception complete Section 3 Waiting to access PLC CPU 8 6 4 4 Accessing PLC CPU Section 5 PLC CPU access complete 10 1 4 6 Response message transmission On demand execution result 0 Normal completion 1 or more Abnormal completion error code For confirmation Data transmission result Chapter 6 of communica 0 Normal completion Chapter 7 tion result 1 or more Abnormal completion error code Section Data reception result 8 6 5 0 Normal completion Section 1 or more Abnormal completion error code 8 6 6 Not allowed MC protocol transmission error code Section excludes A compatible 1C frame communication RW 864 0 No error 1 or more Transmission error code Pc 1 to 4 Combination of user frame No designations for reception Transmission data count designation 0 No designation 1 or more Number of send data Transmission data designation Chapter 6 3 Chapter 7 Teanemission rece Data to be sent to an external device m eta Section ive area Receive data count Number of data for which read is requested 8 4 5 0 No receive data 1 or more Number of receive data Section Receive data 8 4 7 Data received from an external device System area Receive user frame nth Not allowed 0 Not received Section 8 6 5 message es i Semasa O f 4 For user set S was 3940 words Not allowed
346. o 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Protocol Error code Hexa Error Contents Corrective action Bidire decimal ctional Change the write destination to User frame F i an unwritten frame No 7E524 e A written frame No overwrite request was issued a overwrite error When overwriting delete the given No beforehand e A nonexistent command was designated in a Check and correct the external User frame access subcommand f i 7E53H device transmit message and data error e Byte count exceeding the number of bytes that can nee restart data communications be requested was designated Flash ROM write all hibi ignation f X ine a Ol Write a low prohibit designation from G Set to ON at GX Configurator 7E54 Modification Configurator SC is set to OFF sc H s allowed error e At the switch setting on GX Developer modification N X Devel allowed switch was set to OFF Set to ON at OX Developar User frame data Check and correct the external 7E55x e There is an error in the user frame variable data device transmit message and error ee restart data communications 7E56x e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error Flash ROM write e Re execute the write operation 7E57u e Cannot write to Flash ROM normally If the error is generated again error replace the module e Check and correct the contents r ve of the external device transmit eee e There was an error in the mode No or transmission Mode modification LA
347. o Normal completion of transmission Lo Turns OFF the transmission request signal Lo Abnormal completion of transmission Transmission result acquisition instruction Reads the data transmission result of the buffer memory to D20 bed Normal completion of REMFR instruction Lo Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the transmission request signal Lo App 45 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 8 When performing initial setting The following program example performs initial setting using the REMTO instruction Execute this program when changing the default values of the Q series C24 buffer memory Refer to Chapter 8 when changing the default values of the Q series C24 buffer memory using GX Configurator SC 1 Program conditions The following program performs initial setting on the CH1 side when the initial setting command X1027 turns ON a Devices used Initial Setting COMMANA sesers X1027 e Initial setting command pulse Signal n M10 e Initial Setting command 2 0 eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeteeeteeeeeeeteees M11 Initial Setting command 3 0 eee eee eeeeteeeteeteeeteeeeeeeteeeteees M12 e Completion device for REMTO instruction M100 to105 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMTO instruction M200 to 203 e Word byte units designation sssssesseeseesessresrsrrssrsensnsrnsnnes DO Buffer memory head address designation for on demand ANSMISSI
348. o conversion 1 Convert Depends on Section 8 4 5 Chapter 12 of User s Manual Application Station No switch setting fame ter setting LED ON status and communication error status on CH1 side 0 Turned off OFF no error 1 Turned on ON error SD WAIT b0 C N b4 SIO b1 NAK b5 PRO b2 ACK b6 P S b3 NEU b7 For system b8 to b015 LED ON status and communication error status on CH2 side 0 Turned off OFF no error 1 Turned on ON error SD WAIT b0 NAK b5 ACK b6 NEU b7 CH2 ERR b14 CH1 ERR b15 Section 4 3 Section 4 5 2 Section 8 6 9 Depends on module status 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address i Applicable Registration 3 ee Initial Decimal Hex Application Name ale protocol allowed not Mc Non Bi allowed Switch setting error and mode switching error status 0 No error Other than 0 Switch setting error and mode switching error CH1 Communication protocol setting No b0 0 Normal Error CH1 Communication rate setting b1 0 Normal Error Far confirmation CH1 Setting change prohibit time mode switching b3 Section 43 515 of switch setting Eaa 0 Normal Error Section 203 and mode CH2 Communication protocol setting No b4 Not allowed 4 5 2 switching 0 Normal Error Section CH2 Communication rate setting b5 8 6 9 0 Normal Error CH2 Setting change prohibit time mode switching b7 0 Normal 1 Disable Setting station No 614 0 Normal 1 Out of range Lin
349. o monitor stopped monitor designation 8216 8472 0001H Monitor start designation 20181 21181 00024 Monitoring Q series C24 is a set 1002H Monitoring stopped Q series C24 is set 100FH Monitor setting error Q series C24 is a set Data optional designation P Communication 0 Off 1 On 21194 data monitoring Full stop designation b0 Allowed function 1 Timer 0 errors at occurrence stop designation b2 For system b1 b3 to b15 8218 8474 Monitor buffer head address designation 201An 211AH 400H to 1AFDH 2600H to 3FFDH 8219 8475 Monitor buffer size designation 201By 211By 0003H to 1A00H O Chapter 16 of User s Manual Application System area User frame receive format designation 1st to 4th Section g 0 Format 0 1 Format 1 3 4 7 For designation Chapter 11 of user frame Allowed of User s receiving method i g Exclusive format 1 received data count 1st to 4th Manual 0 or more Exclusive format 1 received data count Application Use prohibited System area Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to 4th 0000H No designation For designation Other than 0000 Designated below of transparent Transparent code b0 to b7 Allowed code 00H to FFH Transparent code e Additional code b8 to b15 QOH to FFH Additional code Section 3 4 5 Chapter 12 of User s Manual Application Use prohibited System area 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q
350. ocedure system setting _ OT x Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 170 No 0000 Module model name GJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Received data count designation O1FF Receive complete code designation ODO4 Hifff Not designated receive complete code HOd0a CR LF HO000 HOOf Receive complete code Receive user frame designation Do not use User frame use enable disable designation Input following eight items within the following range O Not designated H0001 H03e7 Default frame H03e8 HO4af Flash ROM user frame H8001 H801f Buffer memory user frame Receive user frame designation 0000 First frame No designation 1st Flash ROM setting Details i Wite to File save module 2 Hexadecimal input Resa hom File read Setting range 0001 33FE Make text file Execute test Close Setting items PONS Setting value storage Reference section containing Setting item f j buffer memory address detailed explanation Received data count designation A4H 144H Chapter 6 of Receive complete code designation A5H 145H User s Manual Basic Receive user User frame use enable disable designation ADwH 14DH First frame No designation 1st to 4th AEn to B1H 14En to 151H Last frame No designation ist to 4th B2u to B5x 152H to 155H 20204 to 2023H User frame receive format designation 1st to 4th 2120H to 2123H Chapters 9 and 11
351. of characters 1 to 254 of return data to be sent immediately afterward by the external device i doy eee whens Wee F Designate with a text string consisting of 0 to 9 and A to F capital letter T T T T T T T T T Eiig S 2 amp Loopback data Sum check In case of format 1 Data name Z 1 amp jdatawith the code NIS ale amp a length given s 8 h by Character amp lenath External Q 8 engi Two characters hexadecimal device side HiL HiL HL r Hook O O FIF T T 0 o 5 A B C D E 7 8 amp Ppl Pipi ih 05 30H30 46H 46H54H54H 30H 30H 35H 41HA2H43HA4H 45H 374 38H e y k i c Character A part S 2 2 Loopback data E Sum check Data name ce ey amp 2 amp length given sits TS 3 by Character T S length PLC CPU side Becomes the xX a xX 1 1 1 eh ia C I L same data ae Be AL AE E z i 010 F F105 AB CiD E A 3 Example tsetse i 02H 3030H 46H 46H 30H35 H42H43H44HA5H O34 41u 1 33H tH Header data to be sent by Character B part the PLC CPU 4 31 4 31 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 9 Maintenance and Inspection This section explains the maintenance and inspection and installing and removing of the Q series C24 4 9 1 Maintenance and inspection The Q series C24 has no special inspection items other than below For items other than listed below perform inspection according to the inspection items listed in the Use
352. of the buffer memory A buffer memory consists of a user area and a system area as shown below a User area 1 This is the area where users write read data 2 The user area consists of areas for storing setting values for data communication for actual data communication and for storing communication status and communication error information 3 Data read write to the user area should be performed following the instructions in the corresponding detailed reference page b System area This area is used by the Q series C24 system 2 List of buffer memory assignments A buffer memory is configured with 16 bits per address Name default value etc of each address of the buffer memory is shown in the lists on the following pages 1 Abbreviations in the target Protocol column MC MC protocol Non Non procedure protocol Bi Bidirectional protocol 2 Meaning of symbols shown in the target Protocol column The following symbols are assigned to protocols related to the setting values of a corresponding area and to areas used for controlled with user settings and indicate what kind of access is allowed to the area in question RW Area where it is possible to read write from to the PLC CPU and an external device R Area where only reading is possible from the PLC CPU and an external device System area used by the system or area not used by the corresponding protocol 3 Meaning of symbols shown in the Registration allowed no
353. ommunication protocol of the Q series C24 interface to which a PC is connected to 0 with the switch setting using the GX Developer b Connecting the GOT Details are explained in the GOT User s Manual Connection e By connecting a GOT graphic operation terminal to the interface for the Q series C24 operations such as monitoring the PLC CPU can be performed Operations such as monitoring the PLC CPU can be performed by setting the communication protocol of the Q series C24 interface to which a GOT is connected to 0 with the switch setting using a GX Developer c Simultaneous connection of GX Developer and GOT e It is possible to connect a PC with GX Developer and the GOT to two interfaces of the Q series C24 at the same time It is thus possible for more than one user to perform programming monitoring etc simultaneously e When the GOT and the PC with GX Developer are connected at the same time the two interfaces of the Q series C24 cannot perform an interlock operation QU71624 R2 cH Joz RS 232 cable When GX Developer and or the GOT is connected directly to the Q series C24 switching settings using GX Developer need not be made to perform access to the QCPU monitoring and other operations They can also be performed when the communication protocol is set to 0 by making switch settings using GX Developer 1 OVERVIEW Setting from GX Developer MELSEC Q 8 Functions support
354. ommunications e Write the device to be monitored before issuing a monitor request 71421 7143H e The head device No is out of range 71444 Monitor data write e Monitoring was requested before the device to be i error monitored was written 7145n i 71461 Monitor CPU model e The written CPU model name and the CPU monitor CIN e Rewrite the monitor data name error name in the monitor request are different Written number of monitoring points overrun error 71474 10 15 Device name aifar A device that cannot be designated by the given command was designated Monitor PLC No e The written PLC No and PLC No in the monitor CIN e Rewrite the monitor data error request are different e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications e The written number of monitoring points exceeds the designated range 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Protocol Error code Hexa Error Contents Corrective action Bidire decimal ctional e A nonexistent extension file register block No was designated e A block No being used as an extension comment area sampling trace area or status latch area was designated 71491 e The OS of the Q series C24 detected some error e A write command was designated when Disable write during RUN was set e Parameter or sequence program was written during RUN e Correct the designated block No and restart data commun
355. ompletion cccceeceeteteeeeeeeeees CH2 receive ProCeSSiNG cecceeceeeeeeeeeeeceeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaees CH2 Send processing cecceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeaee REMFR REMTO instruction completion device 0 REMFR REMTO instruction abnormal completion flag Switching mode No designation cecceeeseeeeeeeeeeees Transmission specifications after switching designation Switch setting error and mode switching error status ao Buffer memory settings used in this example Address Decimal Hexadecimal CH1 114 90H 145 91 H 304 130H 305 131H Even odd parity Sum check ransmission Write durin specifications RUN g Prohibited after switching Setting designation Allowed Communication b8 to b11 rate setting 9600bps B12 to 14 All OFF __Forsystem Transmission specifications B19 ON after switching designation Make setting as set in this area ey MC protocol Switching mode No oesoon 0001H 515 203h Switch setting error and mode switching error status App 54 App 54 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 Program examples lt Change command gt X1031 M300 n tht 4 SET M300 Sets the changing flag PLS MIO Starts the change processing of CH
356. on 10 25 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error code Hexa Error Contents decimal Signal name Corrective action Reference section Recheck the user frame number Designate the registered user frame Section 3 4 3 number Section 3 4 4 Register the designated data for Section 3 4 5 initialization Designate the output head pointer in the range of 1 to 100 Designate the position n th position There is an error in the designation of the output head where the data for initialization number pointer is designated Designate the aa for imtializatiori Section 3 4 5 number at the designated position n th position Designate a registered data for There is an error in the designation of the output frame initialization number within the range of Moagem number the designated number of outputs from funcion the location of the output head pointer There is an error in the designation of the user frame number por e Designate the data for initialization in There is an error in the designation of the number of the range of 1 to 78 Section 3 4 3 registered data bytes e Designate 80 for the data for Section 3 4 4 connection e Recheck the message length of the d There is an error in the data for connection aa g 9 Section 3 4 4 message for notification There is an error in the designation of the no e Designate the no communication Section 3 3 6 communication interval time interval time in the range of 0 to 120 a
357. on by specifying transparent code Data reception by interrupt programs ASCII data transmission reception by ASCII BIN conversion Data transmission reception by specifying transparent code Communication via Communication with MC Protocol non procedure protocol bidirectional protocol User s Manual public network etc Application modem function _ PLC access from GX Developer Transmission DC code control including Xon Xoff control control DTR DSR ER DR control Independent linked operation of each interface Section 4 5 2 Monitoring testing of initial settings and setting values with utility software Section 2 10 of Reference Manual Section 3 3 3 of Remote password check User s Manual Application x1 If the external device is capable of incorporating a program and communicating data using a protocol of the MELSEC PLLC it is possible to access the PLC CPU using the above mentioned MC protocol Furthermore it is possible to transfer any data using the bidirectional protocol x2 When it is necessary to communicate using the protocol of an external device such as a measuring instrument or a bar code reader the above mentioned non procedure protocol is used for data communication In that case the processing of the communication data becomes easier by using the user frame communication function User s Manual Communication using bidirectional protocol 1 Supporting multiple CPU system 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q
358. on complete M1 device 1 Normal completion abnormal completion Received data count storage area Buffer memory address 600n Received data storage area Recei 1 Recei 2 Buffer memory address 6014 to eesNe dala eceive data Data reception Data reception 1 Data reception 2 1 Start the self station PLC The values specified with GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 2 When the amount of data specified by the received data count or data containing the receive complete code is received from the external device the reception data read request signal turns ON 3 After the control data for the INPUT instruction is stored in the device the sequence program executes the INPUT instruction and reads the receive data 6 11 6 11 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 4 The device completing the INPUT instruction turns ON when the reading of receive data is completed When the complete device 1 abnormal completion signal turns ON the error code is stored in the control data completion status S1 1 Program example When the Q series C24 I O signals are from X YO0 to X Y1F x3 J MovP K DO Designate the receive channel x4 FMOVP KO D1 K2 Clear the reception result and receive data count storage device to 0 Move K10 D3 Designate the allowable receive data count G INPUT UO DO D10 Mo With normal completion the receive data within the allowable rec
359. on the external device side 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 4 2 Connecting the RS 422 485 interface The following shows the connection precautions and connection examples when using the Q series C24 RS 422 485 interface 1 Connection precautions a When connecting the Q series C24 SG and FG signals to the external device connect them according to the specifications of the external device b Connect the shield of the connection cable to the FG terminal on either of the connected devices If normal data communication is not obtained due to external noise even if wiring is made as shown above perform wiring as follows 1 Connect between the FG of both stations with the shield of the connection cable On the external device side however follow the instruction manual of the external device Be sure to use the plate terminals included with the product when connecting the braided shield wire to the QU71C24N R4 Connect the FG of the Q series C24 side to the FG terminal at the power supply module of the station which has the Q series C24 is installed or to the FG terminal of the control panel on which the Q series C24 PLC is installed Connect nnA and nnB of each signal in the connection cable as a pair Q series C24 External device Shield Correspondance of the RS 422 485 terminal block and signal location 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSE
360. onitoring device error 2205 23051 result ee lo fo o 2 Turning off the ERR LED and initializing the error codes by GX Configurator SC Refer to Section 8 6 10 a When turning off the ERR LED and initializing the error codes By making the CHO ERR clear request on the Monitor Test screen the ERR LED of the Q series C24 turns off and the stored error codes are initialized b When initializing the communication error information By making the Communication error clear request for CHO and to turn LED off on the Monitor test others screen the LEDs ERR NEU of the Q series C24 turn off and the communication error information is initialized 3 Turning off the ERR LED and initializing the error codes by sequence program a Input signals used to notify of error occurrences and output signals used to initialize the error code I O signal Name of status information Description function Error occurrence on CH1 side Turns on upon error occurrence in CH1 interface Input signal Error occurrence on CH2 side Turns on upon error occurrence in CH2 interface Oubutsio al CH1 Error information initialization request _ Turns on when initializing error code of interface on CH1 side utput signal sane CH2 Error information initialization request__ Turns on when initializing error code of interface on CH2 side x Initialization of error code is continuously performed when output signal YE YF is The CHn side error information can
361. onnection Line types yp User s Manual Application 1 to 30 Wait time for message transmission units s Message Comment 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 4 4 Modem function system setting registration Purpose For data communication using the modem function register system setting values Startup procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt Modem function system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt Modem function system setting Setting screen Modem function system setting _ olxi Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 170 No 0000 Module model name GJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Modem connection channel designation No connection Notification execution designation Do not execute Number of connection retries designation Connection retry interval designation 90 300 Connection retry interval units sec Initialization connection timeout designation 1 60 Timeout units sec Number of initialization retries designation Data No for initialization designation Input by the following value range O User send frame No designation HO7d0 HO7dd 05 registered initialization data HO9c4 H09e1 Flash ROM initialization data H8001 H801f Buffer memory initialization data Mata No for connection desiqnation Flash ROM setting Details P Write to File save module
362. oo goe pma 1 SDA SDB signals These are signals to send data from the Q series C24 to the external device 2 RDA RDB signals These are signals for the Q series C24 to receive data from the external device 2 The following shows the function block diagrams RS 422 485 interface Send data Receive data x1 The following shows the terminal resistor connection Connect the terminal resistor according to Section 4 4 2 or the User s Manual Hardware of the Q series C24 used 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 2 RS 422 485 cable specifications The following shows the RS 422 485 cable specification 1 Use a 1200 m 3937 ft or shorter cable that satisfies the following specification for the RS 422 485 cable cable to connect the Q series C24 terminal block 2 Make the total distance within 1200 m 3937 ft when two or more device are connected in a 1 n or m n configuration 3 The RS 422 485 cable specification is shown below Cable type Shielded cable Number of pairs 3 Number ofpairs Conductor resistance 20 C 88 0 Q km or less Dielectric strength 110 10 Recommended cable SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P gt MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES Ltd SPEV SB 0 2 X 3P eres MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES Ltd SPEV SB MPC 0 2 X 3P and SPEV SB 0 2 X 3P have the same electrical characteristics but different external diameter and internal wire colors
363. or Product Inf List Product Information List stot Type series model nane Points 1 0 wo master PLC PLC QO2HCPU Intelli Q 32pt 0000 020930000000000 B Intelli Q QU71C24 R2 32pt 0020 020510000000000 B None None 7 z s None o None None None 0 7 Serial No Ver e The corresponding module s serial No is shown in the Serial No column e The function version of the corresponding module is shown in the Ver column Checking the software version of the GX Configurator SC The GX Configurator SC software version can be checked on the Product Information List screen of the GX Developer Start Procedure Help Product Information Product information pj PLC programming software p GX Developer Version 7 018 SW7D5C GPPW E COPYRIGHT C 2001 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This Product is licensed to Name MITSUBISHI Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION List of version information on Add in software Software version GX Configurator SC Version1 10L SWOD5C QSCU E COPYRIGHT C 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Warming This product is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to
364. or code selected in Error Display 2 Checking using the hardware information screen of the GX Developer diagnostic functions Startup procedure GX Developer gt Diagnostics System monitor gt Module s Detailed Information H W Information Module Display format Module Name GJ71C24N Product information 051020000000000 B HEX C DEC m H W LED Information gt H W SW Information tren vae 15D WAIT 0000 25D WAIT 0000 1 CONFIG o7co CH1 S10 0001 CH2 S10 0000 CH1 MODE 0001 CH1 PRO 0000 CH2 PRO 0000 2 CONFIG o7co CH1 P75 0000 CH2 P S 0000 CH2 MODE 0006 CH1 C N 0000 CH2 C N 0000 T NO 0000 CH1 NAK 0000 CH2 NAK 0000 CH1 ACK 0000 CH2 ACK 0000 1 0 CH1 NEU 0001 CH2 NEU 0000 CH2 ERR 0000 CH1 ERR 0001 monitor Stop monitor Close 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Displays 1 H WLED Information Right side Left side CH1 information Right side CH2 information Displays the transmission status and the communications error status of the Q series C24 Displays 201H 202H of the buffer memory b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Eevee se 0 fee ie a system Buffer memory address 201H Information of CH1 side SD WAIT SIO PRO P S C N NAK ACK 1 Lit Communication error 0 not lit No communication error NEU b15 b14 b13 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO For system
365. ore the message format and control procedure are the same as when accessing the PLC using these conventional modules The external device side can access the Q series PLC with a program used for accessing the PLC via a conventional module Example No of device ints S i 2 characters Head device E sean Data for the number of device points Number of device points x 4 characters code code o D wn no o T Sum check N I Sum check N Fa o pr A g w amp 2 e Q amp Command message for A compatible 1C frame Response for A compatible 1C frame The following manual is available for performing data communication using the MC protocol MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual sold separatel 5 1 3 PLC CPU setting for performing data communication Data communication using the MC protocol is achieved by performing the GX Developer settings indicated below on a PC performing the system settings by the GX Configurator SC and registering the settings to the PLC 1 Settings using the GX Developer Required Perform the I O assignments and switch settings indicated in Section 4 5 and write the parameters to the PLC CPU where the Q series C24 is installed 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 System settings using the GX Configurator SC When it is necessary to change the default values registered in the Q series C24 perform t
366. ory GetClockData Reads clock data from PLC CPU SetClockData Writes clock data to PLC CPU Reads a PLC CPU type Remote RUN STOP PAUSE of PLC CPU Announces event S OnDeviceStatus Announces event 6 Collecting data on Excel without programming Using MX Component and MX Sheet SWnD5C SHEET E allows users to collect PLC device data on Excel with only simple setting and without any programming App 25 App 25 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 7 2 Usage Procedure of MX Component This section explains the procedure for creating programs and sample programs using MX Component 1 Procedure for creating programs The procedure for creating programs is outlined below The usage procedure below uses Visual Basic as an example 1 Perform the communication settings from a IBM PC AT compatible personal computer to the PLC by following the wizard Some types of controls are set only by programs without using the wizard zl C Delete ee a The wizard allows the user to perform the settings aga teres required for the communication such as logical oe FS station number connected module type and PLC to Parity oa be connected Control DTR or RTS Control x Cancel lt Back f lesion L a x Bun Query Diagram Tools Add Ins Window Help a s a SSBSRARD Proiect iy Project Microsoft Vi 2 Paste the ACT control icon onto the form
367. osoft Windows 98 Operating System Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System x Depending on the version of MX Component used different operating systems are supported See the manual of MX Component for the details Separately sold communication support tools e MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later hereinafter abbreviated as MX Component x See Appendix 7 for the overview of MX Component 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q Command Command request data E MELSECNET H MELSECNET H mode x Inthe MELSECNET 10 mode other stations including the A QnA series PLC CPUs can be accessed during data link operation x The MC protocol is equivalent to the communication function using a dedicated protocol that is supported by the A QnA series computer link module serial communication modules 2 Data communication using the non procedure protocol Details are explained in Chapter 6 and the User s Manual Application a Data can be transferred in any message formats
368. pplication Support for multiple CPU system 1 11 This function allows access to the control non control PLCs specified by the user when performing the following forms of data communication with a multiple CPU system Communication using the MC protocol QCPU access from GX Developer Section 2 10 of Reference Manual 1 11 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS This Chapter describes the system configuration and available functions 2 1 Applicable Systems The following describes applicable systems 2 1 Applicable modules and number of modules that can be mounted The following table lists the CPU module and network modules for remote I O stations that the Q series C24 can be mounted and the number of modules which can be mounted Applicable module Numperot modules that Remarks can be installed QOOJCPU Maximum 8 QOOCPU Q01CPU Maximum 24 Q02CPU Q02HCPU Can be installed in Q mode onl CPU module QO6HCPU Maximum 64 1 i Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU QJ72LP25 25 SEE oo VO Network module QJ71LP25GE Maximum 64 station QJ72BR15 1 See User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module to use 2 See Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote 1 0 network 2 The base module to which the Q series C24 can be mounted The Q series C24 can be mounted into any I
369. procedure described in this chapter to create sequence programs for sending and receiving data for the PLC CPU Regarding the additional functions listed below for data communication using the bidirectional protocol see the separate User s Manuals Application e Reading receive data using interrupt programs See Chapter 4 of Application e Sending receiving data using ASCII data ASCII BIN conversion See Chapter 13 of Application e Sending receiving data using transparent code designation See Chapter 12 of Application 7 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 1 Data Reception from the External Device This section explains the data reception from the external device 7 1 1 Receiving methods The following shows how to receive data sent from the external device using the bidirectional protocol Since the size of each message received is recognized using the data length information contained in the message messages of any size can be sent from the external device PLC CPU Q series C24 E Sequence Buffer memory a program Receive area 2 i Arbitrary data Read request When normal ENQ Data length Data area Sum check code When abnormal 00x to FF Read Ignored BIDIN 2 4t 1 L instructions Arbirary data 00x to FF ack E gt Contents CH1 CH2 Control Timing X3 XA Reception data read reques
370. quence initialization conditions are as follows 1 When the power is turned on the Reset switch on the CPU panel is operated or the Q series C24 mode is switched 2 When the receive data was cleared 3 When the CD signal was turned off when data communications were performed by setting CD terminal check enable during full duplex communications through the RS 232 interface Generation of framing error in external device When nothing is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external device through the RS 422 or RS 422 485 interface a framing error may be generated by the noise etc in the external device Send an arbitrary code to identify the head of the send data from the Q series C24 to the external device Before data communication check the Q series C24 interface specifications Data communications with external device computer etc over a multidrop link When the external device PLC CPU are connected by a 1 n multidrop link each the Q series C24 receives the data transmitted by the external device With a multidrop link receive data by user frame 1 If data is not received by user frame a sequence program that ignores the receive data other than the receive data addressed to the local station by sequence program including the data indicating the objective PLC CPU in the message must be written Sample message Station Station Data length MODs No 2 BIN data 32h 32h x1 See chapter 11 of Us
371. r SC MELSEC Q 8 6 10 Display LED off and communication error information error code initialization This section explains how to turn off the display LEDs of the Q series C24 and initialize its communication error information and error codes 1 CHO ERR clear request on Monitor Test screen This is used to turn off the CHO ERR LED of the Q series C24 and to initialize clear the error codes stored in the CHOI side buffer memory Refer to Section 10 1 2 1 for the buffer memory where the error codes are stored Operation procedure Monitor Test BE r Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Module model name QJ 71C24N Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Turing off ERR LED and initializing the error code by the ERR clear request Designate Clear request for the test CH1 ERR clear request Current value Setting value Off Clear request E CH2 ERR clear request Off Clear request v XZY monitor test XZY monitor test Modem function monitor test Modem function monitor test CH1 Transmission control and others monitor test CH1 Trans control monitor CH1 MC protocol monitor CH1 MC protocol monitor CH1 Non procedure monitor test CH1 Non proc monitor Start monitor Stop monitor CH1 Bidirectional monitor CH1 Bidirectional monitor X r Flash ROM setting r Details Write to Heie Current value Moni
372. r notifying the external device from the PLC CPU that resumption of communications is possible Clear Procedure When the CH1 side interface is used 1 Since receive processing send processing and receive data clear processing are not being performed 1 is written to buffer memory address A8H using the TO instruction for the sequence program 2 Receive data clear processing is performed for the Q Series C24 s OS area See Section 6 1 2 3 When receive data clear processing is completed the value in buffer memory address A8H becomes 0 The following page shows an example of a program to clear receive data with the FROM TO instruction Create a program that contains the contacts user flags etc indicating the following statuses in the TO instruction e Contact when the CHn reception data read request signal X3 XA is OFF e Contact when the CHn reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB is OFF e Contact indicating that send and receive processes are not currently being performed e Contact indicating that reception data clear processing is not currently being performed x1 When the function version A Q Series C24 is used resume data communications a further 100 ms after the buffer memory address A8H 148H value changes from a 1 to a 0 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Send request 1 s l execution disabled f Dedicated instruction Q series
373. r s Manual of the PLC CPU module in order to always use the system in the optimal condition the Q series C24 inspection items 1 Check if the terminal resistors and cables are connected securely 2 Verify that the module installation screws and the terminal block installation screws are securely tightened Be sure to read through the Safety Precautions in the beginning of this manual regarding the Q series C24 inspection and maintenance 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 9 2 When mounting dismounting the module Please read 4 1 Handling Precautions before mounting or dismounting the module and make sure to pay attention to safety and handle the module properly during the operation When replacing the Q series C24 and QCPU it becomes necessary to register the following data on the Q series C24 again for the module to be replaced Q series C24 System setting data in the flash ROM e QCPU PLC parameters I O assignment switch setting etc The procedure for replacing a module including re registration of data is as follows lt Operation procedure when replacing the Q series C24 gt Step 1 Read all the system setting data of the Q series C24 using the Read from module function of GX Configurator SC Step 2 Save the system setting data read to the specified file using the function of GX Configurator SC 1 Step 3 Turn the power supply to the Q series C24 off Step 4 Dismount
374. r the area to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area of the buffer memory address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH Transmission buffer memory length designation Designate by addresses the length of the area 0001H to 1A00u to be used as the transmission area in the user definable area of the buffer memory address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH If the following functions are also used when the position and size of the transmission area in the buffer memory are changed make sure that the addresses of the transmission area do not overlap with those for the buffer memory that stores the transmission and receive data to be used by these functions 1 MC protocol buffer memory read write function 2 MC protocol on demand function 3 Non procedure protocol transmission receive function 4 Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function 5 Communication data monitoring function 2 Set the size of data per data transmission from the PLC CPU to the external device so that it is smaller than the size of the transmission data s designated area in the buffer memory Transmission data designation area gt Size of arbitrary data portion to be sent from the PLC CPU To transmit data whose size is larger than the transmission data designation area increase the transmission area or divide the transmission data before sending 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Transmission
375. r the currently received data Section 8 7 receive data clear 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 7 List of GX Developer Setting Items for Serial Communication Modules The following table lists the parameters that are set using the GX Developer Parameter setting item Parameter description Set data Performs I O assignment ior the Q series C24 and I O assignment setting Section 4 5 1 enables the switch settings listed below r CH1 Transmission setting Switch 1 BA CH1 Communication rate setting Switch 2 CH1 Communication protocol setting CH2 Transmission setting Section 4 5 2 Switch 3 og A CH2 Communication rate setting Switch 4 CH2 Communication protocol setting Switch 5 Station number setting Interrupt pointer Start No CPU side f i Interrupt pointer No of units t Interrupt pointer setting reading reception date with 3 Section 4 5 3 Intelligent Start I O No interrupt programs module side Start SI No Password settings Sets the remote password Section 3 3 3 of Password Remote password settings and the Q series C24 that User s Manual active module T performs the check i Start XY Application settings Performs setting for 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 8 List of Input Output Signals for the PLC CPU This section describes the input output signals of the Q series C24 For assignments of the input output signals shown in the table below it is assumed that the Q series C
376. ransmission data valid invalid designation e No reception monitoring time timer 0 designation App 47 App 47 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 9 When registering user frame App 48 The following program example registers a user frame to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to Section 9 4 of the User s Manual Application for the registration of the user frame It is recommended to use GX Configurator SC when registering a user frame to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions The following program registers a user frame to the flash ROM of the QU71C24N when the registration command X1028 turns ON a Devices used e Registration COMMANA ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeas X1028 e Registration command pulse Signal s M10 e Registration command 2 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas M11 Registration flag oo eeececeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeaeeeateeas M12 e Registration result acquisition command l sssssssesesssesseeee M13 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 105 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO INSUUCTION 20 el ances din a a in i M200 to 203 e Registration instruction ec ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeateeas DO Frame Norrena ies Aen ei e ee D1 Registration result ceccceeeesseeseeeseeeee
377. rating status of each station when there is a communication error in the data link There is the risk of an accident occurring due to output error or malfunctioning e When using the notification function the pager receiver may not be contacted due to the frequency transmission status from the system setup environment and error on the receiver side To ensure the safety of the PLC system install a call circuit with a lamp display or buzzer sound e When performing the control of the PLC in operation changing data by connecting a peripheral devices to the CPU module or personal computer etc to the intelligent device module configure an interlock circuit in a sequence program so the safety of the overall system is always maintained Also when performing other controls of the PLC in operation changing program and operation status status control read this manual carefully and confirm if the overall safety is maintained Especially when this control is performed to a remote PLC from an external device troubles that have occurred on the PLC side may not be able to immediately be handled if there is a data communication error Define a troubleshooting agreement between external devices and the PLC CPU for data communication error occurrences as well as construct an interlock circuit in the sequence program Do not write data into the system area of the buffer memory of intelligent function modules Also do not use any prohibited to use
378. rator SC Non procedure system setting screen according to the specifications of the external device see Sections 8 4 5 and 8 4 7 Default Buffer memory address where Setting data Allowable range Remarks value the setting value is stored Received data Less than the size of the Unit is in accordance with the 511 1FFH A4H 144H count E Sal data storage area eee Al te units designation ae to OOFFH When any code is set any code is set Receive A5xH 145H When there is no receive complete code OO O complete code Other than through the setting using GX Configurator SC or the TO instruction at the startup of the Q series C24 the received data count and receive complete code setting values can be changed even after data communication has started if the timing is as shown in the chart below The following describes the procedure for changing setting values for data reception via the non procedure protocol after the start of data communication and for the resumption of data reception processing Specifically the module restrictions are explained along with the timing and procedure for changing the setting values 1 Data receiving method Reception using a dedicated instruction INPUT or an interrupt program 1 cannot be performed Transmission using a dedicated instruction OUTPUT can be performed Data must be received using the FROM instruction in the main program The following describes the I O signals A program example
379. rator SC monitor function See Section 8 6 6 e GX Developer buffer memory monitor function monitors addresses 257H 267h 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 3 Processing when Simultaneous Transmission Performed During Full Duplex Communications This section explains the processing when simultaneous transmissions occur in full duplex communication 7 3 1 Processing when simultaneous transmissions occur This section explains the processing performed by the Q series C24 when the external device and the Q series C24 transmit at the same time during data communications using the bidirectional protocol Since the external device and the Q series C24 do not transmit at the same time during half duplex communications see User s Manual Application Chapter 8 this section does not have to be read When an external device and the Q series C24 transmit at the same time the Q series C24 processing depends on the setting of Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation with GX Configurator SC x The GX Configurator SC setting value Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation is stored in the following areas of the buffer memory Simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation area addresses 9BH 13Bn The Q series C24 communication data processing for each setting is described in Section 7 3 2 Setting contents Value set to buffer memory Q series C24 processing contents wit
380. re 1 Connecting cable 1 Connect cables to two interfaces as follows e Connect cables to the RS 232 interface within the connector and install it to the interface e Connect cables to the RS 422 485 interface on a terminal block RS 232 interface D Sub 9 pin RS 422 485 interface Q series C24 side Q series C24 side Cable connection RD RXD ae ay SD TXD Cable connection Signal name SDA SDB ER DTR RI Cl Procedure 2 Communication protocol setting and transmission setting see Section 4 5 2 1 Set the communication protocol setting to FH individual station loopback test for both interfaces 2 Set each transmission setting of the two interfaces according to the transmission specification for data communication with an external device Procedure 3 Performing the individual station loopback test 1 Set the PLC CPU to STOP status 2 Restart the PLC CPU station or reset the CPU The test starts automatically in about one second 3 For the Q series C24 perform the following tests in sequence and repeat them one test cycle takes approximately one second End testing when all test results become abnormal 1 Check communication with the PLC CPU Read and check the model type of the PLC CPU 2 Check transmission and reception functions of the interface Perform communication while changing data 4 The LED corresponding to a test item flashes when the test starts e The CH1 NEU LEDs flash w
381. re 3 Checking results of ROM RAM switch tests 1 The test is completed when the NEU LED on CH1 side is lit approximately 2 seconds 2 The test is completed normally when the ERR LED turns off 3 The test is completed with error when the ERR LED turns on Check the error description in one of the following screens e The Monitor test others screen of GX Configurator SC see Section 8 6 9 e The buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer see the GX Developer Manual for the operation method x When checking errors in the buffer memory monitor screen of GX Developer monitor the following buffer memory Check the error descriptions on the screens by bit decoding the monitored value 16 bit integer Each bit corresponds to the following error description Buffer memory monitored Address CH1 side CH2 side CH1 CH2 side Description when corresponding bit is on Corrective action 2011 2024 2034 pot S hen inked operation Transmission setting error o o PRO feg Protocol setting error Pratocalsetintvancr e setting value see Section 4 5 2 Poss When independent operation setting po ow L Protocol setting error b5 to b6 Ooo a ee ea e a b7 neu Y Test completed ea y b8 to b13 r H l cHEERR RAMerror b14 Setting station Review a oe Out of the setting station number range aie a asl Section 4 2 2 CH1ERR ERR ROMerror ssid error eee your nearest dealer 4
382. received data by the communication network can shorten the system start up time Protocol FB support function GX Developer Abbreviation for GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW E n in the model should be 4 or greater VF Abbreviation for interface Generic term for buffer memory of the intelligent function modules used for storing data sent to or received from the PLC CPU setting values monitor values etc Generic term for the Q series PLC modules that are operated by commands from the PLC CPU equivalent to the A series PLC special function modules Examples Intelligent function modules e CC Link interface module e A D and D A conversion modules e Ethernet interface module e Serial communication module MELSECNET 10 Abbreviation for MELSECNET 10 network system MELSECNET H Abbreviation for MELSECNET H network system MX Component Abbreviation for MX Component SWOD5C ACT E or later Operating Manual Protocol FB support function Intelligent function module devices GX Configurator SC Version 2 Operating Manual Protocol FB support function Generic term for computers indicators measuring instruments ID modules bar code readers regulators other serial communication modules UC24 etc that are connected to this serial communication module for data communication Opposite devices external devices Reference Manual Q Corresponding MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual RS 232 interface Abbr
383. red using the non procedure protocol when it is necessary to perform data communication using the protocol for external devices such as a measuring instrument and a bar code reader In that case transmission receive data processing can be simplified by using the communication functions with the user frames described in the User s Manual Application This chapter explains the basic transmission and reception methods when performing data communication using the non procedure protocol Follow the procedure described in this chapter to create sequence programs for sending and receiving data for the PLC CPU For details on the additional functions listed below for data communication using the non procedure protocol see the separate User s Manuals Application e Sending receiving data using user frames See Chapter 11 Application e Monitoring the PLC CPU automatic information function See Chapter 2 Application e Switching modes from the PLC CPU See Chapter 15 Application e Reading received data using interrupt programs See Chapter 4 Application e Sending receiving data using transparent code designation See Chapter 12 Application e Sending receiving data using ASCII data ASCII BIN conversion See Chapter 13 Application e Controlling half duplex communication See Chapter 8 Application 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 1 Data Reception from the External Device This section expla
384. res it in a device H aP spBusy ii 0 The function reads the communication status of 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 9 8 CSET Receive data clear Applicable device MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Direct JO O Internal device System user File register Instruction Executing Instruction code condition form CSET fo ZP CSET Un S1 S2 D1 D2 Set data Start I O signal of the module 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit Number of the channel that demands to clear receiving data BIN16 bit 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 2 Channel 2 CH2 side Head number of the device that stores the control data User System Dummy Devicename Head number of the bit device at the self station that turns on for one scan at the completion of the instruction System Bit D2 1 also turns on at an abnormal completion Each of file registers for local device and program cannot be used as the setting data Control data S2 0 Execution type Seeoo ser f The execution result at the completion of the instruction Complete status pasted System 0 Normal Other than 0 Abnormal error code Specify the request Request type Sse om capa 4 Receive data clear request For system System S2 111 1 See the Error explanation on the following page for details on errors caused by wrong data specifications by the user 2 The setting s
385. ries C24 does not have the setting switches to set the operation mode station number and transmission specification that are available in the computer link module for A series Appendix 2 3 1 Using programs designed for the computer link module The data communication between the PLC CPU and external device as well as other PLC CPU that has been performed by A series computer link modules hereinafter abbreviated as UC24 C24 S8 can also be performed using the Q series C24 However UC24 C24 S8 and the Q series C24 have major differences in the following points For PLC CPU side create a new program according to the explanation in the section of the function used Differences between UC24 C24 S8 and the Q series C24 e Initial setting items and the setting method of addresses and special application areas of the buffer memory e Input output signals for handshake e Dedicated instructions of the PLC CPU 1 Initial settings for special application area in buffer memory 1 Inthe Q series C24 the addresses for special application areas in the buffer memory are different from those of UC24 C24 S8 The Q series C24 has more initial setting items The setting method is different such that the settings are performed using the utility package GX Configurator SC 2 Register necessary initial setting values according to Chapter 8 3 The default value for the CD terminal check setting is changed to No check 2 Data communicatio
386. rite Write request Write request 8 4 12 Flash ROM write allow prohibit setting This section explains the settings to allow or prohibit writing to the flash ROM Startup procedure Online gt Monitor test gt Select monitor Test module gt Monitor test gt Monitor screen Operating procedure Procedure 1 In the Monitor screen select Flash ROM write allow prohibit and set Allowed or Prohibited Procedure 2 Click on Execute test Flash ROM write allow prohibit will be set to Allowed or Prohibited accordingly 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting The Auto Refresh Settings are used to automatically store the error information and status information currently stored in the Q series C24 s buffer memory in the device specified by the PLC CPU For details see Section 4 6 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC 8 6 Monitor Test MELSEC Q Purpose The displayed menu screen is used to perform various operations including the monitoring of the Q series C24 s operating status and setting values and the testing of its output signals The monitor test operations can be performed only via online operation Startup procedure Startup from Intelligent function module utility GX Developer Version 4 or later Online gt Monitor test gt Select monitor Test module Monitor test Monitor screen Startup from the system
387. rn a response message even though an external device transmitted a message and the RD LED blinked eee 10 31 10 3 4 Troubleshooting when an external device transmitted a message and RD LED blinked but the Read Request signal was not turned ON ccccecccssceeseeseeeneesseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseesaeees 10 32 10 3 5 Troubleshooting when communication error NAK generates cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeees 10 33 10 3 6 Troubleshooting when communication error C N generates eccecceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaees 10 33 10 3 7 Troubleshooting when communication error P S QenerateS ccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeseeeeeeeeaes 10 34 10 3 8 Troubleshooting when communication error PRO Qenerates ccecccceeeceeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeeeeaes 10 35 10 3 9 Troubleshooting when communication error SIO generates 1cecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeeeeaes 10 36 10 3 10 Troubleshooting when communication error CH1 ERR CH2 ERR generate 0 10 37 10 3 11 Troubleshooting when communications is intermittently established and lost 10 38 10 3 12 Troubleshooting when data that cannot be decoded is transmitted and received 10 39 A 10 A 10 10 3 13 Troubleshooting when it is unclear whether the communication error cause is in the Q series C24 or an external device cececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeaecaecaeeeeeaesaesaeseeeeaneaesaetentats 10 40 10 3 14 Troubleshooting w
388. rnal device side and send a command message like the one in the example below to the Q series C24 The commands used are as follows e When performing communication test in an A compatible 1C frame TT command for an example see the following page e When performing communication test in a QnA compatible frame 0619 command See the Reference Manual when performing communication tests in a QnA compatible frame Procedure 4 Checking loopback test result 1 The Q series C24 sends a response message to the external device when it receives a loopback test command message The Q series C24 sends the external device the received data as is 2 Check on the external device whether the data received from the Q series C24 matches the data sent from the external device 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q Procedure 5 Ending the loopback test Perform the following procedure according to the function used and start data communication e Set the switch settings with GX Developer according to the procedure specified in Section 4 5 2 e Turn on the power to the station on which the Q series C24 is installed x An example of control procedure when the TT command is used in the loopback test mentioned in Procedure 3 Station number 00 sum check code Yes TT ACPU common commana Header data sent Two characters hexadecimal Designate the number
389. rotocol Processing time unit ms Instruction execution condition Q02H Q06H Q12H ee ae Q02CPU Q00J Q00 Q01CPU a iat Instruction name Transmission Transmission receive Others i t QJ71C24N QJ71C24 QJ71C24N QJ71C24 QJ71C24N QJ71C24 speed Vregisterec data poun R2 R4 R2 R2 R4 R2 R2 R4 6 19200 bps 26 7 _ Datasize 8 40 TN x 8 bytes X 5 frames zea eer bit 1 ae none Execute instruction after 4 INPUT 0 bytes 40 bytes have been received pour _ 2s 6 a7o 305 a71 326 496 Bon 2 4 ee a ee SE o eee i pe fg fs fa fae G o pe MH S receipt buffer setting App 16 App 16 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 4 ASCll Code Table The ASCll code table is shown below 7 bit code The codes 00H to 1FH indicated by the are used as Q series C24 control codes DC codes 11H to 14H can be changed by the user Pee a a a ee ee ee ooo oor oro on 10 ior no m 10 SP oO JA oO o 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 oOzzr aj I0 nmo ow r fT gt mn NKXxXEE lt CHowoDO NV ana N x X S amp S lt l1oC D 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F App 17 App 17 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 5 External Dimensions 1 QU71C24N QU71C024 The following diagram shows the QJ71C24 and QJ71C24N The dimensions of the QJ71C24 are the same as QJ71C24N except for model name
390. rotocol etc Detailed settin Select the control PLC of the Q series C24 when a multiple g 8 p See QCPU User s Manual CPU system is employed A Multiple CPU Syst Multiple CPU settings Select when using a multiple CPU system Cvultipie ystem 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 5 2 Switch settings for I O and intelligent functional module Setting purpose The switch settings for I O module and intelligent functional module perform the settings for transmission specifications and communication protocol for communicate with external devices Setting procedure GX Developer PLC parameters gt I O assignment setting gt Switch setting For screen display see the GX Developer Operating Manual Setting screen Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module Model name Switch 2 ane 5 Tanal 4j Switch 5 QJ71C24N 0000 Display description 1 Switches 1 to 5 Set the transmission specifications and communication protocol of each interface using the combinations of setting values for each switch with 16 bit binary data according to the following table Switch number b15 to b8 b7 to bO Swen CH1 Communication rate setting CH1 Transmission setting Switch 2 CH1 communication protocol setting Seec ef c 3 b15 to b8 b7 to bO h Swicka CH2 Communication rate setting CH2 Transmission setting Seeajiand b
391. rtn 0 Then MsgBox The connection was successful Else MsgBox Connection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub Private Sub Command2_ Click t KKK K K K K K K K K K ok K K K K K K K Read t KKK K K K 2 K K 2K K K K K K K K K K K Dim rtn As Long Dim idata 5 As Integer D0 D4 are read rtn ActEasylIF1 ReadDeviceBlock2 D0 5 idata 0 If rtn 0 Then MsgBox D0 D5 amp idata 0 amp amp idata 1 amp amp idata 2 amp amp idata 3 amp amp idata 4 Else MsgBox Read Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub App 27 App 27 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Private Sub Command3_ Click t KKK K K K K K K K K ok K K K Ok K K K K Disconnection TKKK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K Dim rtn As Long Disconnection rtn ActEasylF1 Close If rtn 0 Then MsgBox The disconnection was successful Else MsgBox Disconnection Error amp Hex rtn End If End Sub b When Visual C is used IL X K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K Connection IL X K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K void CVCDIg OnOpen long IRet CString szMessage UpdateData Get LogicalStationNumber m_actEasylF SetActLogicalStationNumber m_ LogicalStationNumber Connection IRet m_actEasylF Open if IRet 0 MessageBox The connection was successful else szMessage Format Connection Error x IRet MessageBox szMessage App 28 App 28
392. ry code was received e A nonexistent command or device was designated Command error e The remote password length is wrong MC protocol message error e There is no data ETX CR LF etc following the character area or designation was incorrect 10 19 Corrective action Bidire ctional e Correct the setting value of the read point of the monitoring value of the CPU abnormal monitoring notification is sent e If there is an error in the CPU eliminate the error on the CPU side and communicate again e Interlock handshake the send requests e Make the transmission data count smaller than the transmit buffer size Make the non procedure protocol transmit buffer size larger Designate the first address and size of transmission receipt buffer in the free area range of the user When writing to Flash ROM set switch shown left of the given interface to ON and restart the Q series C24 Check the read write request data and designate the correct data by performing handshake with the external device etc e Perform handshake with the request source external device e Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications When communicating using ASCII gt BIN conversion always transmit the data in even number bytes units Check and correct the external device transmit message and restart data communications Check and correct the external devic
393. s RST M21 7 Transmission request X21 RST M101 7 External Transmission command normal completion RST M102 Transmission abnormal completion When a function version A for the Q Series C24 is used add the partial circuit shown with 1 shown in the program example in Section 6 1 4 3 Communications are possible when M19 is ON App 31 App 31 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 Program Examples for Using Q Series C24 at MELSECNET H Remote I O Station Appendix 9 1 System configuration and program conditions 1 App 32 System configuration The system configuration used in the program examples of this section is shown below QJ71LP21 25 Remote master station 2 MELSECNET H remote I O net network No 1 QJ72IP25 25 Remote I O station Station No 1 1 It is assumed that the QU71C24N is mounted on Slot 0 of the base unit and the starting I O No is 0 2 Set the network parameters of the remote master station as shown below 1 Network type MNET H Remote master 2 Starting I O No 0000H 3 Network No 1 4 Total stations zi 5 Mode Online 6 Network range assignment XY setting M station gt R station M station lt _R station a StationNo ie RK x x Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End Points Start End 1 64 1000 103F 64 0000 O03F 64 1000 103F 64 0000 oF i7 4 gt 7 Refresh parameters Link side
394. s Change display color Options Create start up setting file oot Intelligent function utility Start Intelligent Function Module When used via online operation Select Parameter Setting Module screen 1 Go to next page MELSEC GPPW sample Id When auto refresh is set gt 2 Go to next page j Flash ROM settings screen samen care ble Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Module model name QU71C24 N o ores ea es see Sate a Data for user modem initialization Data for modem init See Section 8 3 2 ee ee CH1 Transmission control and others system setting CH1 Transmission control k CH1 MC protocol system setting CH1 MC protocol When used via offline operation CHT Non procedure syster sting CH Non piocsdure 7 Select Tools Flash ROM stting from the menu bar Fie save Fle read Cose See Section 8 4 Flash ROM setting Honain Select the module type and To each setting screen Serial Communications Module module model name Module model name ETS E QJ71024 N Bs Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Cancel Module model name QJ71C24 N Setting item Setting value The data which can be changed is shown by Hff and the following byte Please specily the registering part of the control code as cod
395. s Incorporation Pentium and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective owners VS VIEW Copyright c 2001 ComponentOne LLC VS FlexGrid Pro Copyright c 2000 VideoSoft Corporation SPREAD Copyright c 1996 FarPoint Technologies Inc Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User s Manual Basic MODEL QJ71C24 U KI E MODEL 13JL86 SH NA 080006 H 0409 MEE sfa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE 1 8 12 OFFICE TOWER Z 14F HARUMI CHUO KU 104 6212 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
396. s completed abnormally the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the transmission result S1 1 In case of operation errors the error flag SMO turns on and the error code is stored in SDO See one of the following manuals according to the error code and check and correct the error lt Error code gt 4FFFu or less QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7000H or more Section 10 2 of the User s Manual Basic 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Program example MELSEC Q The following example shows a program that sends any data stored in D11 to D15 using the bidirectional protocol When the input output signals of the Q series C24 are from X YO00 to X Y1F x20 PLS 50 MOV ABCDEFG MOV HOAOD mo K ov Ko Wv K Do D11 Wo m SET m wv m SET x21 a RST M50 D15 DO DI D2 MO M101 D101 M102 M101 M102 Transmission command is converted to pulse Transmission data is stored Designate the number of the interface CHL that will send the data Clear the transmission result storage device to 0 Designate the transmission data count in word units Designate K10 when the unit is bytes The transmission data stored in the designated device is sent After the BIDOUT instruction is executed the user designated transmission complete signal M1 turns ON for one scan Storing the transmi
397. s included as 1 byte of data included in the message 2 When the receive complete code is changed and an arbitrary code is designated OOOO designated User defined receive complete code data is added to the end of the message and sent from the external device When the Q series C24 receives the receive complete code data changed by the user it stores the receive data up to the receive complete code to the buffer memory receive area and turned on the read request signal to the PLC CPU Receive complete code data External device Q series C24 Reception data request signal X3 XA 3 When receive complete code not designated FFFFH designated Reading by received data count is enabled See 2 for a description of reading by received data count 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Reception by received data count For fixed length reception a This method is used to receive messages of the same length size from the external device every time b When the Q series C24 receives data of the received data count preset in GX Configurator SC by the user it sends a reception data read request to the sequence program When the sequence program receives the read request from the Q series C24 it reads data up to the received data count received from the external device c The received data count default value is set to 511 words However it can be changed within the size of the rece
398. s not operate in the The setting value of the condition e Review the condition agreement cycle time designated in agreement transmission is incorrect transmission setting condition agreement e The cycle time is affected by some causes Remove the causes or designate the cycle transmission setting time anticipating the causes j Bidirection Circumstance Cause Corrective action al protocol Interrupt issuance was not designated e Designate interrupt issuance e Receiving by instruction other than e Use BUFRCVS instruction to receive BUFRCVS interrupt data Parameter setting PC system setting e Review Parameter setting PS system or Interrupt pointer setting are not set on setting Interrupt pointer setting on the the PLC CPU side or the settings are PLC CPU side incorrect e Cannot receive data with the interrupt program 10 3 19 Troubleshooting when data cannot be written to Flash ROM a Bidirection Circumstance Cause Corrective action e Cannot write data to Flash set to allow allow switch settings by GX Developer setting by GX Developer 10 42 10 42 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 20 Troubleshooting when the ERR LED is lit S Bidirection Circumstance Cause Corrective action e A communication error has occurred e Check the error and remove the cause ar according to Section 10 1 1 e ERR LED is lit r 7 A 7 s e Switch settings of the Q series C24 are e Review t
399. seeeeaseate 4 25 4 7 1 ROM RAMISwitch testais nner iaeiei ariaa iaaiiai 4 25 4 7 2 Individual station loopback tOSt eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeeeeeeaeeeaeenas 4 28 4 8 Loopback Tostens AAE A acu titua TA 4 30 49 Maintenance and INSpection vices wtiin wh iia et ie itn ee in ee 4 32 4 9 1 Maintenance and inSpection sioen a aAa BAAI A 4 32 4 9 2 When mounting dismounting the MOUIC ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateas 4 33 5 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE MELSEC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL 5 1 to 5 6 5 1 Data Communication Functions cccecceeceeeeeececeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaesaecaesseeeaecaesaeseaesaesaeseseaesaesaeseeeeateats 5 1 5 1 1 Accessing the PLC CPUs using the MC protocol ccccecceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeseeeeaesaeseeeeaeeaeeeeeeeens 5 1 5 1 2 Message format and control procedure for data COMMUNICATION ceeeceeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeaees 5 2 5 1 3 PLC CPU setting for performing data COMMUNICATION ceseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeseeeeeteeeeaetaeeeeeeaeeaees 5 2 5 1 4 Support of multiple CPU system or redundant system cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeseeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaes 5 3 5 1 5 Support for the QCPU remote password FUNCTION cecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeteeesaeeaeseteaeeaetaeeneseaeeaes 5 4 5 2 Utilizing the MX Component ccecceceeseeeeceececeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaecaeceeeceeeeaeca
400. ser 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if an
401. ser definable area of the buffer memory address 400H to 1AFFu 2600H to 3FFFH Receive buffer memory length designation Designate by addresses the length of the area 0001H to 1A00u to be used as the receive area in the user definable area of the buffer memory address 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH If the following functions are also used when the position and size of the receive area in the buffer memory are changed make sure that the addresses of the receive area do not overlap with those for the buffer memory that stores the transmission and reception data to be used by these functions MC protocol buffer memory read write function MC protocol on demand function Non procedure protocol transmission receive function Bidirectional protocol transmission receive function Communication data monitoring function 2 When sending data to the Q series C24 from the external device one of the following two adjustments should be made so that the relationship shown below is maintained 1 Reduce the send data size 2 Increase the receive area Receive data storage area gt Size of data portion sent from the external device 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 2 Arrangement of receive data The following example illustrates the arrangement of data received from the external device when it is stored in the receive area 1 The receive message is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory receive da
402. serial communication module e To learn how to check for a connection error with the external devices e Section 4 8 describes how to perform the individual module test and the loopback test using MC protocol based communication x Details of the loopback test command are described in the reference manual 3 To learn about data communication functions and detailed explanations a To learn about the communication functions e Section 3 4 describes an overview of the serial communication module functions b To learn about detailed explanations of the communication functions e The basic communication methods are described in Chapters 5 to 7 e Special functions are described in the User s Manual Application 4 To learn about data communication functions and programming a To learn how to read data from and written to the PLC CPU e Data is read from and written to the PLC CPU with a communication function using the MC protocol Details are described in the Reference Manual e Appendix 7 describes an overview of the communication support tool MX Component that supports communication using the MC protocol b To learn how to send and receive data between the PLC CPU and the external devices e Data communication between the PLC CPU and the external devices is performed with a communication function using the non procedure protocol or the bidirectional protocol e Chapter 6 explains details of the communication functions and
403. series C24 is a module that connects the Q series PLC CPU and an external device using an RS 232 or RS 422 485 line for serial communication in order to achieve the data communication described below By using a modem terminal adapter a public line analog digital can be used for data communication with a remote location e PLC data collection change from the external devices See the MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Manual PLC monitoring and control from the external devices See Chapter 2 of the User s Manual Application Data receiving and sending in any formats that conform to the external device specifications See 2 and 3 of Section 1 2 Collection of measured data from a measuring device See 2 of Section 1 2 Operation of a PLC CPU that is connected to a personal computer hereinafter abbreviated as PC installed with GX Developer SW4D5C GPPW E or later hereinafter abbreviated as GX Developer See the GX Developer Manual Ga Ry PLC data collection change Collection of measured data cuTiGee Re s cals Se fe e PLC monitoring and control from an external device e Data receiving and sending in any formats that conform to the external device specifications GX Developer e File writing reading Collection of read data e Device monitoring testing Being a convenient means of connection among different devices PCs display devices printers etc the seri
404. settings perform the settings for the types of modules to be mounted on a base unit the range of input output signals and switches of the Q series C24 Startup procedure GX Developer PLC parameters gt I O assignment For screen display see the GX Developer Operating Manual Setting screen Qn H Parameter PLC name Puc yster Puc file Puc RAS De ce Prog an Boot fi SFC 1 0 Assignment Model name Paints a PLE Switch setting 32points Detailed setting Intelli If the start x and Y are not input the PLC assigns them automatically It is not possible to check correctly when there is a slot of the unsetting on the way Standard setting aa Points Base mode EE Auto C Detail Increasel Increase2 Increase3 8 fixation 12 fixation Increase5 Settings should be set as same when Diversion of multiple PLC parameter Read PLC data using multiple PLC Acknowledge XY assignment Multiple g Default Check End Cancel Display description Item name Setting for item Remarks Type Select intelli Model name Enter the module model name to be mounted Example QJ71C24N Points Select 32 points VO Start XY Enter the start I O signal Hexadecimal for the target module assignment Switch settin Set the communication rate transmission specifications 9 P See Section 4 5 2 communication p
405. sides b Setting using GX Configurator SC see Section 8 4 12 Set the flash ROM write allow prohibit designation to Allowed Some system setting screens have a pair of screens one for CH1 and the other for CH2 Please note that the explanations given in Section 8 4 1 and thereafter apply to the online operations performed in the CH1 screens The setting items are the same between CH1 and CH2 but different buffer memory addresses are used to store the setting values The respective addresses are indicated as follows where applicable Left side address for the CH1 side right side address for the CH2 side Setting value storage buffer Reference section containing detailed Setting item f memory address explanation DTR D l designation User s Manual Application 5 When a multiple CPU system is employed GX Configurator SC should be connected to the control PLC of the Q series C24 and the system setting data register in the flash ROM It is not possible to set target PLC to multiple CPU setting of Transfer setup of GX Developer and register the system setting data in the flash ROM 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 4 1 User frame registration Purpose Register the user frame used in the following functions On demand function using the MC protocol e Data transmission receive function using the non procedure protocol Startup procedure e Online operation Monitor screen User frame e Off
406. signment switch setting interrupt pointer setting etc o fx Usable A Usable Model serial no production date limited x Usable App 2 App 2 APPENDIX MELSEC Q x1 There is a limitation in the production date of the Q series C24 that contains functions that are usable For version verification see section 2 6 x2 The data reception using format 0 refers to the method of receiving data by user frame which was supported in the Q series C24 of function version A x3 The Q series C24 of function version A is capable of setting one pair of transparent code and additional code per interface for both transmission and reception x4 This function can be used when connecting with GX Developer x5 This function is available in GX Developer Version 6 or later x6 GX Developer can only be connected to the CH1 side in case of the Q series C24 of function version A It is not possible to connect both GX Developer and the GOT to the two interfaces at the same time App 3 App 3 APPENDIX MELSEC Q 2 List of added setting items for GX Configurator SC The following table lists the setting items added to the GX Configurator SC due to a software version upgrade GX Configurator SC Software version SWODS5C QSCU E Reference Version section 1 10L Screen System Additional setting item setting monitor Accumulated count of unlock process normal completion fsa ON E completion Fla e Mode
407. smission is completed until transmission processing is completed the state changes to the high impedance state The transmission rate set in the Q Series C24 is the object When the transmission rate is 600 bps or higher When the transmission rate is 50 bps 300 bps Time for 0 to 1 bits of data to be sent several ms Output control input External device Data Q series C24 Data Output control input fea a mark for 2 characters or longer Output control input ON time range Low impedance state Data send time range H W gate OFF time i g See explanation above Output control input OFF time range High impedance state Q series C24 is in the data transmission and data reception enable status Q series C24 is in the data reception enable state 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 1 When the external device and the Q series C24 connected in n 1 and m n configurations When the send signal of each device is connected as shown below if the Output control input is turned ON at two or more devices the relevant devices output Send data at the same time For the external device to transfer data normally e Output control input must be turned ON only when sending data e Output control input must be turned OFF when not sending data External device or converter Send data ntrol in Output control input RDA Receive data Send data i Q ser
408. ssage is skipped monitoring time is too When transmission from an external device is interrupted See Chapter 6 of User s Manual Application for a detailed description of the monitoring time XO was not turned monitoring time is set to long 10 32 10 32 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 5 Troubleshooting when communication error NAK generates Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure e See section that describes the communication error signal C N P S PRO SIO that are turned on e Take corrective action corresponding to the contents of the error simultaneously when the NAK signal is turned on e Communication error Note signal NAK turned on Since the error code is added to NAK and is transmitted from the Q series C24 to the external device when the NAK signal is turned on take the corrective action described in the error code table see Section 10 2 Since the error code added when NAK is transmitted is stored to the Q series C24 buffer memory shown below it can also be checked at the Q series C24 Error code storage buffer memory address CH1 side 25AH CH2 side 10 3 6 Troubleshooting when communication error C N generates Symptom Corrective action Bidirectional procedure The Q series C24 e Change to a CPU to which the Q series C24 cannot be installed in can be installed the CPU PLC No designated e Change the PLC No to loc
409. ssary data e Measure the noise e When connecting the multidrop remove the interlock so that data will not be transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices 10 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code Hexa decimal 7F69H 7F6Au Buffer full error D signal 7F6Bu CD signal contro error 7F6CH Transmission error 7F91H to Parity error 7F9EH 7FAOH 7FA3H 9 t 7F9AH 7F9DH te te to 7FB2u to 7FBCu 7FCOn to 7FC4x 10 21 Error Contents Data does not match the parity bit setting A malfunction occurred in the network because the power source of the partner station was on or off Noise occurs in the network When the multidrop was connected data was transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices OS receive buffer overflowed and receive data was skipped Data was received when CD signal is OFF when CD terminal check enabled was designated Data cannot be sent because the line is not connected MELSEC Q Bidire ctional Corrective action Match the Q series C24 and external device settings Clear the error information according to the error information initialization request YE YF In addition when communicating data with the non procedure protocol execute the INPUT instruction and read and discard the unnecessary data Measure the noise When connecting the multidrop remove the interlock so that data will not be transmitted simultaneously by multiple devices
410. ssignment settings eeeeeeeeee 4 12 Individual station loopback test 4 28 Individual station test c ceeceeeee 4 25 Initializing error information eee 10 6 INPUT Sabi ein eal wile ate 9 8 Installing utility PACKAGE eee 8 3 Interrupt POINTED iano iennan 4 20 LEDs displayed eeceeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 4 4 Linked operation 4 17 List of applications and assignments of the buffer Memory 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 17 List of input output signals for the PEC GRU A A EA E A ATA 3 15 Index 1 M Maaa texte ea a aaa a aaa ss 2 4 Monitor test teod reinen Nn 8 32 Multiple CPU system s s s 1 7 5 3 N Maar a e E E ars 2 3 NAK aa an n aa a E a a 10 33 Non procedure protocol cce cee eee 6 1 O ONDEMAND cecceeceeceeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeteeeaees 9 2 Operation MOEC ccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 13 OUTPUT fgstaignctaeinh citi ancien 9 5 P P S is nda aiantnde aan ivavilatenl ivawt 10 34 Parity DMs sina Sins wae idee ater 4 14 Part names and functions 0 00 4 3 PRO stitch A AA 10 35 Processing time sassarese App 14 Q QnA A series module seseseeeeeeeeee App 6 R Reading the data communication SEALUS vei ahi ari r a 10 10 Reading the RS 232 control signal Statusa a ar AeA A 10 9 Reading the signal status RS 232 10 9 Receive area bidirectional ceee 7 4 Receive area non procedure s 6 6
411. ssing for normal completion gt X1000 ET RST ae lt Processing for abnormal completion gt X1001 ET LS OR lt Abnormal completion Read of on demand execution result gt M13 X101E H _ 7 RENFR JI KI KI HO M104 M105 H256 D8 LS M105 a ET lt Abnormal completion Read of LED ON status gt M4 X101E H Z REMFR J1 K1 K1 HO ee H201 D9 M106 M107 ET m07 n er ST a za 22 a App 36 M10 DO D1 M100 M11 M200 D2 D3 M102 M12 M201 Y1000 M12 M300 Y1000 M301 M13 M104 M14 M202 M106 M203 M204 Y1000 beet ee eee a eg oe ee La Led be bat MELSEC Q Changes the transmission command into pulses Sets the transmission data Transfers the transmission data to the transmission area address of the buffer memory On demand function designation command Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Buffer memory head address for on demand function Data length for on demand function Transfers the setting value to the on demand function designation area of the buffer memory Sets the on demand data transmission flag Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Turns ON the transmission request signal Resets the on demand data transmission flag Normal completion of on demand data transmission Turns OFF the transmission request signal Abnormal completio
412. ssion data and writing the transmission data count in the buffer memory and issuing a transmission request to Q series C24 are all executed by the PLC CPU The completion flag is reset by the external command 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 9 6 BIDIN Instruction This instruction receives data using the bidirectional protocol Applicable device MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10_ Special module Direct JO O UO GO Internal device System user File register Index register Zn Constant Others Instruction Executing code condition Command BIDIN H sion Un S D1 D2 Command BIDIN fo GP BIDIN Un S D1 D2 Set data Description ignal of th Un ee e modu e f F user emet bit 00 to FE Top two digit when I O signals are expressed in 3 digit User Head number of the devices in which control data is stored ee system Device name Head number of the devices in which receive data is stored psen Bit device number to be turned on at completion of execution System The file register per local device and program cannot be used as the set data Control data Set data Setting range _ Setby Set receive channel Receive channel 1 Channel 1 CH1 side 1 2 User 2 Channel 2 CH2 side e Reception result by a BIDIN instruction are Reception result rt System Normal S 2 Receive data count __ The number of data received is stored Allowable number of
413. st Close 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Setting items Setting item f buffer memory address detailed explanation 2044 2144 20461 21461 Number of registered word blocks designation 204D 214DH Number of registered bit blocks designation 204EH 214En PLC CPU abnormal monitoring designation 204FH 214FH No n block monitoring device 2050H 2150h to Monitoring device designation 20A1H 21A1H 2051H 2052H 2151H Head device No designation 2152H to 20A1H 20A2H 21A1H 21A2H 2053H 2153 Chapter 2 of 20A3H 21A User s Manual Application Condition agreement transmission 2054H 2 154 Monitoring condition designation 20A4H 2055H 2155 20A5H 2056H 2156 20A6H 2057H 2157 20A7H 21A7 2058H 2158H 20A8H 21A8 Read point designation Monitoring condition value designation Transmission pointer designation Number of output designation Data No for connection designation PLC PCU abnormal monitoring designation Condition agreement transmission 20E6H 21E6 Transmission pointer Output count designation 20E7H 21E7 Data No for connection designation 20E8H 21E8 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 4 10 Transmission user frame No designation system setting Purpose Register the output frame number to transmit data with the non procedure protocol using the user frame Startup procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Output frame system setting e Offline opera
414. st t ONES aao ere EET en ee le a 8 47 8 6 10 Display LED off and communication error information error code initialization 0 eee 8 49 8 7 Non Procedure Protocol Receive Data Clear cceccecceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeceeeeeesaesaesesaesaeseeseaesaesaeeeeseeeaees 8 51 9 1 Dedicated Instruction Listam narama naan dl adania niadniad dl adn adadiniad aad 9 1 9 2 ONDEMAND INStruction stants laiidaiddaics fal taleh fait hit il ia el a ae See 9 2 9 3 QUTPUT MStrUCtionisecss tects beck ice a he cheers sheets chabavi ely duchagh etna ie cbachachatevdeas aaa aaa r a aoa aaa ia 9 5 OFA INPUT INST CHOI aaeeea wet ea ra alae its la aa AEE le Ea lived es ETERRA 9 8 9 5 BIDOUTIN SUCIO aaa aapa aaa aaa ar aaa haa asp aa Aaaa aaae oaa Aea tt ccede dusestasth attadieatasta shee 9 11 9 6 BIDIN Instruction sonion n ie arate a r 9 14 9 7 SPBUSY INStrUuCtion T a eaaa aa a aa Aa aAa a aaa A Ea aa Aaaa AAAA daa NES 9 17 9 8 CSET Receive data Clear cceccesccececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaeeaecaeseeseesaeseceeaesaecaeseaeeaeeaeseseaseaeeaesneeeaseaees 9 19 10 1 Checking the Status of the Serial Communication Module cecceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeateeeeeeeeeaees 10 1 10 1 1 Checking the LED ON status communications error status and switch setting status of the serial COMMUNICATION module ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeesaeeseeseeeseeeseeeteeeeeeeeaaes 10 1 10 1 2 Initializing error information of the seri
415. t pulse M5 lt S SOS itt Receive data Receive data clear request clear pulse acknowledgement lt Executes the receive data clear request gt M16 M200 M11 M12 M17 X3 X4 KX HO HOA8 K1 K1 Receive data Reception Receive Receive Reception clear processing data data abnormal acknowledge in progress clear read detection ment in progress request C24 normal Transmission fea er m7 Receive data clear in progress lt Reads the status of receive data clear request gt M17 M200 FROM HO HOA8 D100 K1 Receive data clear in progress C24 normal KO D100 RST M16 Receive data clear acknowledgement RST M17 Receive data clear in progress X20 fs mo Transmission Transmission request request pulse 20 S M21 Transmission Transmission pu uost request App 30 App 30 APPENDIX MELSEC Q N21 M16 M17 MOV ABCDEFG D11 7 Transmission Reception request data clear in progress Receive data clear acknowledgement MOV HOAOD D15 J MOV Ki DO MOV Ko D1 y WOV K D2 7 lt Executes the transmission procession gt Uo DO D11 Mo 7 Transmission completion status device G OUTPUT SET M12 7 Transmission processing in progress MO M1 t SET M101 Transmi Transmission Transmission ssion completion normal completion 4 completion MOV D1 D101 SET M102 Transmission abnormal completion RST M2 7 Transmission processing in progres
416. t allowed column Indicates whether or not it is possible to use a value in the corresponding area by registering it to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Allowed Area that can be registered and used Not allowed Area that cannot be registered IMPORTANT Do not write data in the System area of the buffer memory If data is written to any of the system areas the PLC system may malfunction Some of the user areas are partially system areas Care must be taken when performing read write to the buffer memory 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 1 Use the FROM TO instructions or other applicable commands to access the buffer memory shown in this section when a program for a QnA series serial communication module is utilized for the Q series C24 see Section 2 in Appendix In QCPU the access to the buffer memory of an intelligent function module is executed with a dedicated instruction It is not necessary to access directly using the FROM TO instructions or other instructions from the sequence program except when accessing the buffer memory as shown in the programming on each function reference page When a program for a QnA series serial communication module is utilized for the Q series C24 it is recommended to replace the instructions with the dedicated instructions shown on the corresponding function reference page of each manual for the Q series C24 The following initial settings changing the default values for data communic
417. t be turned on if the Q series C24 sends an NAK message to the external device in response to the command message Error codes see Section 10 2 corresponding to the error content when the NAK message is sent back to the external device are stored in the following areas when communicating with an A compatible 1C frame the error codes differ from the transmission error code When checking error codes transmitted by the PLC CPU incorporate the following program in case of the interface on the CH1 side Read command FROMP HO H25A DO KI Reads transmission error codes from address 25An TOP HO H25A KO K1 Clears error codes Check the error codes and take corrective action according to Section 10 2 10 8 0 8 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 1 3 Reading the RS 232 control signal status This section explains how to read the control signal status stored in the buffer memory during communication using RS 232 interface When GX Configurator SC is used check the status using the Transmission control and others monitor test screen see Section 8 6 3 When a transmission problem occurs read operation is executed to check the signal on off status of the RS 232 interface 1 RS 232 control signal status storage area address 254H 264n The status of the RS 232 signals is stored in buffer memory addresses 254H and 264 as follows b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO 1 0 Information on CH1 side Buffer memory addr
418. t byte count in the message to be transmitted and received is the same The PLC CPU units can be set using the GX Configurator SC word byte units designation Make the length of the data area in the message to be transmitted and received the size of the Q series C24 buffer memory transmission data designation area and receive data storage area or less NAK code response 1 Response from the Q series C24 to external device After the error detection message reception complete it transmits the NAK code to the external device 2 Response from external device to the Q series C24 Transmit the error code 0022H to 0O05FH immediately after the NAK response 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL 5 MELSEC Q Perform error processing according to the error code received immediately after the NAK message at the device that received NAK as the response message after data transmission Chapter 10 shows the error codes that are transmitted from the Q series C24 If the Q series C24 receives an NAK response while transmitting data to an external device it completes data transmission then reads the NAK perform abnormal completion If the Q series C24 detects an error while receiving data it ignores the receive data corresponding to the data length If the data length is abnormal the Q series C24 ignores all the data up to the receive message head data ENQ etc received thereafter External device time out check
419. t signal BIDIN instruction completion device BIDIN instruction 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 1 When the control code ENQ is received the Q series C24 starts data reception processing When the data specified by the data length is received the Q series C24 ends the reception processing of that data If Sum check is set with GX Developer the Q series C24 checks whether the message is normal or abnormal using the sum check code received immediately after the message and the sum check code calculated by internal processing x If No sum check is set with GX Developer messages are not checked using the sum check codes If the message has normally been received the reception data read request signal X3 XA turns ON If an error has been detected when receiving the message the Q series C24 sends an abnormal end response NAK message to the external device The reception data read request will not be sent to the PLC CPU The reception abnormal detection signal X4 XB does not come on Control data is stored in the device designated with the BIDIN instruction and then the BIDIN instruction is executed Receive data is read from the receive area of the buffer memory 4 When the BIDIN instruction has been executed the Q series C24 sends a normal end response ACK message to the external device 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 1 2 Arrangement and cont
420. t system from the GX Developer y i Check the Q Series C24 s settings connection to the Q Series There i in the telephone No of the Check the telephone No ri n error in g C24 is refused CSS AN OONN ee Change the telephone No to the data for connection system callback Adjust each of the timer values for the It is possible to connect The timer value for the status of the modem callback function on the GX Developer side from the GX Developer but used or the line is short Line callback cancel wait time callback callback from the Q Series delay time C24 cannot be performed There is a problem with the modem Check the modem s specifications and i specifications or settings settings 10 41 10 41 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 15 Troubleshooting when data cannot be communicated with the ISDN sub address Non eT A Bidirection Circumstance Corrective action procedure e Sub address is incorrect e Review the sub address communicated with ISDN address address sub address Sub address is incorrectly partitioned using the TA manual A Bidirection e Does not operate in the The setting value of the constant cycle e Review the constant cycle transmission cycle time designated in the _ transmission is incorrect setting constant cycle transmission e The cycle time is affected by some causes e Remove the causes or designate the cycle setting time anticipating the causes Doe
421. ta read completion signal X1 Y8 OFF 2 Change procedure When data reception from an external device causes the reception data read request signal reception abnormal detection signal to turn ON turn ON the reception data read completion signal after performing the following e Read the receive data e Change the setting values for the receive complete code and the received data count Example When reading data received in the CH1 side interface External Data 1 Data 2 device side saj N Data read request using eee Data read request using PLC CPU side setting value A 1 gt s _ setting value B 2 Read request signal 1 X3 Reads 2 A receive data Reads Read completion signal receive data 3 5 Y1 AN Received data count setting area buffer memory address A44 Receive complete code setting area buffer memory address A54 Setting vau Bo Setting value B Setting value t gt lt Setting value 2 Program example I O signals for the Q series C24 are from X Y00 to X Y1F Read request 1 x3 2 Reads receive data count 1 Reads the data that is equal to the receive data count Change the setting value for the received data count as needed Change the setting value for the receive complete code as needed Turns ON the read complete signal x1 When unit is in bytes 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 6 2
422. ta storage area 2 The data is stored to the receive data storage area in low address L gt H next address L H order If the received data is ABCDEFG123 it will be stored as shown below for the CH1 side Q series C24 Receive area buffer memory Receive data response message Receive 5 i 00H 05x Data data count 5 A length storage area 420 44n j 0005s Dic 44n 43H Receive F E data storage ee a area 31n 47H 3 72 33H 32 External device Normal completion x When the data length unit is in bytes OOH is stored in the higher byte of the last data storage position in the receive area when the data length of the message is an even byte 3 Contents of receive data x The contents of receive data including the receive data as indicated in Section 7 2 2 are explained below a Control codes The types of control codes are shown in the table below Signal Code Contents Application ETE PP Code for starting data transmission Response code to the opposite side when data was received normally Response code to the opposite side when data could not be received normally Error code is sent immediately after the response code Acknowledge Negative Acknowledge 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 the Q series C24 checks and processes the control code received It cannot be read from the
423. tected Therefore the receive data does not have to be cleared 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 Sending Data to the External Device This section explains data transmission from the PLC CPU to the external device 7 2 1 Transmission methods The following shows the method of sending data to the external device through data communication using the bidirectional protocol PLC CPU Q series C24 External PLC program Buffer memory device Transmission area Any data 3 1 2 Write ae Data gt BIDOUT baa gt Sum check code Data aa Data length ENQ instruction 00H to FFn Pa j fis a a acy a 001 to FFu a When normal ACK 5 E e 4 lt Transmission os When abnormal completed POEH nak lenor code ea m Contents CH1 CH2 Control timing Send instruction BIDOUT instruction completion device BIDOUT instruction BIDOUT Data such as control data and transmission data are stored in the device designated with the BIDOUT instruction and then the BIDOUT instruction is executed The transmission data count and transmission data are written into the transmission area of the buffer memory The Q series C24 sends data by adding the control code ENQ at the beginning of the data When Sum check is designated with GX Developer the Q series C24 adds the sum check code calculated by in
424. ted while the read request of the input output signal is turned on 9 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function x1 2 x3 MELSEC Q For error codes relating to abnormal completion see Chapter 10 of the User s Manual Basic When setting Word byte units designation by GX Configurator SC set the number of bytes when bytes are designated and set the number of words when words are designated The settings are done by either of the following e User Data set by the user before executing the INPUT instructions e System The PLC CPU stores the execution result of the INPUT instructions The function stores in the device designated in D1 and succeeding devices the data received with the non procedure protocol of the module designated in Un according to the control data of the device designated in S and succeeding devices When an INPUT instruction is executed on a channel other INPUT instructions cannot be executed on the channel at the same time If an attempt is made during execution of an INPUT instruction to execute another INPUT instruction the second instruction will not be executed until the execution of the first INPUT instruction is completed In case of reading the receive data to the same interface it cannot be used along with BUFRCVS instruction for interrupt programs Whether an INPUT instruction was completed normally or abnormally can be checked by the completion device D2 or status display device at
425. ter 3 of password Remote password mismatch notification accumulated count Allowed User s 8205 function designation Manual 200Dn OH No designation Application 1H to FFFFH Cumulative times of notification 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address a Applicable Registration Decimal Hex Application Nime initial protocol allowed not Peference MC Non E alowed Section 8 4 4 For designation 8206 Janan Circuit disconnect wait time PLC CPU watch use Chapter 3 a ooe 9f modem 0000H to FFFFH Wait time unit s KU none ie function 3 i Manual Application 8207 E 200Fx Use prohibited System area Receive interrupt issued designation Chapter 4 of 3208 z546 Imen rupt RW Allowed User s Manual 20101 2110 designation 0 Do not issue interrupt 1 Issue interrupt Application 8209 8465 ba OTH 04444 Use prohibited System area 8210 8466 Transmission control start free area designation 64 Chapter 7 of 2012 21121 64 to 4 095 transmission control start free area User s 82 8467 For transmission Transmission control end free area designation Manual 201 263 to 4096 transmission control end free area Application control EET Allowed Non procedure and non reception monitoring time format Chapter 6 of designation User s Manual Application designation 1 0 Format 0 1 Format 1 Use prohibited System area Communication data monitoring designation 0000H N
426. ter Tee Tools Help A s Start O No Inteligent function module parameter setting module select Enter the start I O number for the applicable the Q series C24 Start 1 0 No Module type T EEEE using a hexadecimal expression Mocka model hame e Module type QU7IC24 N N R4 Select Serial communication module Module model name Select the module model name of the applicable the Q series C24 Intelligent function module parameter setting module The modules for which parameters are set with the intelligent function module utility are displayed Select the target module of your operation HES ADE eth Delete Ext x Itis not necessary to select Intelligent function module select parameter setting module to perform monitor test operation Parameter setting module Intelligent function module parameter Start 1 0 No Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh A QJ71C24 N N R4 Unavailable Explanation of items 1 How to start each screen a Starting the flash ROM setting screen Tools Flash ROM setting gt Module type gt Module model Name gt b Starting auto refresh settings Start I O No Module type Module model name Auto refresh c Monitor test module selection screen Online gt Monitor test Module selection Monitor test 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC
427. ternal processing to the end of the message and then transmits the message When No sum check is designated with GX Developer no sum check code is sent A response for the data transmission for normal completion ACK message for abnormal completion NAK message is received The execution of the BIDOUT instruction completes with the transmission processing completion of the Q series C24 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 2 2 Arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data This section explains the arrangement and contents of the transmission area and the transmission data for performing data transmission using the bidirectional protocol For details on the contents of transmission data see Section 7 1 2 3 1 Transmission area The transmission area is a memory area for storing the data and the data count that are transmitted from the PLC CPU to the external device via the Q series C24 By default the transmission area is assigned to addresses 400H to 5FFH CH1 side and 800H to 9FFH CH2 side eaa a a a The unit of transmission data count Ckit side Bufi words bytes is in accordance with the uiigrmemory word byte units designation in GX Configurator SC oe 5 Transmission dataicount l Transmission data count 401n 8 designationarga The transmission data count designated with the o BIDOUT instruction is written and sent as the to 2 Tr
428. the communication area of the buffer memory Turns ON the transmission request signal Abnormal completion of REMTO instruction Normal completion of transmission Turns OFF the transmission request signal Abnormal completion of transmission Transmission result acquisition instruction Reads the data transmission result of the buffer memory to D20 Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Turns OFF the transmission request signal App 40 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 6 When clearing received data The following program example uses the receive data clear request area of the buffer memory Refer to Section 6 1 4 for received data clear 1 Program conditions The following program clears the received data in the OS area of the QU71C24N when the receive clear command X1025 turns ON a Devices used e Receive clear command ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees X1025 e Receive clear processing execution command 0 0 M10 e Receive processing flAQ eeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeateeas M11 e Transmission processing flag eseeseeseeseeeeeeeeererenensnsnnns M12 e Receive clear command pulse Signal eceeeeeeeeees M15 e Receive clear acceptance flag eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeteees M16 e Receive clearing flaQ eeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeateeateas M17 e Communication disable flag
429. the control code for the BIDOUT instruction They are also stored in the data transmission result storage area in the buffer memory address 2574 For data communication from the Q series C24 to the external device The error codes are added by the Q series C24 When an error code is transmitted the Q series C24 writes the same error code in the data reception result storage area of the buffer memory address 258p 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL MELSEC Q 7 1 3 Sequence program for data reception This section explains the sequence program for data reception For details on the BIDIN instruction for data reception see Chapter 9 X3 Read request CH1 Create control data from DO Processing for normal completion stores receive data etc Q series C24 ready signal X1E es Reception data read X3 request signal BIDIN instruction BIDIN instruction complete device BIDIN instruction complete device 1 OFF Normal completion Receive data count storage area Buffer memory address 600 Receive data storage area Buffer memory address 601 to 7FF Data reception Response transmission 1 Start the local station PLC The values specified with GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 2 When data is received from the external device the reception data read request signal turns ON 3 After the control data for the BIDIN instruction is
430. the next CPU module which will be another station via MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 7 unction Q2AS H Multiple block batch read write All allowed 9707B or later products All allowed x This function is added to modules showing 9707B or later in the package indication and the DATE column of the rating plate x3 Access to other stations cannot be performed via data link system MELSECNET II MELSECNET B x4 Transmission is only possible using the printer function x5 When the Q series C24 is used it is possible to read write a maximum of 960 words in case of QC24 N it is possible to read write a maximum of 480 words x6 230400 bps can be used via CH1 of QU71C24N R2 R4 only The maximum transmission speed of QU71C24 R2 is 115200 bps App 7 App 7 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 2 2 Using Programs Designed for the QC24 N and Installing the Q Series C24 into Existing Systems This section explains how to use programs designed for serial communication modules in the QnA series and the installation of the Q series C24 into an existing system When using the Q series C24 make sure to set the operation mode station number and transmission specifications with the following parameter setting screen of GX Developer e Intelligent function module switch setting screen The Q series C24 does not have the setting switches to set the operation mode station number and transmission specification that are availabl
431. the protocol for the QnA series serial communication modules QnA compatible 3C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA compatible 4C frame Formats 1 to 4 QnA extension frame Formats 1 to 4 Details are explained in Chapter 3 of the Reference Manual Terms Description One of the message formats for the serial communication module for performing communication using the MC protocol and binary code data QnA compatible 4C frame This is the same message format as the communication frame using the protocol for the QnA Format 5 series serial communication modules QnA compatible 4C frame Format 5 QnA extension frame Format 5 Details are explained in Chapter 3 of the Reference Manual Data name when the fixed format portion of messages to be sent or received between a serial communication module and an opposite device is registered in the module and used for sending and receiving data with the functions listed below The contents of an user frame data should conform to the specifications of the opposite device The data array of the head and tail sections of a message transmission control code C24 station number sum check fixed data etc to be sent and received is registered in the serial communication module before use MC protocol on demand function Data communication function using the non procedure protocol Details are explained in Chapter 9 of the User s Manual Applications User fram
432. ther the communications error The following methods are available for testing if normal communications are possible C24 or an external with the Q series C24 alone cause is in the Q series device is unclear 1 With one the Q series C24 set CH1 and CH2 to the non procedure protocol and connect the wiring the same as for the self loopback test and transmit data from one channel and receive the transmitted data at the other channel If the transmitted data and the received data are the same transmit and receive processing is performed normally When two Q series C24 are available set one Q series C24 to the non procedure protocol and the other Q series C24 toa dedicated protocol and transmit an MC protocol message from the non procedure protocol station If the MC protocol station returns the transmit message normally transmit and receive processing is normal 10 40 10 40 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 3 14 Troubleshooting when data cannot be communicated via modem A Bidirection oe ee giao ae e Check the error code and execute A modem initialization error occurs P processing accordingly e Auto modem initialization Modem connection channel designation is Set Modem connection channel cannot be executed not performed designation There is an error in the switch settings in the Review the switch settings Set it to match GX Developer the local station modem and the TA Set the communicat
433. through is the same or different External device Communication through GX Developer Communication using the MC protocol 2 3 4 U2 1 Setting from GX Developer Relay station 1 PLC No 1 2 PLC No 2 3 PLC No 3 PLC No 4 1 Module used for routing controlled by PLC No 1 Q series C24 controlled by PLC No 1 2 Module used for routing controlled by PLC No 2 The modules used for the routing are MELSECNET H network modules 1 2 3 4 2 2 The QnA compatible 4C frame should be performed for access to non control PLCs when communicating using the MC protocol However the available functions differ depending on the QCPU to be accessed whether it is a control PLC or a non control PLC See the Reference Manual for the available functions and accessible range x A module used for routing can access the following modules when accessing other stations e MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network module e Qseries C24 Ethernet interface module x If there is a module of function version A among the modules for routing itis possible to access the control PLC of that particular module only In addition it is possible to access other stations via a module controlled by the same control PLC 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 9 Remote password check function Details are explained in the User s Manual Appli
434. time designated in 7 cycle time rat ge Section 10 3 17 condition agreement transmission setting nnot receive by an interrupt Cannot ro y P e Cannot receive data Section 10 3 17 program e Cannot write setting value in flash ROM of the Q Cannot perform initial setting 9 Section 10 3 19 series C24 x1 If an error occurs while performing data exchange using the modem function described in User s Manual Application Chapter 3 first check the following items and confirm whether or not the error is caused by the modem TA connection If an error relating to the modem function is occurring perform necessary corrective actions for each cause according to the reference sections given below e Check the ON OFF status of current I O signals of the Q series C24 e Check the storage status for error codes related to the modem function See Sections 10 2 3 e Check the ON OFF status of the DR terminal of the modem TA See the manual for the modem TA 10 27 10 27 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q The following are precautionary notes when exchanging data with an external device via one of the Q series C24 interfaces 1 When the power supply to the Q series C24 or external device is started the remote device that is connected may generate a reception error 2 10 28 If the remote device that is connected starts up while data is being transmitted the remote device side will generate a reception error
435. timer constant K Baton pass status TO T2 Cyclic transmission status More than sequence scan time x 4 Parameter communication status More than sequence scan time x 3 T1 T3 T4 Reason This way the control is not stopped even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a faulty cable condition and noise interference Also the multipliers of 4 and 3 should only be considered as a guideline 3 REMFR REMTO instruction Perform programming so that the next instruction is executed after the REMFR REMTO instruction is executed and then completed The completion of the REMFR REMTO instruction can be confirmed by the completion device POINT 1 After the execution of the REMFR REMTO instruction several scans are required before the read write of the actual data is completed 2 For the interlock program for the remote master station and remote I O station of the MELSECNET H and details of the REMFR REMTO instruction refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network App 33 App 33 APPENDIX MELSEC O Appendix 9 2 When accessing buffer memory using sequence program In the following program example data are read from or written to the buffer memory of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction Use GX Configurator SC to change the default value of the buffer memory Using GX Configurator SC save the new setting value to the flash ROM of
436. ting communication protocol number 6 transmission setting description CH1 side l oO Oo oO CH2 side Setting communication protocol number 1 transmission setting description S SS OS oO oO Oo Oo oO oO oO fo a Station No 1 being set While the CH1 side is set to the non procedure protocol and the CH2 side is set to the MC protocol format 1 this indicates the communication rate setting error on the CH1 side 10 14 10 14 10 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 10 2 Error Code Tables The following shows the error codes error contents and corrective action for errors that are generated during communication between the Q series C24 and an external device The signal name in the following table indicates the CHO side LED on status or communication error status that is stored into buffer memory address 201H 202H when an error occurs The CHO side LED on status and communication error status can be confirmed by GX Developer s System monitor or GX Configurator SC Refer to Section 10 1 1 For errors without a corresponding signal name entered to errors generated with the MC protocol communication NAK comes on 10 2 1 Error code table The following shows the error codes error contents and corrective action for errors generated during communication using MC protocol excluding A compatible 1C frame non procedure protocol and b
437. tion Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO Output frame system setting Setting screen CH1 Transmission user frame No designation system setting iof xi Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 170 No 0000 Module model name GJ71C24N Setting item Setting value Input within the following value range for the non procedure protocol H0001 H03e7 Default frame H03e8 HO4af Flash ROM registered user frame H8000 Transmit area of buffer memory H8001 H801f Butfer memory registered user frame when bit 14 is turned ON 1 for the non procedure protocol only the output frame No designation can be transmitted without ASCII BIN conversion and addition of additional code Input by the following value range for the modem initialization HO7d0 HO7db 05 registered initialization data H09c4 H09e1 Flash ROM initialization data H8001 H801f Buffer memory initialization data For PLC CPU monitoring input within the following value range in the non procedure protocol v Flash ROM setting Write to File save module Read from Fie read module Details Cannot execute test Make text file Execute test Close Setting item ae Setting value storage Reference section containing Setting item j buffer memory address detailed explanation BA to 11DH Chapter 11 of Output frame No designation 1st to 100th ake 15A to 1BDH User s Manual Application
438. tion 0 Priority Other than 0 Non priority transmission wait time unit 100 ms Retransmission time transmission method designation 0 Do not resend 1 Resend Simultaneously transmission data valid invalid designation e Receive data valid invalid b0 0 Valid 1 Invalid Transmission data valid invalid b8 0 Valid 1 Invalid No reception monitoring time timer 0 designation OH Wait infinitely 28H to FAOH Monitoring time unit byte Response monitoring time timer 1 designation OH Wait infinitely 1H to BB8H Monitoring time unit 100 ms Transmission monitoring time timer 2 designation OH Wait infinitely 1H to BB8H Monitoring time unit 100 ms Buffer memory head address designation 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH Data length designation 0000H to 3400H Transmission buffer memory head address designation 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH Transmission buffer memory length designation 0001H to 1A00n Received data count designation 0001H to 33FEH Received data count Receive complete code designation FFFFH No designation for receive complete code OH to FFH Receive complete code Receive buffer memory head address designation 400H to 1AFFH 2600H to 3FFFH Receive buffer memory length designation 0001H to 1A00H Receive data clear request 0 No request First frame No designation 1st 0 No designation First frame No designation 2nd 0 No designation Last frame No designation 1st 0 No
439. tion No check Re Half duplex communications control designation Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation O Priority Others Non priority transmission wait time units 100ms Retransmission time transmission Do not retransmit method designation hi Ie Flash ROM setting Details Wits to File save module Select input Read from Fis wai module Ora Setting range DTR DSR control DC1 2 3 4 control DC1 3 control DC2 4 control Make text file Execute test Close 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q Setting items TORI Setting value storage Reference section containing Setting item buffer memory address detailed explanation DTR DSR ER DR DC control designation 93H 133H ise ai DC1 DC3 Xon Xoff code designation 941 1344 et a z User s Manual Application DC2 DC4 code designation 95H 135H Communication system designation 98H 138H Section 3 2 of CD terminal check designation 97H 137H User s Manual Basic Half duplex communications control designation i ae co ree 99H 139H Simultaneous transmission priority non priority designation Chapter 8 of Half duplex communications control designation OAWI3A User s Manual Application H H Retransmission time transmission method designation No reception monitoring time timer 0 designation 9CH 13CH Ta f 3 Chapter 6 of Response monitoring time timer 1 designation 9DH 13DH et a at
440. tions This section explains how to perform the common operations in the data setting auto refresh setting and monitor test screens 1 Available Control Keys The following table lists the special keys that can be used during operation of utility and their applications Cancels a newly entered value when entering data in a cell a a __ the window a Moves between the controls inthe window 0 between the controls in the window Used in conjunction with the mouse to select multiple cells in the selection test When a cell is selected clears all set data Deletes the character where the cursor is positioned up Moves the cursor one page up Page Down Moves the cursor one page down Confirms the value entered in the cell 2 Operation Command Buttons Current value displa Displays the current value of the selected item Make text file Creates a text file TXT format under the specified file name and saves to it the contents currently displayed on the screen Start monitor Starts monitoring of the current value field Stops monitoring of the current value field Execute test Registers the system setting data of the selected item in the flash ROM 1 To apply Execute test to multiple items simultaneously set the data for the corresponding items select the multiple items while pressing down Ctrl then click Execute test x1 The settings for receive data clear request and flash
441. tocol is performing data communication the Q series C24 turns ON when communications is enabled 5 DSR signal 6 During DTR DSR control if this signal is OFF the Q series C24 does not send data to the external device Be sure that this signal is always turned ON when the external device is ready to receive If DTR DSR control is not implemented the DSR signal status is ignored 6 RS signal 7 e The Q series C24 turns ON OFF the RS signal as shown below e When the communication system is full duplex communications if the Q series C24 ready signal X1E is ON the Q series C24 turns ON the RS signal e When the communication system is half duplex communications when the Q series C24 sends data to an external device it turns ON the RS signal e The RS signal is not turned OFF even when the receive data cannot be stored in the Q series C24 7 CS signal 8 The Q series C24 does not send data to an external device when this signal is OFF e Be sure that this signal is always turned ON when the external device is ready to receive 8 Rl signal 9 The RI signal is used when the modem status is monitored on the Q series C24 side It should be connected as needed The RI signal is not needed to be connected when the modem is not connected 2 The ON and OFF states of each signal indicate the following conditions Output side Input side ON eee 5 VDC to 15 V DC 3VDCto15 VDC OFF 5VDCto 15VDC 3VDCto 15VDC 3 Interfac
442. toring module y display Select input Pinedo Fleread Make tent fie Clear request Off Execute test N Close 1 Display the Monitor Test screen 2 Select Clear request for CHO ERR clear request 3 Click on Execute test 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 2 Communication error clear request for CHO and to turn LED off on Monitor test others screen This is used to turn off the CHO LED of the Q series C24 and to initialize clear the communication error information The CHO LED on status and communication error information can be confirmed on the Monitor test others screen Operation procedure Monitor test others _ 5 Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value Communication error clear request for CH1 No request Request and to turn LED off Request1 SI0 PRO P S C N NAK ERR LED Request2 SD WAIT ACK NEU LED Request3 All CH2 SD WAIT status OFF f SID status OFF PRO status OFF P S status OFF C N status OFF NAK status OFF r Flash ROM setting r Details Write to R Current value Monitoring module eee display Cannot execute test Read from P I a File read Make text file tart monito Stop monitor eee Close 1 Display the Monitor test others screen 2 Select any of Request 1 to 3
443. tputs for conditional transmission data transmission Designation of data No for connection for conditional transmission and notification 3 Only the QU71C24N R2 R4 whose first 5 digits of the serial No are 06062 or later is applicable System area for other than the one described on the left 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION MELSEC Q 4 SETTINGS AND PROCEDURES PRIOR TO OPERATION This chapter explains the settings and procedures required before starting a system that uses the Q series C24 1 When using the Q series C24 please read the safety precautions at the beginning of this manual 2 The installation and setup methods of the Q series C24 are the same as those for CPU modules 3 For module installation and setup see the user s manual for the PLC CPU used 4 1 Handling Precautions The following explains the precautions for handling the Q series C24 1 Do not drop the module or subject it to heavy impact since it is made of resin 2 Tighten the module terminal and fixing screws within the specified tightening torque range as follows Tightening torque range RS 422 485 terminal block terminal screws M3 screw 0 42 to 0 58 N m RS 422 485 plug in connector socket terminal screw for 0 20 to 0 25 N m QJ71C24N R4 M2 screw Module fixing screw normally not required M3 screw 1 0 36 to 0 48 N m x1 A module can be easily fixed
444. truction complete device r 1 ON when transmission OUTPUT instruction complete device 1 abnormal completion normal completion abnormal completion lt gt 1 scan Transmission data count designation area buffer memory address 4001 n Transmission data storage area Transmission data buffer memory address 4014 to k Transmitting data 1 Starts the local station PLC The setting values for GX Developer are stored in the Q series C24 2 Inputs the user data transmission command signal 3 Executes the OUTPUT instruction after storing the transmission data and the control data for the OUTPUT instruction in the device Data is sent when the OUTPUT instruction is executed 4 When the Q series C24 transmission processing completes the completion device for the OUTPUT instruction turns ON When the completion device 1 abnormal completion signal turns ON the error code is stored in the control data completion status S1 1 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL MELSEC Q Program example When Q series C24 I O signals are from X Y00 to X Y1F PLS M50 The transmission command is converted into pulse ABCDEFG on Transmission data is stored MOV HOAOD DIS MOV KI DO Designate the number of the interface CHO that will send the data vov Ko D1 Clear the transmission result storage device to 0 Mov K5 D2 Designate the transmission data count in
445. tting item Setting value On demand function designation 0400 Buffer memory head address designation Data length designation 0000 Input following four items within the following range O Not designated H0001 HO3e Default frame H03e8 HO4af Flash ROM user frame H8001 H801f Buffer memory user frame On demand user frame designation 0000 First frame No designation 1st First frame No designation 2nd 0000 Last frame No designation 1st 0000 Last frame No designation 2nd 0000 Message wait time designation 0000 0 No wait time Flash ROM setting Details Write to module Fessler File read module File save Hexadecimal input Setting range 0400 3FFF Make text file Execute test Close Setting items Buffer memory head address designation A0H 140H Data length designation A1H 141H First frame No designation 1st A9H 149H Chapter 10 of AAg 14Aq User s Manual Application Last frame No designation ist ABH 14BH Last frame No designation 2nd ACH 14CH 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 4 7 Non procedure system setting Purpose For data transmission using the non procedure protocol register system setting values Startup procedure e Online operation Monitor screen gt CHO Non procedure system setting e Offline operation Flash ROM setting screen gt CHO Non procedure system setting Setting screen CH1 Non pr
446. ual Application units 100 ms r Chapter 5 of Word byte units designation 96H 136H p a te User s Manual Application Section 3 2 1 of User s Manual Basic Chapter 7 of User s Manual Application eae f User s Manual Application Chapters 6 and 7 of User s Manual Basic Transmission transparent code designation 1st NOE 3 2030H to 2038H Chapter 12 of Transmission transparent code designation 2nd to 10th Bp 2130H to 2138H User s Manual Application Receive transparent code designation 120H 1COH Chapter 13 of ASCII BIN conversion designation 121H 1C1H P aey User s Manual Application Chapter 4 of Receive interrupt issued designation 2010H 2110H P des User s Manual Application 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator SC MELSEC Q 8 6 4 MC protocol monitor Purpose Monitor the status and setting values of the data communication using the MC protocol Startup procedure Monitor screen gt CHO MC protocol monitor Monitor screen CH1 MC protocol monitor BE Module information Module type Serial Communications Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Module model name QJ71C24N Setting item Current value Setting value Transmission sequence status Command receive wait On demand execution result 0000 Data transmission result 0000 Data reception result 0000 MC protocol transmission error code 0000 gt 00 CH1 Transmission normal completion Off x01
447. uction Turns OFF the flash ROM read request signal Sets the read flag Reads the user frame from the flash ROM access area of the buffer memory to D4 and higher Normal completion of REMFR instruction Abnormal completion of REMFR instruction Sets the read flag App 51 APPENDIX MELSEC Q Appendix 9 11 When deleting user frame The following program example deletes a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 using the REMFR REMTO instruction and I O signals Refer to Section 9 4 of the User s Manual Application for details It is recommended to use GX Configurator SC when deleting a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the Q series C24 Refer to Chapter 8 1 Program conditions The following program deletes a user frame registered to the flash ROM of the QJ71C24N when the delete command X1030 turns ON a Devices used e Delete COMMANG cccecceeeteceteeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeseneeseaeesenneeeenees X1030 e Delete command pulse Signal eceeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteees M10 Delete Tlag c 6 ci lel al a eee M11 e Delete result acquisition command cceeeeeteeeeeteteeees M12 e Completion device for REMFR REMTO instruction M100 to 103 e Normal abnormal completion flag for REMFR REMTO aT a fei 6 9 Preeperesetcrerreerrereece rene a a tere ererery a M200 to 202 e Delete instruction ccceccecescecesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseneeseaeeseeneese
448. ultaneous transmission error Q series C24 Sum check External device code Q series C24 Ignores the receive Time check data of 2 1 timer 1 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL 4 Transmission invalid reception invalid 2 1 E N Arbitrary data Sum check External device Q code Ignores the receive data of 1 1 Q series C24 Generates a simultaneous E Sumch ck transmission error N Arbitrary data Ignores the receivedata of 2 1 Q code Time check timer 1 response monitoring time shown in the illustration is described in Section 6 2 of User s Manual Application When the transmission control see Chapter 9 of User s Manual Application is performed and the simultaneous transmission data valid invalid designation sets that the receive data is valid and transmission data is valid the Q series C24 performs message transmission and message reception processing as described below During message transmission processing time check by timer 1 response monitoring time is performed 1 Message transmission 1 1 in the illustration e If the Q series C24 receives a terminate transmission request DC3 received DSR signal OFF from the external device during message transmission it terminates data transmission e When the Q series C24 receives the ready to send signal DC1 received DSR signal ON it restarts data transmission 2 Message reception e If t
449. unication from the Q series C24 to the external device The sum check code to be transmitted is calculated and added by the Q series C24 When No sum check is specified no sum check code is transmitted Example The following shows the sum check code when ABCDEFGHIJ and the numeric value 100 are sent as data when the unit is in bytes te Arbitrary data gt Data n E ose S ai ei a e h eth A B C D E F G H J i Sum Q e99 i check i 0064 External device side 000CH 0064n code L H L H L H 05x OCH 00H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H 471 48H 49H 4An 64H 00H 27H 03H x Q series C24 XR vV J OCH OOH 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H 47H 48H 49H 4An 64H OOH Added value 03274 H L b15 to b8 b7 to b1 bO Contents of 03274 memory gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 41 ji L A J 03H 27H 7 DATA COMMUNICATIONS USING BIDIRECTIONAL PROTOCOL e MELSEC Q Error code The error code indicates the definition of the error during NAK response For more details on the error codes see Chapter 10 1 For data communication from the external device to the Q series C24 For error codes from the external device transmit the codes specified by the user The error codes 0022H to 005Fu that are not used by the Q series C24 can be used The Q series C24 stores the received error codes as a completion status in
450. unt designation for condition agreement transmission and data transmission 1 to 100 Output count designate the number of frame transmissions Data No for connection designation for condition agreement transmission and notification OBB8H to OBD5h 8001H to 801 FH Data No for connection R h Block For designation fe monitoring 8617 jof PLC CPU The structure of each area is the same as the first block monitoring device area devices See 2 for the details of each area No 2 to 10 System area 3 SPECIFICATIONS Address Decimal Hex Application For designation of PLC CPU monitoring 8423 8679 function 20E7H 21E7H 8424 8680 20E8h 21E8x 8425 to 8681 to 8449 2101n ess 21055 anian 8455 2107n 8457 2109H 8708 2204n 8964 2304n 8965 23051 PLC CPU monitoring 8966 function 2306n MELSEC Q Registration allowed not allowed Initial Applica Reference value protocol section I Mc Non Bi Transmission pointer designation for condition agreement transmission 1 to 100 Output head point send from nth Send the user frames designated in the following transmission frame No designation areas from the designated pointer position address CH1 side BAH to 11DH CH2 side 15AH to 1BDH Output count designation for condition agreement transmission 1 to 100 Output count designate the number of frame transmissions
451. uring RUN and restart data communications e Stop the CPU and restart data communications e A write command was designated when Disable Disable during write during RUN was set RUN bre or sequence program was written during e The sum check calculated by the Q series C24 and e Check the external device sum the transmitted sum check are not the same check Pare e Check and correct the external e Received message that is different from the control z i Protocol error renee device transmit message and procedure with the communication protocol setting pase restart data communications r e Match the Q series C24 and 044 Framing error e The data does not match the stop bit setting SIO external device settings e The next data was received before the Q series C24 e Decrease the transmission rate Overrun error s SIO Her received all the preceding data and restart data communications e Designation method error in part of a message e A command that does not exist was designated Character area an e Check and correct the external e The number of processing points is outside the A error device transmit message and range for the command tart data t issi l l ri ransm n e A device that does not exist was designated a E p e Received data that cannot be used Sum check error i f Replace the CPU with a CPU that e The CPU cannot communicate with the Q series as i PLC access error can communicate with the
452. value as explained in Chapter 8 About The Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the serial communication modules unless otherwise specified 1 Generic terms and abbreviations of relevant modules In this manual the following generic terms and abbreviations are used to indicate the PLC CPU and other modules used for the data communication functions of the serial communication modules Module model names are provided when relevant model names are needed to be shown Generic term abbreviation Description of generic term abbreviation Abbreviation for QU71C24N QU71C24N R2 QU71C24N R4 QU71C24 and QU71C24 R2 type serial Q series C24 C24 communication modules Indicated as C24 in the diagrams Generic term for AJ71QC24N AJ71QC24N R2 AJ71QC24N R4 A1SJ71QC24N A1SJ71QC24N R2 Generic term for are QC24N nn Q25HCPU Q1 2PHCPU Q25PHCPU lacpustation sd station Abbreviation for the PLC with QCPU installed QnACPU Generic term for Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 E T Q4ACPU Q4ARCPU Qaanacru S Generic term for QCPU QnACPU Generic term for AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 R2 A1SJ71UC24 R4 A1SJ71UC24 PRF A1SJ71C024 R2 A1SJ71C24 R4 A1SJ71024 PRF A2CCPUC24 A2CCPUC24 PRF x A series computer link modules Generic term for the module below UC24 Computer link module AJ71QC24 AJ71QC24 R2 AJ71QC24 R4 A1SJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24 R2 Ser
453. verview of the Serial Communication Module cccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaesaeeeeeeaesaeseeseeeeaeeaeeneeaeeas 1 1 1 2 Features of the Serial Communication MOUIe cceccecceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceeeeaesaesaeeeeeeaesaesaeseeeeaneaeeensaeeas 1 2 1 3 About Added Changed Functions in Function Version B ccscceccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeseeseeesaeeaeeeeseaeeaeeas 1 10 2 1 Applicable SyS eM Sa aaa a a aa a r hls eh a T ie nv aa a aa a etl ditviivi daiwa es 2 1 2 2 Combinations of PLC CPU and External Device and Available FUNCTIONS cccsccesseeeeeseeeeees 2 3 2 3 For Use in Multiple CPU Syste Ma reet ae e aa ata aaa a a a aaa a aaa ae Sa aee aaa aa aae 2 6 2 4 For Use with QO0J Q00 QO1 CPU 0 ceeecccseceseseeseseseseseeeseseseeeseeeseaeseeeseaeseseseaeseaeseaeseaeseaeseaeseaseaeesaeeaas 2 7 2 5 For Use at MELSECNET H Remote I O Station ccccccecceseseceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeeaeeaeeneeeaeaes 2 8 2 6 Checking the Function Version Serial No and Software Version ccccccsccsscssecseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeaeens 2 12 3 1 Performance Specifications n ra aaia aaa aaa a aa Ea eaaa A EET a Aa Ta aaa ENa eiaa aa 3 1 3 2 RS 232 Interface Specification ececceceesceeececceceeseeeeceeeseeaeeaeceeesaeeaecaessaseaeaesaaeeaesaesaeseaseaaeeaesaeeneseaeeats 3 3 3 2 1 RS 232 connector specifications 2 2 2 eeeeeeeececeeceeseeeececeeseeaecaeeaeeeaeeaecaeesaeeaecaesaeeaeeaecaeseeeateaneeseat
454. x Determined by the user For registration No 8001H For registration No 8002H For registration No 8003H The user registration area has the following combined uses with data written by the user according to the purpose of use by the TO instruction etc For registration No 80054 See each explanation item concerning the configuration of each area the data written etc For registration No 800641 1 if data communications is being carried out by user For registration No 8004H For registration No 8007H _ egistration frame Refer to left User registration frame User s Manual Application Not allowed For registration No 8008H Chapter 9 description 2 If data communications is being carried out by the modem function For registration No 800AH Initialization Data User s Manual Application Section 3 4 3 Connection Data User s Manual Application Section For registration No 800CH 3 4 4 For registration No 8009H For registration No 800BH For registration No 800DH For registration No 800EH 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Address Applicable Registration Decimal Hex Application Name Ge protocol allowed not pe Ss Me Non Bi allowed 7486 to 7526 1D3Ex 7 D66H For registration No 800FH 7527 to 7567 Boe 1D67H i D8Fx For registration No 8010H For registration No For registration No The user registration area h
455. y problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion Microsoft Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe System
456. y the dedicated instruction CSET This instruction clears the reception data up to the present without interrupting the data transmission processing Procedure for clearing In case of the CH1 side interface 1 Execute the CSET instruction If the CSET instruction is executed while the read request X03 X0A or reception abnormal detection signal X04 XOB is turned on the CSET instruction is kept waiting until the signal is turned off 2 The reception data clear processing is executed at the OS area of the Q series C24 see Section 6 1 2 6 DATA COMMUNICATION USING THE NON PROCEDURE PROTOCOL X20 MELSEC Q The following is a program example of clearing the reception data by the dedicated instruction CSET KO DO Set the execution type K4 D2 Set the request type Reception data clear D200 MO Execute the reception data clear SET M100 Normal completion M1 SET M101 Abnomal completion MOV D1 D300 RST M100 Reset the complete flag by external command RST M101 3 Receive data clear procedure using FROM TO instruction Write and read the buffer memory receive data clear request area addresses A8 H 148H using the procedure described below When resuming data communications with an external device resume it after completing the reception data clear processing with the Q Series C24 Depending on the data communications system it may be necessary to restart data communications with the external device afte

Q Corresponding Serial Communication Module User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents